User Manual

AWG2021
Arbitrary Waveform Generator
070-9097-50

www.tektronix.com
Copyright
Tektronix Japan, Ltd. All rights reserved.
Copyright
Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved.

Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes
that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.

Tektronix Japan, Ltd., 5–9–31 Kitashinagawa, Shinagawa–ku, Tokyo 141–0001 Japan

Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077

TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.

 



Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year
from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either
will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the
defective product.

In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the
warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for
packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid.
Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the
Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any
other charges for products returned to any other locations.

This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting
from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a product that has been
modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or
difficulty of servicing the product.

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX
AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Table of Contents

General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Getting Started
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Start-up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Operating Basics
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Basic Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Menu Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Numeric Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Using the General Purpose Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Operating Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Necessary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Example 1: Setting the Date & Time and Adjusting the Brightness . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Date/Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Setting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Example 2: Output of a Waveform Using the Sample Waveform Library Disk . 2-28
Loading Sample Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Setting the Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Waveform Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Example 3: Creating Files and Arbitrary Waveform Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Creating a Waveform File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Using the Point Draw Function . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Creating Waveforms Arithmetically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Creating an Equation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Creating a Sequence File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Creating Autostep Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Setting the Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Setting Operation Mode and Waveform Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

AWG2021 User Manual i

Table of Contents

Example 4: Loading and Saving Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Saving Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Loading Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Auto Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Example 5: Loading Waveforms From Other Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Example 6: Using the Waveform Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
CH1 Waveform Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Waveform Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81

Reference
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Menu Items Available With Each Editing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
EDIT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Initial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Creating or Editing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Using File Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Locking and Unlocking Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Expanding a Sequence File into a Waveform File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Waveform Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Entering the Waveform Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Opening and Selecting Editing Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Saving Files and Exiting the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Naming a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Graphic Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Settings for the Waveform to be Edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Creating a Standard Function Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Editing Waveforms in Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Timing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Timing Display Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Timing Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Editing Waveform Data in Timing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Setting Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Shifting Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
Inverting Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
Copying LInes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
Exchanging LInes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Applying Logical Operations to Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
Expanding Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Inserting Other Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
Pseudo-Random Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
Table Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
Table Display Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
Table Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
Settings for the Waveform to be Edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
Editing Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135

ii AWG2021 User Manual

 Table of Contents

Editing Waveform Data in Table Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135

Cut, Copy, and Paste Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
Equation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
Entering the Equation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
Saving Files and Exiting the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
Equation Editor Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
Equation Editor Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
Creating and Editing Equation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-156
Compiling Equations into Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
Sequence Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
Entering the Sequence Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
Saving Files and Exiting the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
Sequence Editor Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
Sequence Editor Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
Creating and Editing Sequence Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166
Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
Sequence File Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
Autostep Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171
Entering the Autostep Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-172
Saving Files and Exiting the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-172
Autostep Editor Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-174
Autostep Editor Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
Creating and Editing Autostep Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177
Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-186
Jumping to a Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-188
Convolution Waveform Editor (Option 09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-189
Entering the Convolution Waveform Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-189
Saving Files and Exiting the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190
Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190
Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-191
Selecting a Waveform File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-192
Executing Convolution/Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-193
FFT Editor (Option 09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-195
Entering the FFT Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-195
Saving Files and Exiting the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-197
FFT Editor Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-197
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-198
FFT Editor Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199
Editing in the Frequency Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200
Magnifying a Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-204
Selecting a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205
Selecting a Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-207
SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-211
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-211
SETUP Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-212
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-213
SETUP Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-214

AWG2021 User Manual

Table of Contents

Selecting the Display Format for the SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-216

Selecting Output Parameter Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-217
Numeric Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-217
Selecting a Waveform or Sequence File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-217
Setting Clock Source and Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-219
CH1 Waveform Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-221
Setting Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-225
Setting Amplitude and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-225
Setting Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-226
Setting Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-226
Linking the CH1 Waveform and Amplitude or Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-226
MODE Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-229
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-229
MODE Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-230
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-231
MODE Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-232
Setting the Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-233
Cont Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-233
Triggered Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-233
Gated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-234
Burst Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-235
Waveform Advance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-236
Autostep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-238
Setting Trigger Parameters for an External Trigger (Gate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-241
Setting Sync Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-242
LOAD/SAVE Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-243
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-243
Memory Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-244
LOAD/SAVE Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-245
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-246
LOAD Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-247
Selecting the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-249
Loading Files from Mass Memory into Internal Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-251
Saving Files from Internal Memory to Mass Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-253
Saving Data in Text Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-254
Transferring Waveform Data Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-255
Loading Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-255
Selecting Instruments Made by Other Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-256
Auto Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-258
Supported Floppy Disk Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-259
UTILITY Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-261
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-261
UTILITY Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-262
Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-263
Disk and Nonvolatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-264
Using the Disk Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-264
Internal Non-volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-273
Remote Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-274
GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-274
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-278
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-278

 AWG2021 User Manual

 Table of Contents

Other Settings and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-279

Setting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-279
Settings for Hard Copy Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-286
Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-288
Diagnostics and Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-290
Function Waveform Generator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-295
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-295
Function Generator Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-296
Function Generator Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-297
Setting the Output Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-298
Selecting the Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-298
Selecting the Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-298
Setting the Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-298
Waveform Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-298
Setting the Output Parameters for the Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-298
Setting the Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-298
Setting the Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-299
Setting the Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-299
Setting the Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-299
Setting the Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300
External Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300
Sync Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300
Marker Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-301

Appendices
Appendix A: Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Option 02 (2-Channel Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Option 03 (ECL Digital Data Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Option 04 (Digital Data Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Option 09 (FFT Editor and Convolution Process) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Option 1R (Rack Mount) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Option 1S (WaveWriter S3FT400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Option 95 (Certificate With Calibration Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Option B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Power Cord Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Appendix B: Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Nominal Traits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Warranted Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Typical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Appendix C: Performance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Before Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

AWG2021 User Manual v

Table of Contents

Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Operating Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Check Cont Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Check Triggered Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Check Burst Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Check Gated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
Check Waveform Advance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Check Autostep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Arithmetic Operation Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
Check External AM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
Check Internal AM Operation (Option 02 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
Check Internal Add Operation (Option 02 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
Clock Frequency and Amplitude Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
Check Clock Frequency Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
Check Clock Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
Gain and Offset Accuracy Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
Check Gain Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
Check Offset Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32
Pulse Response Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
SYNC Out and MARKER Out Amplitude Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
External Trigger Level Accuracy Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37
External CLOCK IN Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
ECL Digital Data Out Check (Option 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
TTL DIGITAL DATA OUT Check (Option 04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-46
Floating Point Processor Check (Option 09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49
Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Description of Representative Waveform Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Clock Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Trigger Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Clock Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Sequence Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Waveform Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Multiplier (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Preamplifier (Adder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
X5 Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
Appendix F: Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Horizontal Axis Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Sampling Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Random (rnd) Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6


AWG2021 User Manual

 Table of Contents

Pattern Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7

Logical Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13
FFT (Fast Fourier Transforms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-16
Repackaging for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-23
Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-24
Appendix G: Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

AWG2021 User Manual 

Table of Contents

List of Figures

Figure 1-1: Rear Panel Controls Used In Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Figure 1-2: ON/STBY Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Figure 2-1: Front Panel Overall View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Figure 2-2: Front Panel Button Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-3: Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-4: Rear Panel Overall View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-5: Rear Panel Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-6: CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-7: Menu Buttons and Bezel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-8: Numeric Input Using Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Figure 2-9: Numeric Keys, Unit Keys, Delete Key, and
ENTER Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Figure 2-10: General Purpose Knob and Arrow Buttons . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Figure 2-11: Knob Icon and Underscore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Figure 2-12: Menu Display (showing Date/Time item selected) . . . . . 2-25
Figure 2-13: Date/Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Figure 2-14: Setting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Figure 2-15: Inserting the Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Figure 2-16: Sample Waveform Library Disk Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Figure 2-17: CRT Screen Display When Load All is Selected . . . . . . 2-30
Figure 2-18: SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Figure 2-19: Waveform File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Figure 2-20: GAUSS_P.WFM File Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Figure 2-21: MODE Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Figure 2-22: Connections in Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Figure 2-23: Channel On/Off Buttons and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Figure 2-24: Initial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Figure 2-25: Waveform Editor Graphic Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Figure 2-26: Setting the Point Value for the Right Side Vertical
Bar Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Figure 2-27: Creating a Sine Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Figure 2-28: Creating a Ramp Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Figure 2-29: Naming a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Figure 2-30: Initial Menu File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Figure 2-31: Entering a Name for the Copied File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

viii AWG2021 User Manual

 Table of Contents

Figure 2-32: Setting the Edit Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Figure 2-33: Drawing a Waveform Using the Point Draw Function . 2-46
Figure 2-34: Connecting the Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Figure 2-35: Creating a Sine Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Figure 2-36: Sine Wave With Noise Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Figure 2-37: Equation Editor Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Figure 2-38: Equation List Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Figure 2-39: Display of Compiled Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Figure 2-40: Initial Menu File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Figure 2-41: Sequence Editor Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Figure 2-42: Sequence Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Figure 2-43: Sequence Waveform Display With Show Overview
Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Figure 2-44: Moving the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Figure 2-45: File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Figure 2-46: Setting File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Figure 2-47: Setting the File for Step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Figure 2-48: Setting the File for Step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Figure 2-49: SETUP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Figure 2-50: Setting Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Figure 2-51: Connections for Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Figure 2-52: MODE Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Figure 2-53: Setting the Marker Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Figure 2-54: Menu Displayed When Triggered is Selected . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Figure 2-55: MANUAL Button and TRIGGER INPUT Connector . 2-65
Figure 2-56: Menu Displayed When Autostep is Selected . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Figure 2-57: Autostep File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Figure 2-58: SAVE Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Figure 2-59: Files Saved in NVRam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Figure 2-60: Internal Memory File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Figure 2-61: Files Loaded into Internal Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Figure 2-62: Connections for Example 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Figure 2-63: DSO Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Figure 2-64: Confirmation Message (asking if it is O.K. to change the
remote port and GPIB configuration settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Figure 2-65: GPIB Source List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Figure 2-66: Screen When Sine Set for CH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Figure 2-67: CH1 Output Parameter Setting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Figure 2-68: Connections for Example 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81

AWG2021 User Manual


Table of Contents

Figure 3-1: Initial EDIT Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Figure 3-2: Display of the Initial Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-3: Menu Displayed When Rename is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-4: Menu Displayed When Delete is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3-5: Menu Displayed When Lock is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-6: Menu Display When Expand SEQ into WFM is
Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Figure 3-7: Graphic CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Figure 3-8: Waveform Editor With Three Editing Areas . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Figure 3-9: Menu Display When Another Waveform is Selected . . . . 3-17
Figure 3-10: Waveform2 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Figure 3-11: Menu Display When Show Catalog Entry is Selected . . 3-19
Figure 3-12: Waveform3 Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Figure 3-13: Menu With File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Figure 3-14: Waveform Editor Graphic Display Menu Structure . . . 3-24
Figure 3-15: Graphic Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Figure 3-16: Setting the Unit for the Horizontal Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Figure 3-17: Menu Displayed When Clock is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Figure 3-18: Sub-Menu Showing Cursor Link to... Selected . . . . . . . . 3-34
Figure 3-19: Grid Set to On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Figure 3-20: Creating a Sine Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Figure 3-21: Adding Noise to the Sine Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Figure 3-22: Multiplying Sine Waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Figure 3-23: Defining the Editing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Figure 3-24: Cutting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Figure 3-25: Pasting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Figure 3-26: Menu Display When Draw... is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Figure 3-27: Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Figure 3-28: Horizontally Shifted Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Figure 3-29: Vertically Shifted Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Figure 3-30: Display Expanded Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Figure 3-31: Display Expanded to x1.5 Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Figure 3-32: Horizontally Inverted Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Figure 3-33: Vertically Inverted Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Figure 3-34: Display of Waveform Clipped Above Clip Level . . . . . . 3-57
Figure 3-35: Marker Signal 1 Set High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Figure 3-36: Entering Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Figure 3-37: Defining the Location for Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

AWG2021 User Manual

 Table of Contents

Figure 3-38: List of Files for Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Figure 3-39: File Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Figure 3-40: Inserting Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Figure 3-41: Waveform Example before Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Figure 3-42: Absolute Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Figure 3-43: Square Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Figure 3-44: Cube Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Figure 3-45: Square Root Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Figure 3-46: Normalize Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Figure 3-47: Integral Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Figure 3-48: Differential Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Figure 3-49: Example of Waveform Before Arithmetic Operations . 3-69
Figure 3-50: List of Files for Waveform Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Figure 3-51: Selected File Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Figure 3-52: Waveform Addition Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Figure 3-53: Data Shifted Using the “Right” Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Figure 3-54: Data Compressed Using the “Compress” Item . . . . . . . . 3-73
Figure 3-55: Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Figure 3-56: Quadratic Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Figure 3-57: Shift with “Cursor Point” Set to “Exclude” . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Figure 3-58: Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Figure 3-59: Data Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Figure 3-60: Increasing the Size of the Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Figure 3-61: Two Waveform Editing Areas Designated . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Figure 3-62: Setting the Copy Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Figure 3-63: Setting the Copy Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
Figure 3-64: Waveform Copying (number of points in waveform =
Interval value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Figure 3-65: Waveform Copying (number of points in waveform <
Interval value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Figure 3-66: Waveform Copying (number of points in waveform >
Interval value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Figure 3-67: Waveforms Used for Waveform1 and Waveform2 . . . . . 3-86
Figure 3-68: Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Figure 3-69: Compare... Item Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Figure 3-70: Comparison Without Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Figure 3-71: Comparison With Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Figure 3-72: Zoom Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Figure 3-73: Horizontal Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94

AWG2021 User Manual 

Table of Contents

Figure 3-74: Vertical Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95

Figure 3-75: Timing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Figure 3-76: Waveform Editor Timing Display Menu Structure . . . . 3-97
Figure 3-77: Timing Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Figure 3-78: Count Up Pattern Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Figure 3-79: Gray Code Pattern Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Figure 3-80: Setting Waveform Data to High/Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Figure 3-81: Pattern Data Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Figure 3-82: Setting Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Figure 3-83: User defined Code Conversion Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
Figure 3-84: Shifting Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
Figure 3-85: Inverting Waveform Data State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
Figure 3-86: Copying Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Figure 3-87: Exchanging Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
Figure 3-88: Expanding Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
Figure 3-89: Shift Register Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
Figure 3-90: Register Values and Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
Figure 3-91: Sample Settings for Register Values and Taps . . . . . . . . 3-126
Figure 3-92: Table Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
Figure 3-93: Waveform Editor Table Display Menu Structure . . . . . 3-130
Figure 3-94: Table Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
Figure 3-95: Numeric Displays for Waveform Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
Figure 3-96: Example of Equation File Data and Resulting
Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
Figure 3-97: Equation Editor Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
Figure 3-98: Equation Editor CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
Figure 3-99: Menu With Operation Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
Figure 3-100: Component Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
Figure 3-101: Trigonometric Function Waveform Expressed With
Variable x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
Figure 3-102: Trigonometric Function Waveform Expressed With
Variable t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
Figure 3-103: Equation Using exp( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147
Figure 3-104: Equation Using log( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
Figure 3-105: Equation Using ln( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148
Figure 3-106: Equation Using sqrt( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-149
Figure 3-107: Equation Using abs( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-149
Figure 3-108: Equation Using int( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
Figure 3-109: Equation Using round( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150



AWG2021 User Manual

 Table of Contents

Figure 3-110: Equation Using norm( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-151

Figure 3-111: Equation Using max( and min( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-152
Figure 3-112: Equation Using rnd( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
Figure 3-113: Waveform Before Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154
Figure 3-114: Waveform After Differentiation Using diff( . . . . . . . . . 3-154
Figure 3-115: Waveform After Integration Using integ( . . . . . . . . . . . 3-155
Figure 3-116: Menu Displayed When Insert Other Equation is
Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-157
Figure 3-117: Setting Waveform Point Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158
Figure 3-118: Example of Compiled Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
Figure 3-119: Sequence File Data and Sample Waveform Display . . . 3-161
Figure 3-120: Sequence Editor Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
Figure 3-121: Sequence Editor CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
Figure 3-122: Example of Waveform Display When Show Catalog
Entry is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
Figure 3-123: Example of CRT Display When Show Overview is
Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-170
Figure 3-124: Autostep File Data and Output Waveforms . . . . . . . . . 3-172
Figure 3-125: Autostep Editor Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173
Figure 3-126: Autostep Editor CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
Figure 3-127: Selecting the Item for File Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177
Figure 3-128: File Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
Figure 3-129: Sample File Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
Figure 3-130: Setting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-179
Figure 3-131: Clock Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-181
Figure 3-132: CH1 Operation Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182
Figure 3-133: Filter Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-183
Figure 3-134: Amplitude Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
Figure 3-135: Offset Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-185
Figure 3-136: Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Structure . . . . . 3-190
Figure 3-137: Convolution Waveform Editor CRT Display . . . . . . . . 3-191
Figure 3-138: Selecting a Waveform File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-192
Figure 3-139: Sample Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-193
Figure 3-140: Sample Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-194
Figure 3-141: FFT Window Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-196
Figure 3-142: FFT Editor Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-197
Figure 3-143: FFT Editor CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199
Figure 3-144: Menu Displayed When Draw... is Selected . . . . . . . . . . 3-202
Figure 3-145: Drawing a Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-204

AWG2021 User Manual 

Table of Contents

Figure 3-146: Magnified Signal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205

Figure 3-147: Low Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206
Figure 3-148: High Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206
Figure 3-149: Band Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206
Figure 3-150: Band Cut Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-207
Figure 3-151: Fundamental, Odd, and Even Components . . . . . . . . . 3-209
Figure 3-152: SETUP Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-212
Figure 3-153: SETUP Menu (Graphic Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-214
Figure 3-154: SETUP Menu (Text Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-216
Figure 3-155: Clock and Waveform Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-219
Figure 3-156: Multiplying CH1 Waveform by CH2 Waveform . . . . . 3-222
Figure 3-157: Adding CH1 Waveform and CH2 Waveform . . . . . . . . 3-223
Figure 3-158: Multiplying CH1 Waveform by an External
Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-224
Figure 3-159: Setting Amplitude and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-225
Figure 3-160: MODE Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-230
Figure 3-161: MODE Menu CRT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-232
Figure 3-162: Output Waveform for External Trigger Signal in
Triggered Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-234
Figure 3-163: Output Waveform for External Gate Signal in
Gated Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-235
Figure 3-164: Output Waveform for External Trigger Signal in
Burst Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-236
Figure 3-165: Output Waveform for External Trigger Signal in
Waveform Advance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-237
Figure 3-166: Output Waveform for External Trigger Signal in
Autostep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-239
Figure 3-167: Autostep File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-240
Figure 3-168: Slope and Level Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-241
Figure 3-169: Relationship Between Memory and Execution of
Load/Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-244
Figure 3-170: LOAD/SAVE Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-245
Figure 3-171: LOAD Menu CRT Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-247
Figure 3-172: LOAD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-251
Figure 3-173: SAVE Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-253
Figure 3-174: Connecting Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-255
Figure 3-175: GPIB Source List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-256
Figure 3-176: List of Supported Models Made by Other
Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-257
Figure 3-177: UTILITY Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-262


 AWG2021 User Manual

 Table of Contents

Figure 3-178: Format... Sub-Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-265

Figure 3-179: Write Protect Tab on a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-268
Figure 3-180: File and Directory Display in the Root Directory . . . . . 3-270
Figure 3-181: Directory Name Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-271
Figure 3-182: Directory Displayed When Change Directory is
Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-271
Figure 3-183: File List for a Newly Created Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-272
Figure 3-184: Menu Displayed When NVRam is Selected . . . . . . . . . 3-273
Figure 3-185: Menu Displayed When GPIB is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . 3-275
Figure 3-186: Menu Displayed When RS232C is Selected . . . . . . . . . 3-277
Figure 3-187: Menu Displayed When Date Time is Selected . . . . . . . 3-278
Figure 3-188: Setting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-280
Figure 3-189: Menu Displayed when Catalog Order is Selected . . . . 3-281
Figure 3-190: Catalog Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-282
Figure 3-191: Catalog With Files Displayed in Type4 Format . . . . . . 3-283
Figure 3-192: Date/Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-284
Figure 3-193: Format Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-286
Figure 3-194: Port Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-287
Figure 3-195: Menu Displayed When System is Selected . . . . . . . . . . 3-289
Figure 3-196: I/O Event Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-290
Figure 3-197: Diagnostics List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-291
Figure 3-198: Calibration List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-292
Figure 3-199: FG Mode Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-296
Figure 3-200: FG Mode Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-297
Figure 3-201: Setting the Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-299
Figure 3-202: Setting the Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-299
Figure 3-203: Waveform Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300
Figure 3-204: Setting the Duty Value for a Pulse Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300

Figure A-1: Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

Figure A-2: Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Figure A-3: Generation of Excess Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Figure A-4: Output Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Figure A-5: Output Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Figure A-6: Data Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Figure A-7: Coaxial Cable End Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Figure A-8: Cable Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Figure A-9: Waveform Reproduction Circuit Example . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Figure A-10: Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

AWG2021 User Manual 

Table of Contents

Figure A-11: The Shape of the Output Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

Figure A-12: Generation of Excess Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Figure A-13: Output Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Figure A-14: Output Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Figure A-15: Data Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Figure A-16: Digital Data Out Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Figure A-17: Waveform Reproduction Circuit Example . . . . . . . . . . A-15

Figure B-1: Timing for the Data and Clock Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Figure C-1: Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Figure C-2: Calibrations Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Figure C-3: Cont Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Figure C-4: Triggered Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Figure C-5: Burst Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Figure C-6: Gated Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Figure C-7: Relationship between 1 Volt or Greater Gate Signal and
Waveform Output Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Figure C-8: Waveform Advance Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . C-19
Figure C-9: Autostep Mode Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Figure C-10: External AM Operation Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . C-22
Figure C-11: MODE Menu Autostep Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
Figure C-12: Clock Frequency Accuracy Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . C-26
Figure C-13: Clock Amplitude Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
Figure C-14: Gain Accuracy Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
Figure C-15: Pulse Response Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
Figure C-16: Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
Figure C-17: External Trigger Level Accuracy Initial Test Hookup . C-38
Figure C-18: External CLOCK IN Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . C-41
Figure C-19: ECL Digital Data Out Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . C-43
Figure C-20: Output Pins on the Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45
Figure C-21: TTL Digital Data Out Initial Test Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . C-46
Figure C-22: Output Pins on the TTL Digital Data Out Cable . . . . . C-48

Figure D-1: Gaussian Pulse Formula and Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Figure D-2: Lorentz Pulse Formula and Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Figure D-3: Sampling Function SIN(X)/X Pulse Formula and
Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Figure D-4: Squared Sine Pulse Formula and Waveform . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Figure D-5: Double Exponential Pulse Formula and Waveform . . . . D-8


AWG2021 User Manual

 Table of Contents

Figure D-6: Nyquist Pulse Formula and Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9

Figure D-7: Linear Frequency Sweep Formula and Waveform . . . . . D-10
Figure D-8: Log Frequency Sweep Formula and Waveform . . . . . . . D-11
Figure D-9: Amplitude Modulation Formula and Waveform . . . . . . . D-12
Figure D-10: Frequency Modulation Formula and Waveform . . . . . . D-13
Figure D-11: Damped Sine Wave Formula and Waveform . . . . . . . . . D-14
Figure D-12: Pulse Width Modulation Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Figure D-13: Pseudo-Random Pulse Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
Figure D-14: p/4 DQPSK I Axis Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Figure D-15: p/4 DQPSK Q Axis Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Figure D-16: Waveform for Magnetic Disk Readout Signal . . . . . . . . D-18
Figure D-17: Waveform for Magnetic Disk Readout Signal . . . . . . . . D-19
Figure D-18: Color Bar (Composite) Signal ($CB1-2H.SEQ) . . . . . . . D-21
Figure D-19: NTSC Y-C separate signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
Figure D-20: Multiburst Signal ($M-BURST.SEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
Figure D-21: Modulated Ramp Signal ($RAMP.SEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23
Figure D-22: Sweep Signal ($SWEEP.SEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23
Figure D-23: SMPTE Color Bar Signal ($SMPTE.SEQ) . . . . . . . . . . D-24
Figure D-24: IYQB Signal ($IYQB.SEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24
Figure D-25: Reversed Blue Bar signal ($RBLU.SEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25
Figure D-26: Color Bar + IYQB signal + Reversed Blue Bar
($MIX.SEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

Figure E-1: Block Diagram (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2

Figure E-2: Block Diagram (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Figure E-3: Clock Oscillator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Figure E-4: Connection Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Figure E-5: Connection Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Figure E-6: Connection Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
Figure E-7: Trigger Input, SYNC Output, and Waveform Timing . . E-8
Figure E-8: Clock Divider Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Figure E-9: Relationship Between Sequence Memory and Wave-
form Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Figure E-10: Waveform Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Figure E-11: Relationship Between Triangular Wave Resolution and
Number of Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
Figure E-12: Relationship Between Waveform Points and SYNC
Output in Cont Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Figure E-13: 100% Amplitude Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14

AWG2021 User Manual 

Table of Contents

Figure E-14: Representative Filter Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16

Figure E-15: Time Difference Between Signals and SYNC Signals . . E-17
Figure E-16: Attenuator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
Figure E-17: Offset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18

Figure F-1: Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Figure F-2: Point Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Figure F-3: Point Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Figure F-4: Equation Differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Figure F-5: Equation Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Figure F-6: Phase and Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-18
Figure F-7: Concept of Convolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-19
Figure F-8: Square Window and Frequency Characteristic . . . . . . . . F-20
Figure F-9: Hanning Window and Frequency Characteristic . . . . . . F-20
Figure F-10: Hamming Window and Frequency Characteristic . . . . F-21
Figure F-11: Blackman-Harris Window and Frequency
Characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21
Figure F-12: Blackman Window and Frequency Characteristic . . . . F-22
Figure F-13: Triangle Window and Frequency Characteristic . . . . . . F-22




AWG2021 User Manual

 Table of Contents

List of Tables

Table 1-1: Power Cord Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Table 2-1: Numeric Value Input Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Table 2-2: Numeric Value Input Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Table 3-1: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Table 3-2: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Table 3-3: Differences Between the Shift Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Table 3-4: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Table 3-5: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
Table 3-6: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
Table 3-7: Sequence File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
Table 3-8: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
Table 3-9: Autostep File — CH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171
Table 3-10: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-174
Table 3-11: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190
Table 3-12: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-198
Table 3-13: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-213
Table 3-14: Output Signal Amplitude Relative to External Modulation
Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-224
Table 3-15: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-231
Table 3-16: Sequence File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-237
Table 3-17: Autostep File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-239
Table 3-18: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-246
Table 3-19: Supported Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-250
Table 3-20: Supported Floppy Disk Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-259
Table 3-21: Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-263
Table 3-22: MS-DOS Formats for 3.5-inch Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-266
Table 3-23: Format Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-286
Table 3-24: Number of Data Points for Frequencies and Marker Signal
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-295

Table A-1: Output Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

Table A-2: Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Table A-3: Power Cord Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

AWG2021 User Manual xix

Table of Contents

Table B-1: Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Table B-2: Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Table B-3: Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Table B-4: Environmental Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Table B-5: Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Table B-6: Certifications and Compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

Table C-1: Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Table C-2: File List for Performance Check/Adjustment Disk . . . . . C-8
Table C-3: Clock Frequency Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28

Table E-1: Sequence File (XXX.SEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9

Table E-2: Output Signal Amplitude – External Modulation . . . . . . E-14
Table E-3: Filter Timer Delay Relative to SYNC Signals . . . . . . . . . . E-16

Table F-1: Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-24

Table G-1: External inspection check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

AWG2021 User Manual

General Safety Summary

Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.

Injury Precautions

Use Proper Power Cord To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this product.

Avoid Electric Overload To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not apply a voltage to a terminal that is
outside the range specified for that terminal.

Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To
avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be connected to earth
ground. Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the
product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.

Do Not Operate Without To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product with covers or
Covers panels removed.

Use Proper Fuse To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.

Do Not Operate in To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions.
Wet/Damp Conditions
Do Not Operate in To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an explosive
Explosive Atmosphere atmosphere.

Product Damage Precautions

Use Proper Power Source Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the
voltage specified.

Provide Proper Ventilation To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation.

AWG2021 User Manual xxi

General Safety Summary

Do Not Operate With If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified
Suspected Failures service personnel.

Safety Terms and Symbols

Terms in This Manual These terms may appear in this manual:


Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result

in injury or loss of life.



Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in
damage to this product or other property.

Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product:

DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.

Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product:

   " !   !

        ! 

!

Certifications and Compliances

CSA Certified Power CSA Certification includes the products and power cords appropriate for use in
Cords the North America power network. All other power cords supplied are approved
for the country of use.

xxii AWG2021 User Manual

Preface

This is the User Manual for the AWG2021 250 MHz Arbitrary Waveform
Generator.
Getting Started covers the features of the AWG2021, initial inspection, and start
up. In particular, the start up section covers the procedures required prior to
turning on the unit and points that require special care or caution.
Operating Basics first describes the components of the AWG2021 and their
functions. Then it describes the operating procedures used to output waveforms
from the AWG2021 by presenting a few simple examples.
Reference explains the specific functions and execution method details for each
menu.
Appendices describe options and accessories, product specifications, performance
verification instructions, sample waveform library, functional operation, and
other information.

Related Manuals
Other documentation for the instrument includes:

The AWG2021 Programmer Manual (Tektronix part number 070-8657-50)
explains how to control the AWG2021 with a computer through the GPIB or
RS-232-C interface. This manual is a standard accessory.

The AWG2021 Service Manual (Tektronix part number 070-9098-50)
provides information to maintain and service AWG2021, and provides a
complete board-level description of the instrument’s operation. This manual
is an optional accessory.

Conventions
In sections 2 through 4, you will find various procedures that contain steps of
instructions for you to perform. To keep those instructions clear and consistent,
this manual uses the following conventions:

Names of front panel controls and menu item names are printed in the
manual in bold with the same case (e.g., initial capitals, all upper case) as
they appear on the unit itself.

Instruction steps are numbered. When the number is omitted there is only
one step.

AWG2021 User Manual xxiii

Preface

When menu items are displayed in the manual, the menu type, either bottom
menu, side menu, or sub-menu, is distinguished and indicated as shown
below.

 

 


  


Consecutive button operations are expressed as shown below.

Setting (bottom)
View type... (side)
Timing (sub)
This expression describes the following button operations.
1) Selecting the “Setting” item from the bottom menu
2) Selecting the “View type...” item from the side menu.
3) Selecting the “Timing” item from the sub-menu.
Contacting Tektronix

Phone 1-800-833-9200*

Address Tektronix, Inc.

Department or name (if known)
14200 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA

Web site www.tektronix.com

Sales support 1-800-833-9200, select option 1*
Service support 1-800-833-9200, select option 2*
Technical support Email: [email protected]
1-800-833-9200, select option 3*
1-503-627-2400
6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific time

* This phone number is toll free in North America. After office hours, please leave a
voice mail message.
Outside North America, contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor; see the
Tektronix web site for a list of offices.

xxiv AWG2021 User Manual

Overview

This section describes the features of the AWG2021, initial inspection, and start
up.

Product Description
The AWG2021 is a portable arbitrary waveform generator capable of generating
both arbitrary and standard function waveforms.
This arbitrary waveform generator provides these major features:

custom waveforms for simulation and testing

waveforms that can not be generated with function generators
As an arbitrary waveform generator, this instrument has a clock frequency of
10 Hz to 250 MHz, an independent 256 Kword, 12-bit internal memory for each
channel (the second output channel is optional), and an output amplitude to
5 Vp-p (into 50 W). It can also generate two one-bit marker outputs which can be
placed anywhere within the 256K location memory, corresponding to each
arbitrary output channel.
There are several options available for the AWG2021, including two-channel
output, ECL or TTL digital data output, and FFT and convolution waveform
editor. These options allow the AWG2021 to handle a wide range of applications.
This instrument has four editors for making waveform files. Each editor is
equipped with a variety of editing functions, as described below.
1. Waveform Editor creates waveform data. This editor can display its data in
three formats: graphical, table, and timing, and the data can be edited in the
format appropriate for the application. Furthermore, the waveform editor can
edit up to three waveform files at the same time, thus easing the creation of
related waveform files.
2. Sequence Editor creates sequences of waveforms by combining waveform
files created with the waveform editor.
3. Equation Editor creates files with equations and compiles them into
waveform files.
4. Autostep Editor programs waveform files, including output conditions for
each channel, in steps.

AWG2021 User Manual 1 Ć1

Overview

An FFT editor and a convolution waveform editor are provided with AWG2021
units that include Option 09. These editors support frequency domain editing and
waveform convolution calculations.
As a function generator, the AWG2021 can generate sine waves, triangle waves,
square waves, ramp waves, and pulse waves. It can set the frequency, amplitude,
offset, polarity, and other factors for each of these waveforms independently, for
each channel.
The AWG2021 has a 3.5-inch floppy disk drive and non-volatile memory for
storing created waveform data and parameter settings. Each of these storage
devices can store the files created with the editors.
You control this instrument by way of its front panel hierarchical menu display
system or its rear panel GPIB or RS-232-C interfaces. (Instruments with
Option 03 or Option 04 don’t have the RS-232-C interface installed.)
Waveforms can be transferred directly through the GPIB interface from a digital
storage oscilloscope. Such direct waveform transfers allow for many types of
applications with other measurement equipment and computers. Supported
equipment includes our major digital storage oscilloscopes as well as the digital
storage oscilloscopes of other leading manufacturers.

Initial Inspection
Before unpacking the AWG2021 from its shipping carton, inspect it for signs of
external damage. If the carton is damaged, notify the carrier. The carton contains
the basic instrument and its standard accessories. Refer to the Standard Accesso-
ries list in Appendix A.
This instrument was thoroughly inspected for mechanical and electrical defects
before shipment. It should be free of mars or scratches. To confirm this, inspect
the instrument for physical damage incurred in transit and test instrument
functionality by following the Operating Examples in this manual. You can also
perform a full Performance Verification as listed in the Appendix C. If a
discrepancy is found, contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative.


. At installation time, save the shipping carton and packaging materials for
repackaging in case shipment becomes necessary.

1 Ć2 AWG2021 User Manual

Start Up

This section describes the procedures required prior to turning on the AWG2021.

Installation
Before you begin, refer to the Safety Summary at the front of this manual for
power source, grounding, and other safety information.
Before you use the instrument, ensure that it is properly installed and powered
on. To properly install and power on the instrument, perform the following steps:
1. Check that the operating environment is correct.
The AWG2021 operates correctly in ambient temperatures from +10_ C to
+40_ C and relative humidity from 20% to 80%. If this instrument is stored
at temperatures outside this usage temperature range, do not switch on the
power until the chassis has come within the usage temperature range. For the
information on the other operating environment, see Appendix B: Perfor-
mance Characteristics.

 . If you are installing this instrument in the dedicated rack, refer to the
instruction sheet that comes with the rack mounting kit.

2. Before switching on the power, double check that there is nothing blocking
the flow of air at the fan and air intake holes.
This instrument takes in outside air and cools itself by forcibly exhausting
air with the fan on its left side. Leave space at the sides of this instrument so
that the heat generated within the instrument does not build up and harm the
operation. There are holes for air intake on the sides and bottom of this
cabinet. After switching on the power, double check that the fan is turning.
Here are the minimums for the space at the sides of this instrument.
Top and rear: 7.6cm (3 inches)
Left and right: 15.2cm (6 inches)


Always unplug the power cord from the socket before checking the
line fuse to avoid electrical shock.

AWG2021 User Manual 1 Ć3

Start Up

3. Remove the fuse from the fuse holder on the rear panel and check the fuse.
To remove the fuse, turn it counter-clock-wise with a screwdriver while
pushing it in. There are two types of fuses provided. Here is the fuse type
and rating.

Fuse Cap Part

Fuse Fuse Part Number Number
0.25 inch × 1.25 inch (UL 198G,3AG): 6A 159Ć0239ĆXX 200Ć2264ĆXX
FAST, 250 V
5 mm × 20 mm (IEC 127):5A (T), 250 V 159Ć0210ĆXX 200Ć2265ĆXX

4. Check that you have the proper electrical connections.

The AWG2021 operates at the following power supply voltage.

Line Voltage Range 90 V - 250 V

Line Frequency 48 Hz - 440 Hz (90 V - 127 V)
48 Hz - 63 Hz (127 V - 250 V)
Maximum Power 300 W


Instruments are shipped with a power cord appropriate for use with
normal 115 V power systems. If the AWG2021 is to be used with 230 V power,
the power cord must be replaced with one appropriate for the power source
used. See Table 1-1, “Power Cord Identification”, for the available power cord
types.

5. Connect the proper power cord from the rear-panel power connector to the
power system.

1 Ć4 AWG2021 User Manual

 Start Up

Power On
6. Push the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH (shown in Figure 1 -1) on the
rear panel of this instrument. Power is now applied to the standby circuit of
this instrument.

 

   



Figure 1 Ć1: Rear Panel Controls Used In Start Up

AWG2021 User Manual 1 Ć5

Start Up

Table 1Ć1: Power Cord Identification

Plug Configuration Normal Usage Option Number

North America Standard
125 V

Europe A1
230 V

United Kingdom A2
230 V

Australia A3
230 V

North America A4
230 V

Switzerland A5
230 V

North American 1A
115V/15A Plug
NEMA 5Ć20P

North American 1B
120/208V 3ĆPhase Plug
NEMA L21Ć30P

7. Press the ON/STBY switch (shown in Figure 1 -2) on the lower left side of
the front panel to switch on the power for this instrument.

1 Ć6 AWG2021 User Manual

 Start Up

Once this instrument is installed, leave the PRINCIPAL POWER

SWITCH on and use the ON/STBY switch as the power switch.


. This instrument needs to be warmed up for at least 20 minutes in order to

operate at its optimum precision.

  

Figure 1 Ć2: ON/STBY Switch

StartĆup Diagnostics
8. Check the results of the start-up diagnostics.
When the power is applied to this instrument, the start-up diagnostics are
automatically run. These diagnostics check whether the instrument is
performing within its defined operating characteristics.
If all the diagnostic items are completed without error, Pass is displayed and
the system moves on to the SETUP menu.
If an error is detected, Fail and the error code are displayed. You can exit this
state and operate this instrument, but until the error is corrected, the
waveform outputs can not be relied on. If “Uncal” error message is

AWG2021 User Manual 1 Ć7

Start Up

displayed, you should execute the calibrations in the UTILITY menu. Still,
when the error message is displayed, contact our nearest representative. To
exit the diagnostics system, press any of the buttons. The system moves on
to the SETUP menu.


. In order to preserve the precision of the instrument, after the completion
of the warm-up or after temperature changes, calibrate the instrument. For
details on how to calibrate, see the explanation of the Calibration item on the
UTILITY menu in Section 3.

If this instrument is exposed to temperatures outside its usage temperature range

and the chassis temperature is inappropriate, an error will occur during the
diagnostics when the power is switched on. If this happens, wait until the chassis
temperature is appropriate, then switch the power on again.

Power Off
9. Toggle the ON/STBY switch.

1 Ć8 AWG2021 User Manual

Introduction

This section will discuss the following:

Overview. The names of the parts of the instrument and their functions.
Basic Menu Operation. Operations commonly performed on the instrument and
how to enter numbers
Operating Examples. Simple examples showing how to output waveforms.
These examples are designed to help you gain a basic understanding of the
instrument.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć1

Introduction


 AWG2021 User Manual

Overview

The instrument can be divided into three main areas: the front panel, the side
panel and the rear panel. In this section, we will list the names and functions of
the parts in each of these areas. We will also list typical display messages that
appear on the screen and what they mean.

Front Panel


1 2 
 


AWG2021 ARBITRARY WAVEFORM GENERATOR

MENU

SETUP CURSOR VALUE HARDCOPY

MODE
TRIGGER
MANUAL

EDIT
7 8 9 ns
F
INPUT

LOAD/SAVE
4 5 6 MHz/Js
E

UTILITY kHz/ms/mV 1MW ≤± 10VpĆp

1 2 3
D 50W ≤± 5VRMS

0 . A B Hz/s/V ENTER
F.G C

! DO NOT APPLY EXT SIGNAL

CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 1
MARKER 1 SYNC
5V 3V
25Vp-p MAX OPEN CIRCUIT FROM 50 W OPEN CIRCUIT FROM 50 W

ON/
STBY
CLEAR
MENU

8 7 6 5 4 3

Figure 2 Ć1: Front Panel Overall View

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć3

Overview

(1) Bottom Buttons Use the seven bottom buttons to display corresponding menus.
Pressing any button in the MENU column, or the F.G button,
displays its corresponding menu. These menus are generally
the highest level menus.
(2) Side Buttons Use the five side buttons to select the side menus displayed on
the right side of the screen. Selecting any item from bottom
menu displays a side menu. The side menu is generally a
lower level menu.
(3) CH1 SYNC Output The CH1 SYNC output connector provides a CH1 sync signal.
Connector The output level is 1.2 V or greater with a 50 W termination.
(4) CH1 MARKER1 Output The CH1 MARKER1 output connector provides a userĆspeciĆ
Connector fied marker. The output level is 2.5 V with a 50 W termination.
(5) Waveform Output Provides the waveform output path for each channel. A CH2
Connectors waveform output connector is provided only in instruments with
Option 02. The maximum output level is 5 VpĆp with a 50 W
termination. Note however, that output may exceed 5 VpĆp if
AM, Add or Ext AM mode has been selected for CH1
Operation from the SETUP menu.
                 


  
     
 

(6) Channel On/Off Buttons Press the channel on/off buttons to switch the output for each
and Indicators channel on and off. When set to on, the LED indicator is lit and
a waveform is output. When set to off, the LED indicator is
extinguished and a waveform is not output.
(7) CLEAR MENU Button Press this button to cancel any entering alphanumeric input
and return the system to the data before input. Also, for a side
menu item with ..." attached to it, pressing this button returns
the system from the sub menu (lowerĆlevel menu) to the side
menu. Using remote commands, the user may delete a
message that has been entered in the message area (see
page 2 Ć14).
(8) ON/STBY Button When the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH on the rear panel has
been pressed to supply power to the standby circuit, this button
can be pressed to provide power to the other circuits of the
instrument. Normally this button is used as a power switch.

2 Ć4 AWG2021 User Manual

 Overview

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

MENU
SETUP CURSOR VALUE HARDCOPY

MODE
TRIGGER
MANUAL

EDIT

7 8 9 ns
F
INPUT

LOAD/SAVE
4 5 6 MHz/ms
E

UTILITY
1 2 3 kHz/ms/mV 1MW ± 10VpĆp
D
50W ± 5VRMS

0 . B Hz/s/V ENTER
F.G A
C

20 19 18 17 16

Figure 2 Ć2: Front Panel Button Detail

(9) Menu Buttons and The MENU column comprises the SETUP, MODE, EDIT,
Indicators LOAD/SAVE and UTILITY buttons. To display one of these five
main menus on the screen, press the corresponding button in
the MENU column. The corresponding LED indicators show
which menu has been selected. Each of these menus is
described in detail in Section 3.
SETUP Menu Use the SETUP menu to set the following waveform output
parameters for each channel: clock source and frequency,
waveform/sequence file selection, operation, filter, amplitude
and offset. See Section 3 for more information.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć5

Overview

MODE Menu Use the MODE menu to set the operation mode. There are two
main types of operation modes: the trigger modes (Cont,
Triggered, Gated and Burst) and the modes in which
waveforms are output in sequence for each trigger (Waveform
Advance and Autostep). This menu also has an item for
setting the timing with which synchronization signals are
generated. See Section 3 for more information.
EDIT Menu The EDIT menu incorporates four types of editors: the
waveform editor, the equation editor, the sequence editor and
the autostep editor. Editing can be performed for each file type.
Instruments with Option 09 installed have an FFT editor to
permit editing in the freguency domain and a convolution editor
to operate the waveforms convolution in high speed.
The EDIT menu displays a list of files stored in internal
memory. New files can be created or existing files can be
selected from this list and edited. See Section 3 for further
information.
LOAD/SAVE Menu Press the LOAD/SAVE bottom button to select the appropriate
menu.
See Section 3 for further information.
LOAD Menu. Used when loading files from a floppy disk or
nonĆvolatile internal RAM (NVRam) into the internal memory of
the AWG2021, or from another instrument through the GPIB
interface.
SAVE Menu. Used when saving files from the internal memory
of the AWG2021 to a floppy disk or to the instrument's
NVRam.
UTILITY Menu Use the UTILITY menu to work on the files saved to a floppy
disk or the instrument's NVRam, to set the parameters for the
GPIB or RSĆ232ĆC interface, to execute diagnosis or calibration
of the instrument, or to set other instrument parameters. See
Section 3 for further information.
(10) ← and → Buttons Use the arrow buttons to shift to the right/left of the input digit
or position when a numeric value or character is input using the
general purpose knob. The digit input numeric value is
indicated at the underscore. Hold down these arrow buttons to
shift in succession.
(11) CURSOR Button and Use the CURSOR button to select a field or switch the active
Indicator cursor. The function of CURSOR button is different depending
on each menu.
When the LED indicator is illuminated, cursor function is
activated. When special CURSOR button movement is
required, a description of the CURSOR button is displayed on
the screen.

2 Ć6 AWG2021 User Manual

 Overview

(12) VALUE Button and Press the VALUE button to light the LED indicator. In this
Indicator state, inputting the numeric values or selecting the item can be
done using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob.
After input or selection, press the VALUE button to enter the
setting. When a special VALUE button movement is required,
an explanation of the VALUE button is displayed on the
screen.
(13) General Purpose Knob Use this knob to set a variety of functions and numerical values
on the instrument. A knob icon shown on the screen indicates
that that item is controlled by this knob.
(14) Delete Key Use this key to delete the character just in front of the cursor.
Hold down the key to delete characters in succession.
(15) HARDCOPY Button Use this button to output a hard copy of the data displayed on
the screen. The hard copy can be output to disk or to either the
GPIB or RSĆ232ĆC interface.
(16) TRIGGER INPUT This connector is used to enter an external trigger or gate
Connector signal. It allows external signals with a maximum input voltage
of 10 VpĆp into a 1 MW input impedance, and a maximum input
voltage of 5 VRMS into a 50 W input impedance.
(17) TRIGGER MANUAL When the operation mode is set to Triggered, Burst,
Button Waveform Advance or Autostep, pressing the MANUAL
button will cause waveform output to begin. Waveform output
will proceed and stop in accordance with the mode that has
been set. In Gated mode, the waveform will be output only as
long as the MANUAL button is pressed. In Cont mode,
pressing the MANUAL button has no effect.
(18) Unit Keys and ENTER The following unit keys are provided: ns, MHz/ms, kHz/ms/mV
Key and Hz/s/V. Press the appropriate unit key to specify the
desired numeric value and unit. Also, if a hexadecimal radix is
selected from the Waveform Editor Table display, the unit key
is used to input C-F. Press the ENTER key to enter the
numeric value and selected item.
(19) Numeric Keys Press the numeric keys to enter numeric data. The numeric
keys include the numerals 0 through 9, and the ." and -"
symbols. The ." and -" numeric keys are also used to input
hexadecimal A" and B", respectively, in the Waveform Editor
Table display. Hold down a numeric key as desired to repeat its
input.
(20) F.G Button Press the F.G button to switch from arbitrary waveform
generation mode to functional waveform generation mode. Use
this mode to select one of the standard function waveforms for
each output channel and to set its parameters. The functional
waveforms include sine, triangular, square, ramp and pulse
waveforms. You can set each function's parameters. See
Section 3 for further information.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć7

Overview

Side Panel

21

    ! 

Figure 2 Ć3: Side Panel

(21) Floppy Disk Drive  #  "  !    "! #  
     "   #  ! 
LOAD/SAVE !    "     

      "  #  #   
! 
 Never press the eject button to eject the floppy disk while the disk drive indicator light is
lit, as the stored data may be corrupted and errors may result.

2 Ć8 AWG2021 User Manual

 Overview

Rear Panel

 ! " 
% 22

WARNING ! ATTENTION ! LISTED

TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, THE POWER CORD UN CIRCUIT DE TERRE COTINU EST
RS-232-C PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR MUST ESSENTIEL EN VUE DU FONCTIONNEMENT
BE CONNECTED TO GROUND. SECURITAIRE DE L'APPAREIL.
R
FOR CONTINUED FIRE PROTECTION REPLACE FUSE ONLY NE JAMAIS METTRE L'APPAREIL EN 5J52
WITH 250V FUSE OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE AND RATING. MARCHE LORSQUE LE CONDUCTEUR DE
IEEE STD 488 PORT ELECTRICAL &
NO OPERATOR SERVICEABLE COMPONENTS INSIDE.DO NOT MISE A LA TERRE EST DEBRANCHE. ELECTRONIC MEAS &
REMOVE COVERS. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED TEST EQUIPMENT
PERSONNEL.

THIS INSTRUMENT MAY BE

PROTECTED BY ONE OR MORE R
PATENTS OR
PATENT APPLICATIONS.
INFORMATION PROVIDED ON
REQUEST.
CLOCK OUT MARKER 2 OUT
CH-1
2V FROM 50W 5V FROM 50W
VOLTAGE FREQUENCY FUSE (250V) FUSE (250V) AMPS POWER
UL 198G (3 AG) IEC 127
MARKER 2 OUT
RANGE RANGE ! MAX MAX
1/4x1 1/4 5 x 20 mm
CH-2
90-127VAC 48-440Hz
5V FROM 50W 6 A FAST 5 A (T) 4A 300 W
90-250VAC 48-63Hz

CLOCK IN
DISCONNECT POWER CORD
BEFORE REPLACING FUSE. ON PRINCIPAL
50W ± 2V MAX OFF POWER SWITCH
SONY/TEKTRONIX CORP.,TOKYO.JAPAN

MARKER 1 OUT SYNC OUT AM IN

CH2 CH2 CH1

5V FROM 50W 3V FROM 50W 10kW±5V MAX

27 26 25 24 23

Figure 2 Ć4: Rear Panel Overall View

(22) Power Source

#   ! ! ! # " !
Connector
(23) PRINCIPAL POWER  ! #!   #  " ! ! !$ "!
SWITCH  ! # $ !  ! ON/STBY "!!  ! !
 ! "$ # ! !  !  !  !"!
(24) Fuse Holder  # "$ "      ! "   
 "   "   !      $ ! 

 !%# "   " 

 When using the AWG2021 in Europe, you should use an IECĆapproved fuse. For details,
see page 1 Ć4.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć9

Overview

(25) CH1 AM IN Connector  !  "  ! !  %!  "!

$# !
 !   "!    W
! %" #!  ! %!  !!   !
 ±  ! ±  "!  "!   
(26) CH2 SYNC OUT  CH2 SYNC OUT ! # 
 & 
Connector (Option 02)  "!"! #     ! $!   W !!
(27) CH2 MARKER 1 OUT  CH2 MARKER 1 OUT ! #  " ' 
Connector (Option 02)
    "!"! #    $!   W
!!

2 Ć10 AWG2021 User Manual

 Overview

28 34

29

RS-232-C

30 CH2 DIGITAL DATA OUT CH1 DIGITAL DATA OUT

TTL LEVEL FROM 50W
IEEE STD 488 PORT

IEEE STD
488 PORT

31
CLOCK OUT MARKER 2 OUT CLOCK OUT MARKER 2 OUT

CH-1 CH-1
2V FROM 50W 5V FROM 50W 2V FROM 50W 5V FROM 50W

32
MARKER 2 OUT MARKER 2 OUT

CH-2 CH-2
5V FROM 50W 5V FROM 50W
33
CLOCK IN CLOCK IN

50W ±2V MAX 50W ±2V MAX

 "    

35

CH1 DIGITAL DATA OUT

ECL LEVEL 50W INTO -2V

IEEE STD
488 PORT

CLOCK OUT MARKER 2 OUT

CH-1
2V FROM 50W 5V FROM 50W

MARKER 2 OUT

CH-2
5V FROM 50W

CLOCK IN

50W ±2V MAX

   

Figure 2 Ć5: Rear Panel Detail

(28) RSĆ232ĆC Connector  RSĆ232ĆC     " 
  !   
(29) IEEE STD 488  IEEE STD 488     " 
Connector   !   
  

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć11

Overview

(30) CLOCK OUT This connector is used for internal clock output. The output
Connector level is 1 V with a 50 W termination.
(31) CH1 MARKER 2 OUT The CH1 MARKER 2 OUT connector provides a userĆspecified
Connector CH1 marker 2. The output level is 2.5 V with a 50 W
termination.
(32) CH2 MARKER 2 OUT The CH2 MARKER 2 OUT connector provides a userĆspecified
Connector (Option 02) CH2 marker 2. The output level is 2.5 V with a 50 W
termination.
(33) CLOCK IN Connector This connector is used for external clock input. This connector
allows external clock signals with a maximum input voltage of
±2 V into a nominal 50 W input impedance.
(34) CH1/CH2 DIGITAL These connectors are used to output CH1/CH2 digital data.
DATA OUT Connector The output impedance will be at the TTL level at 50 W with no
(Option 04) termination. For details, see Appendix A Option 04."
(35) CH1 DIGITAL DATA This connector provides digital data differential ECL output. It
OUT Connector (Option 03) is mounted in the fourth slot from the top. For details, see
Appendix A Option 03."

2 Ć12 AWG2021 User Manual

 Overview

CRT Display
1
2
8
3

Figure 2 Ć6: CRT Display

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć13

Overview

(1) Status Area The status line always displays the status of the instrument, no
matter what menu is displayed on the screen. Five items are
shown on the status line: the interface status (see the
AWG2000 Series Programmer Manual); the operation mode
and the trigger status (see page 3 Ć233); and the clock icon
(which indicates that the instrument is busy and cannot accept
input from any other sources)(ăą).
(2) Date and Time Area The date and time are displayed here. The display can be
turned on and off in the UTILITY menu (see UTILITY section).
(3) Bottom Menu Label The label for the selected bottom menu item is displayed.
Display
(4) Side Menu When selecting an item from a bottom menu, the correspondĆ
ing side menu is displayed at the right of the screen. Item
selection, numeral input, and execution of functions are
performed by pressing the button corresponding to the side
menu item.
(5) Bottom Menu Press any button of the MENU column or the F.G button to
display the corresponding bottom menu in the lower part of the
screen. To select an item from a bottom menu, press the
corresponding button.
(6) Message Display This area displays inquiries, or warnings for the user, enclosed
in a box.
(7) Button Operation Area Explanations of each front panel button operation for the
current menu are shown in this area.
(8) Message Area In the event of an error, a message (brighter than normal for
easy visibility) is displayed in this area. This is not an
interrogative to the user. Remote commands can be used to
enter a userĆdesignated message.

2 Ć14 AWG2021 User Manual

Basic Menu Operation

Menu Operations
Operations (settings, procedures and selection of parameters for waveform
output) are performed on this instrument by means of the system’s menus.
When one of the menu buttons in the center of the front panel is pressed, the
menu corresponding to that button will appear. There are six menu buttons: the
five buttons used in arbitrary waveform generation mode (SETUP, MODE,
EDIT, LOAD/SAVE and UTILITY) and below them the button used in
function waveform generation mode (F.G). See Figure 2 -7.
The menu items displayed on the screen are selected by pressing the correspond-
ing bezel buttons at the bottom of the screen (hereafter referred to as bottom
buttons) or to the right of the screen (hereafter referred to as side buttons). There
are 7 bottom buttons and 5 side buttons. When one of the buttons is pressed to
select an item, that item will be displayed inverted on the screen to indicate that
it is operational. See Figure 2 -7.

  

MENU

SETUP

MODE

EDIT

LOAD/SAVE

UTILITY


  
F.G

    

Figure 2 Ć7: Menu Buttons and Bezel Buttons

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć15

Basic Menu Operation

When you select the desired menu item, the numeric input columns and the
selections controlled by that menu are displayed. To change the selections and
numeric values, use the numeric keys or general purpose knob.
When you select a menu item, one of the following occurs.

The lower-level menu is presented.

The desired item can be selected and may have these characteristics:
each time the bezel button is pressed, the selection changes.
a list is presented from which you can select.

Numeric values can be input.

The moment the menu item is selected, the function is executed.

Menu Names
The on-screen menus are hierarchical. This section will give the names of the
menus in order from top (first level) to bottom.

Main Menus There are several different main menus. Pressing one of the MENU buttons
causes the corresponding main menu to appear.

Bottom Menu This menu is shown at the bottom of the screen. These items can be selected by
pressing the corresponding bottom button.

Side Menu This menu is shown in the right-hand side of the screen. These items can be
selected by pressing the corresponding side button.

SubĆMenus These menus are shown below the side menu. When an item in the side menu is
followed by an ellipsis (...), it indicates that that item has a sub-menu listing
additional choices.

Numeric Input
Generally, numbers are entered using one of the following methods:

Enter the desired value using the numeric keys

Turn the general purpose knob to set the desired value

2 Ć16 AWG2021 User Manual

 Basic Menu Operation

In the following section, we will explain these numeric input methods in more
detail.

Using the Front Panel To specify numeric values with the numeric keys, ENTER key, and unit keys on
Numeric Keys the front panel, perform the following steps.
1. Press the button for the menu item you want to change.
2. Use the numeric keys to input the desired value.
3. Press one of the unit keys or the ENTER key.
Figure 2 -8 shows the menu displayed when Amplitude is selected from the
SETUP menu. In this figure, the numeric keys are used to change the amplitude.
Here the asterisk in the numeric input column indicates that the value is being
input. Press the front panel ENTER key to enter the value and remove the
asterisk.

Figure 2 Ć8: Numeric Input Using Numeric Keys

Numeric Input Keys. Four types of keys are used to enter numeric values: the
numeric keys (0 – 9), the unit keys (ns, MHz/ms, kHz/ms/mV and Hz/s/V), the
Delete key and the ENTER key. These are shown in Figure 2 -9.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć17

Basic Menu Operation

7 8 9 ns
F

4 5 6 MHz/ms Delete Key

E

1 2 3 kHz/ms/mV
D

0 . A B Hz/s/V ENTER
C

Numeric Keys Unit Keys ENTER Key

Figure 2 Ć9: Numeric Keys, Unit Keys, Delete Key, and ENTER Key

Numeric Input Examples.

Example 1: Clock frequency numeric input (Clock in SETUP menu)
The value before input mode was 100.0 Hz and is to be changed to 12.3 Hz.
Pressing the “1”, “2”, “.”, “3”, and ENTER keys in order changes the input
column this way:

Table 2Ć1: Numeric Value Input Example 1

Input Key Numeric Value Column Numeric Value Status

100.0 Hz Before Input
1 * 1 During Input
2 * 12
. * 12.
3 * 12.3
ENTER 12.30 Hz Entered

When you press one of the numeric keys, the instrument switches to numeric
input status and the value that has been entered is displayed in the input column,
preceded by an asterisk. Enter other numbers as desired and then press the
ENTER key to confirm the value. Unless otherwise designated, the unit that is
used for numeric input will be the same as when numbers were previously
entered.

2 Ć18 AWG2021 User Manual

 Basic Menu Operation

To change the unit to MHz, press “1”, “2”, “.”, “3”, and MHz/
s keys in order.
This changes the value to 12.30 MHz. The frequency is expressed by a four-digit
number.
When a value has been entered, pressing one of the unit keys will change the unit
to that value and will confirm the number that has been entered. If you press the
unit key before the instrument has entered numeric input status), only the unit
will change; the numeric value that is currently displayed will be unaffected.


. After a value has been entered, if you proceed to another menu item
without first pressing either a unit key or ENTER, the input operation will be
canceled; the value you have entered will be discarded and the previous value
will be retained. If you attempt to enter a value outside the allowable range,
whether too high or too low, the value will change to the closest allowable value
(in other words, either the minimum or the maximum value).

Example 2: Offset numeric input (Offset in SETUP menu)

This example changes the offset from 2.500 V to –0.030 V. The input is as
shown in this table.

Table 2Ć2: Numeric Value Input Example 2

Input Key Numeric Value Column Numeric Value Status

  
 
    
  
  
    

In this case, pressing “–”, “.”, “0”, “3” Hz/sec/V also enters a value of –0.030 V.
The unit is displayed as “V”.

Using the General When the knob icon is displayed on the CRT screen, numeric values can be set
Purpose Knob using the general purpose knob and the ← (left/down) and → (right/up) buttons.
When setting numeric values in this manner, the value in the number column that
is underlined will be increased or decreased. Values will decrease when the
general purpose knob is turned counter-clockwise and increase when the general
purpose knob is turned clockwise. Values cannot be changed outside the
parameter range. Figure 2 -10 shows the general purpose knob and arrow
buttons. Figure 2 -11 shows the knob icon and the figure in the window with the
first decimal place underlined, indicating that this value may be changed.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć19

Basic Menu Operation

CURSOR VALUE

       

Figure 2 Ć10: General Purpose Knob and Arrow Buttons




 

Figure 2 Ć11: Knob Icon and Underscore

When a numeric value has been changed using the general purpose knob, there is
no need to confirm it by pressing the ENTER key on the front panel. The
numeric value is entered automatically without pressing the ENTER key. To
change a value using the general purpose knob, perform the following steps.
1. Press the button for the menu item you want to change.
2. Press the z and ! buttons to specify the digit to be the index for input.
The amount of change obtained by turning the general purpose knob is con-
trolled with the front panel z and ! keys. Press the z key to move the
underscore to the left and thus raise the amount of change to 10x. Or press the !
key to move the underscore to the right and thus reduce the amount of change for
general purpose knob turning to 1@10 th.
3. Turn the general purpose knob to change the value.

2 Ć20 AWG2021 User Manual

 Basic Menu Operation

Numeric Specification Example. Turning the general purpose knob one click to the
right increases the value of the underscored digit by 1. Turning it one click to the
left decreases the value by 1. For example, if the value is 173.0 and the cursor is
under the 7, turning the general purpose knob left or right changes the value as
shown below. If the underscored value is already 1, turning the general purpose
knob left does not decrease the value any further.
173.0 173.0
183.0 163.0
193.0 .........
203.0 23.00
213.0 13.00
Turning right Turning left
When the value has already been increased to the maximum allowable value for
the parameter, turning the general purpose knob further to the right has no effect.
Similarly, when the value has already been decreased to the minimum allowable
value for the parameter, turning the general purpose knob further to the left has
no effect.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć21

Basic Menu Operation


 AWG2021 User Manual

Operating Examples

In this section, we will use simple examples to illustrate the basic procedures for
waveform output on the AWG2021. Six examples will be given; these are listed
below. Buttons and menu items to be used will be shown to the left, and a
description of the corresponding operation will appear on the right.
First of all, you should make sure the power to the unit has been turned on; see
Section 1 “Start Up” for instructions on how to do this.
Example 1: Setting the Date & Time and Adjusting the Brightness
Example 2: Output of a Waveform Using the Sample Waveform Library Disk
Example 3: Creating Files and Arbitrary Waveform Outputs
Creating a Waveform File
Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Using the Point Draw Function
Creating Waveforms Arithmetically
Creating an Equation File
Creating a Sequence File
Creating Autostep Files
Setting the Output Parameters
Setting Operation Mode and Waveform Output
Example 4: Loading and Saving Files
Example 5: Loading Waveforms From Other Instruments
Example 6: Using the Waveform Function Generator
When a detailed description of a function is needed at the operation stage, see the
section dealing with that particular menu.


. These examples do not cover all of the functions and special features of
the instrument. The purpose of the examples is only to give you practice in
executing basic operations on the instrument.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć23

Operating Examples

Necessary Equipment
The following equipment is needed to execute Examples 1 – 6:

Digital storage oscilloscope (Tektronix TDS series instrument or equivalent)

50 W cables (3)

GPIB cable (1)

50 W terminators (2)

Sample waveform library disk (included with the instrument as a standard
accessory)

Signal generator

Example 1: Setting the Date & Time and Adjusting the Brightness
In Example 1, you will set the date and time on the instrument’s built-in clock
and adjust the brightness of the screen.

Setting the Date and Time In this operation, you will set the date and time on the instrument.
Be sure to do this when using the instrument for the first time. Once set, there
will usually be no need to reset these values. However, if the instrument has not
been used for an extended period of time, the date and time may be incorrect; in
such cases, you should set these values again using the same procedure. The date
and time are important, as they are used as a time stamp when creating or editing
files.
In this example, you will set the date to February 1, 1994 and the time to 15:30,
using the following procedure.
1. Press the UTILITY button in the MENU column.
2. Select Date Time from the bottom menu.
The menu shown in Figure 2 -12 will appear.

2 Ć24 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć12: Menu Display (showing Date/Time item selected)

3. Select Year from the side menu.

4. Turn the general purpose knob to set the year to 1994.
5. In the same manner, select Month, Day, and Hour from the side menu and
set the values to February, 1 and 15, respectively. The time is displayed in
24-hour fashion.
6. Select Minute from the side menu.
7. Use the general purpose knob to set the minute value to 30.


. When the setting for Hour or Minute is changed, the value for seconds
will be reset to 0.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć25

Operating Examples

Date/Time Display It is possible to have the date and time constantly displayed on the screen. To do
this, use the following procedure:
1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.
2. Select Display... from the side menu.
3. Press Date Time in the sub-menu and select On. The current date and time
will be displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, as shown in
Figure 2 -13.

  


Figure 2 Ć13: Date/Time Display

2 Ć26 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Setting the Display In this operation, you will set the display brightness of the screen. The display
Brightness offers three different levels of brightness. Use the following procedure to adjust
the overall display brightness to the proper level:
1. Select Brightness from the side-menu.

Figure 2 Ć14: Setting the Display Brightness

2. Turn the general purpose knob to set the brightness to the proper level.
The brightness can be changed between 0% and 100% in 1% increments; the
default setting is 70%.
This completes the Example 1.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć27

Operating Examples

Example 2: Output of a Waveform Using the Sample Waveform Library Disk

In Example 2, you will output a waveform using the sample waveform library
disk, a standard accessory included with the instrument.

Loading Sample The sample waveform should be loaded from the floppy disk to the internal
Waveforms memory of the instrument.
1. Press the LOAD/SAVE button in the MENU column.
2. Select Device from the bottom menu.
3. Select Disk from the side menu.
4. Select Load from the bottom menu.
5. Insert the sample waveform library disk that comes with this instrument into
the floppy disk drive.


. Do not remove the floppy disk while the floppy disk drive is operating.
This can destroy the data and cause errors.

Figure 2 Ć15: Inserting the Floppy Disk

The files will be displayed in the lower box of the LOAD menu. Figure 2 -16
shows how the files on the sample waveform library disk are displayed on the
screen.

2 Ć28 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć16: Sample Waveform Library Disk Files

6. Select Load All from the side menu. The display shown in Figure 2 -17 will
appear.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć29

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć17: CRT Screen Display When Load All is Selected

All the files in the lower box on the screen are loaded into internal memory. The
loaded files are displayed in the internal memory list in the upper box on the
screen.
Turn the general purpose knob to scroll through the list of files displayed in the
lower box on the screen. For explanations of the waveform in each file, see
Sample Waveform Library in Appendix D.


. The sample waveform library disk files are locked (and * is displayed next
to their names). You must unlock these files before you can edit them.

2 Ć30 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Setting the Output These parameters are used for waveform output.
Parameters
1. Press the SETUP button in the MENU column. The SETUP menu is
displayed.

Figure 2 Ć18: SETUP Menu

2. Select Waveform Sequence from the bottom menu.

3. Turn the general purpose knob to develop the waveform file list. Select the
file GAUSS_P.WFM from this list.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć31

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć19: Waveform File List

4. Select O.K. from the sub-menu. The selected file will be confirmed and the
output conditions will be automatically set. Figure 2 -20 shows the SETUP
menu with the file GAUSS_P.WFM selected.


. The selected file is locked. Therefore, although changes can be made to
the waveform clock, filter, amplitude, offset and other output conditions, these
changes cannot be saved to the file.

2 Ć32 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć20: GAUSS_P.WFM File Output Parameters

5. Press the MODE button in the MENU column. The MODE menu is
displayed.
The files selected from the SETUP menu are displayed in the MODE menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć33

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć21: MODE Menu

6. Select Cont from the bottom menu. When Cont is selected, the waveform is
continuously output.

Waveform Output 1. Connect this instrument and the oscilloscope with a 50 W cable and a 50 W
termination as shown in Figure 2 -22. This instrument’s waveform output is
calibrated to a 50 W load.




   W    

 W  

Figure 2 Ć22: Connections in Example 2

2 Ć34 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

2. Press the front panel CH1 On/Off button to switch on waveform output.
Figure 2 -23 shows the channel On/Off button and indicator.

 
 

CH 1 CH 2
! DO NOT
APPLY EXT SIGNAL

25Vp–p MAX OPEN CIRCUIT FROM 50 W

 

Figure 2 Ć23: Channel On/Off Buttons and Indicators

When the Channel is on, the indicator lights up and the set waveform is output
from the CH1 output connector.
3. Set the parameters for the connected oscilloscope as shown below and
display the waveform on the oscilloscope screen.
Volt/Div. 200 mV/Div.
Time/Div. 1 ms/Div.
Trigger Mode Auto
When you change the Clock, Amplitude, or Offset items with the SETUP
menu, the waveform changes in real time.
This completes the example 2.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć35

Operating Examples

Example 3: Creating Files and Arbitrary Waveform Outputs

When using the instrument for arbitrary waveform output, you should first use
the editors in the EDIT menu to create the waveform to be output. In this
operation, you will create an arbitrary waveform with the editors, and then you
will set the conditions for waveform output (frequency, amplitude, offset, etc.) in
the SETUP menu. Finally, you will set the operation mode in the MODE menu
to output the waveform.
In Example 3, we will practice the following series of operations:
Creating a Waveform File
Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Using the Point Draw Function
Creating Waveforms Arithmetically
Creating an Equation File
Creating a Sequence File
Creating Autostep Files
Setting the Output Parameters
Setting Operation Mode and Waveform Output

Creating a Waveform File Use the waveform editor graphic display to create a waveform file by performing
the following steps:
1. Press the EDIT button in the MENU column. Figure 2 -24 shows the initial
menu displayed.

2 Ć36 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć24: Initial Menu

2. Select New Waveform from the side menu. Figure 2 -25 shows the
waveform editor graphic menu. The default for the number of points in the
waveform is 1000.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć37

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć25: Waveform Editor Graphic Menu

3. Press the front panel CURSOR button to activate the right side vertical bar
cursor (it becomes a solid line).
Pressing the CURSOR button toggles the selected vertical bar cursor from
right to left and back again. You can move the selected cursor using the
general purpose knob or the numeric keys.
4. Press the following key sequence: 4, 9, 9, ENTER. This sets the point value
for the right side vertical bar cursor to 499 (see Figure 2 -26).

2 Ć38 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć26: Setting the Point Value for the Right Side Vertical Bar Cursor

5. Select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu.

6. Select Type from the side menu.
7. Turn the general purpose knob to select Sine.
8. Select Cycle from the side menu.
9. Press “2” and ENTER in that order to set the number of cycles for the sine
wave to 2.
10. Select Execute from the side menu.
A two-cycle sine waveform is created between the vertical bar cursors (see
Figure 2 -27).

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć39

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć27: Creating a Sine Waveform

11. Press the CURSOR button to activate the right side vertical bar cursor.
12. Press the following key sequence: 9, 9, 9, ENTER. This sets the point value
to 999.
13. Press the CURSOR button to activate the left side vertical bar cursor.
14. Press the following key sequence: 5, 0, 0, ENTER. This sets the point value
to 500.
15. Select Type from the side menu.
16. Turn the general purpose knob to select Ramp.
17. Select Amplitude from the side menu.
18. Press “1” and ENTER in that order to set the ramp wave amplitude to 1.
19. Select Offset from the side menu.
20. Press “.”, “5”, and ENTER in that order to set the ramp wave offset to 0.5.
21. Select Execute from the side menu. A two-cycle ramp waveform is created
between the vertical bar cursors (see Figure 2 -28).

2 Ć40 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć28: Creating a Ramp Waveform

This completes the waveform creation. Next, name the waveform file and exit
the waveform editor.
22. Select Close/Write from the bottom menu.
23. Select Write and Close from the side menu.
The display used to enter the file name will appear.
24. Input SAMPLE–1 as the file name. Use the general purpose knob to select S
from the character menu.
Then press the VALUE button. S is inserted into the file name input column.
In the same manner, input A, M, P, L, E, –, 1 (see Figure 2 -29).

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć41

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć29: Naming a File

25. When you finish inputting the file name, select O.K. from the sub menu.
The system returns to the initial menu and displays the waveform file created
(see Figure 2 -30). The extender “WFM” will be displayed after the file
name; this indicates that the file is a waveform file.

2 Ć42 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć30: Initial Menu File List

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć43

Operating Examples

Creating Arbitrary Arbitrary waveforms can be created on the graphic display with the POINT
Waveforms Using the DRAW function.
Point Draw Function
Use the following procedure to make a copy of the file SAMPLE–1.WFM
created in the previous operation.
1. In the initial EDIT menu, select Copy bottom menu. The display used to
enter the name of the copy of the file will appear, as shown in Figure 2 -31.

Figure 2 Ć31: Entering a Name for the Copied File

In this example, you will name the copy SAMPLE–2.

2. Press the Delete key on the front panel to delete the “1” in the file name.
3. Press “2.”
4. Select O.K. from the side menu.
SAMPLE–1 will be copied as a new waveform file named SAMPLE–2.
5. Check to make sure that the SAMPLE–2 waveform file is displayed
inverted in the file list in the initial menu. If it is not selected, turn the
general purpose knob until the name SAMPLE–2 is displayed inverted.

2 Ć44 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

6. Select Edit from the side menu.

The SAMPLE–2 waveform file will appear on the screen.
You will now set the range for waveform creation. The arbitrary waveform will
be created within this range using the Point Draw function.
7. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel. This will activate the vertical
cursor bar in the left-hand side of the screen.
8. Press “2”, “5”, “0”, and ENTER to set the point value of the left cursor to
250.
9. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel again to activate the vertical
cursor bar in the right-hand side of the screen.
10. Press “7”, “5”, “0”, and ENTER to set the point value of the right cursor to
750.

Figure 2 Ć32: Setting the Edit Range

You may now create the arbitrary waveform within the range designated by these
two vertical bar cursors, using the Point Draw function.
11. Select Operation from the bottom menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć45

Operating Examples

12. Select Draw... from the side menu.

The first point will be drawn.
13. Press the VALUE button on the front panel to determine the direction in
which the point cursor will move.
14. Using the general purpose knob, move the point cursor to draw another
point.
15. Select Add Draw Point from the sub-menu.
The point will be confirmed and an × will appear at that position.
16. Repeat steps 13 through 15 to determine other points. An example is shown
in Figure 2 -33.

Figure 2 Ć33: Drawing a Waveform Using the Point Draw Function

17. Select Smooth from the sub-menu to turn smoothing on.

When this is done, spline interpolation will be performed and the points that
have been drawn and the curve outside the area marked by the vertical bar
cursors will be connected in a smooth curve.

2 Ć46 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

If smoothing is turned off, linear interpolation will be performed and the

points that have been drawn and the curve outside the area marked by the
vertical cursors will be connected using straight lines.
18. Select Execute from the sub-menu.
The points between the vertical cursors will be connected in a smooth curve
(using spline interpolation), as shown in Figure 2 -34.

Figure 2 Ć34: Connecting the Points

19. Select Close/Write from the bottom menu.

20. Select Write and Close from the side menu.
The data for the SAMPLE–2 waveform file will be updated and the initial
EDIT menu will reappear.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć47

Operating Examples

Creating Waveforms You will now add a noise waveform to the sine waveform.
Arithmetically
1. Select New Waveform from the side menu in the initial EDIT menu.
2. Select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu.
3. Select Amplitude from the side menu.
4. Press “1” and ENTER in that order.
5. Check to make sure that the parameters for other items in the side menu are
set to the values shown below. If they are different, change them to the
values shown below.
Type Sine
Cycle 1.0
Offset 0.0000
6. Select Execute from the side menu.
The sine wave shown in Figure 2 -35 will be created.

Figure 2 Ć35: Creating a Sine Wave

7. Select Type from the side menu.

2 Ć48 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

8. Using the general purpose knob, select Add Noise.

9. Select Amplitude from the side menu.
10. Press “.”, “3”, and ENTER in that order.
11. Select Execute from the side menu.
Noise will be added to the sine wave, as shown in Figure 2 -36.

Figure 2 Ć36: Sine Wave With Noise Added

12. Select Close/Write from the bottom menu.

13. Select Write and Close from the side menu.
14. Make SAMPLE–3 the file name. See Step 24 in the waveform file creation
procedure for instructions on how to enter the file name.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć49

Operating Examples

Creating an Equation File This procedure is used to create a waveform using an equation.
1. Select New Equation from the side menu.
Figure 2 -37 shows the equation editor menu.

Figure 2 Ć37: Equation Editor Menu Display

To initially define an equation, you must specify its region in time. Do this by
selecting “range(” in the component menu. When a new equation file is created,
“range(0,” will automatically appear in the first line of the equation. Following
this notation, you must input the equation end time, as shown in subsequent
steps.
Select Setting from the bottom menu. When this is done, the default setting
(1000) for the number of points will appear. If the clock frequency has been set
to 1 MHz in the SETUP menu, the value will be 1 ms for each point. According-
ly, for 1000 points the waveform period will be 1 ms.
2. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
3. Set the time from 0 to 500 ms. Press the 5, 0, 0,
s, “)”, and “ ” (carriage
return), in order, using the numeric keys and unit key or by selecting and
entering these characters from the items in the component menu.

2 Ć50 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples


. You can use the general purpose knob to select an item from within the
component menu. After selecting an item, press the front panel VALUE button or
ENTER button to enter the selected item into the equation list.

Now you will create the equation for the time region set in the previous step.
4. For the equation, enter 0.5*sin(4*pi*x). Input 0, “.”, 5, *, sin(, 4, *, pi, *, x,
) with the numeric keys or from the component menu.
5. In the same manner, input the data as shown in Figure 2 -38.

Figure 2 Ć38: Equation List Input

6. Select Compile from the bottom menu.

After the compiling is complete, the waveform data is created from the
equation and the resultant waveform is displayed on the screen. Figure 2 -39
shows the compiled waveform data.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć51

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć39: Display of Compiled Waveform Data

7. Select Continue Operation from the side menu to return the system to the
previous equation edit menu.
8. Select Exit/Write from the bottom menu.
9. Select Write and Exit from the side menu.
10. Make SAMPLE–4 the file name. For details on how to input the file name,
see Step 24 from the waveform file creation procedure.
11. When you are finished inputting the file name, select O.K. from the
sub-menu.
The equation file (SAMPLE–4.EQU) and the waveform file (SAM-
PLE–4.WFM) of compiled data with the same name are created and the
system returns to the initial menu. See Figure 2 -40.

2 Ć52 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć40: Initial Menu File List

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć53

Operating Examples

Creating a Sequence File In this procedure, you will create a sequence file that combines two files: the
waveform file created with the waveform editor (SAMPLE–1.WFM) and the
waveform file created with the equation editor and then compiled (SAM-
PLE–4.WFM).
1. Select New Sequence from the side menu. Figure 2 -41 shows the sequence
editor menu.

Figure 2 Ć41: Sequence Editor Menu Display

2. Use the general purpose knob to select the waveform file from the Catalog
to go on the first line of the Destination list. Select SAMPLE–1.WFM
here.
3. Press the VALUE button on the front panel.
The file SAMPLE–1.WFM will be inserted in the first line of the Destina-
tion list. The inverted video cursor will move to the Repeat column on the
same line.
4. Now you will set the repetition count for the SAMPLE–1.WFM file to 2.
Press “2” and ENTER in that order. The inverted video cursor will move to
the second line in the Destination list.

2 Ć54 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to enter SAMPLE–4.WFM in the second line of

the Destination list. The repetition count for this file should be set to 1;
since this is the default value, there is no need to change it.
This completes the creation of the waveform sequence file. Figure 2 -42 shows
the resultant display.

Figure 2 Ć42: Sequence Example

6. Select Show Overview from the bottom menu to verify the sequence
waveform.
The sequence waveform is combined as the sequence: SAMPLE–1.WFM
twice and SAMPLE–4.WFM once. See Figure 2 -43.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć55

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć43: Sequence Waveform Display With Show Overview Selected

7. After verifying waveform, select Continue Operation from the side menu
to return the system to the previous sequence edit menu.
8. Select Exit/Write from the bottom menu.
9. Select Write and Exit from the side menu.
10. Input SAMPLE–5 as the name for this sequence file. For details on how to
input the file name, see Step 24 of the procedure for waveform file creation.
11. When you are finished inputting the file name, select O.K. from the
sub-menu. The sequence (SAMPLE–5.SEQ) file is saved to internal
memory and the system returns to the initial menu.

2 Ć56 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Creating Autostep Files In this operation, you will program waveforms to be output, using the files you
have created in the previous operations to form an autostep file.
1. Select New Autostep on the second page of the side menu in the initial
EDIT menu.


. Select More from the side menu to display the next page.

You will set the CH1 file for Step 1.

2. Using the general purpose knob, move the cursor to the CH1 file column.

Figure 2 Ć44: Moving the Cursor

3. Press the VALUE button on the front panel.

The list used to select waveforms or sequence files will appear.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć57

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć45: File List

4. Using the general purpose knob, select the SAMPLE–1.WFM file.

5. Select Set from the side menu.
The waveform and output parameters for the SAMPLE–1.WFM file will
appear.

Figure 2 Ć46: Setting File

You will now set the CH1 file for Step 2.

6. Select More 1 of 2 from the side menu.
7. Select Append New Step from the side menu.

2 Ć58 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

The Step 2 display will appear.

8. Using the procedure described in Steps 2 – 5 above, set the CH1 file for Step
2 (SAMPLE–3).

Figure 2 Ć47: Setting the File for Step 2

9. Using the procedure described in Steps 2 – 8 above, set the CH1 file for Step
3 (SAMPLE–4).

Figure 2 Ć48: Setting the File for Step 3

10. Select Exit/Write from the bottom menu.

11. Select Write and Exit from the side menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć59

Operating Examples

12. Enter SAMPLE–6 as the name for the autostep file. See Step 24 of the
waveform file creation procedure for instructions on how to enter the file
name.
13. When the file name has been entered, select O.K. from the sub-menu.
The autostep file that you have created will be saved in the internal memory
under the name SAMPLE–6.AST and the initial menu will reappear.

Setting the Output 1. Press the SETUP button in the MENU column. Figure 2 -49 shows the
Parameters SETUP menu displayed.

Figure 2 Ć49: SETUP Menu

2. Select Waveform Sequence from the bottom menu.

3. Turn the general purpose knob to select the SAMPLE–1.WFM file.
4. Press the front panel ENTER button.
5. Select Clock from the bottom menu.
6. Select Internal Clock from the side menu.

2 Ć60 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

7. Use the numeric and unit keys to input 1, MHz, in order, to set the clock
frequency.
8. Press the Source button in the side menu to select Internal.
9. Select Amplitude from the bottom menu.
10. Select CH1 from the side menu.
11. Use the numeric and unit keys to input 5, V, in order, to set the voltage value
for full vertical scale.
Figure 2 -50 shows the menu displayed as a result of these settings.

Figure 2 Ć50: Setting Output Parameters

This completes the output parameter setting.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć61

Operating Examples

Setting Operation Mode Now use an oscilloscope to see what type of waveform is generated. Connect the
and Waveform Output AWG2021 to a oscilloscope using a 50 W cable and a 50 W termination as shown
in Figure 2 -51. The waveform output for this instrument is calibrated for a 50 W
load.

  


 
 
 

   W

 W 

Figure 2 Ć51: Connections for Example 3

Continuous Mode. Set the operation mode to Cont.

1. Press the MODE button in the MENU column. Figure 2 -52 shows the
MODE menu.

2 Ć62 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć52: MODE Menu

2. Select Cont from the bottom menu.

This operation mode continuously outputs the set waveform. Also, “Run-
ning” is displayed in the trigger status area on the upper right section of the
screen to show that the set waveform is being output.
3. Press the front panel CH1 On/Off button to enable waveform output.
When the output is on, the On/Off indicator lights up. This operation outputs
the specified waveform from the CH1 output connector. Set the oscilloscope
appropriately to display the waveform on the oscilloscope screen.
You can use the marker output from the instrument as the external trigger for
the oscilloscope. The marker signal is set in high state at data point 0. See
Figure 2 -53. The marker signal can be set to any point using the waveform
edit function.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć63

Operating Examples

   
  

Figure 2 Ć53: Setting the Marker Default

Triggered Mode. In the following steps, set the operation mode to Triggered and
generate the trigger signal with the TRIGGER MANUAL button to control the
waveform output.
4. Select Triggered from the bottom menu.
When you select this item, the side menu lists external trigger parameters
which allow you to set them. Figure 2 -54 shows the menu set for Triggered
mode.

2 Ć64 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć54: Menu Displayed When Triggered is Selected

Figure 2 -55 shows the MANUAL button and the TRIGGER INPUT connector
for inputting an external trigger signal.

TRIGGER
MANUAL


 

INPUT

 


1MW 10Vp-p
50W  5VRMS

Figure 2 Ć55: MANUAL Button and TRIGGER INPUT Connector

This procedure does not use an external trigger signal. Rather, it generates the
trigger signal when the MANUAL button is pressed.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć65

Operating Examples

5. Press the MANUAL button.

Check the oscilloscope to see that each time you press the MANUAL
button, a set waveform is output once.

Autostep Mode. Using the following procedure, you can set the operation mode
to Autostep and use the MANUAL button to generate a trigger signal and
control step waveform output.


. When the operation mode is set to Autostep, it is not possible to change
the output parameters in the SETUP menu.

6. Select Autostep from the bottom menu.

The menu shown in Figure 2 -56 will appear.

Figure 2 Ć56: Menu Displayed When Autostep is Selected

7. Choose Select Autostep File from the side menu.

A list of autostep files will appear.

2 Ć66 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć57: Autostep File List

8. Using the general purpose knob, select the SAMPLE–6.AST file.

In this example, there is only one file in the list, so it will already be
selected.
9. Select O.K. from the sub-menu.
10. Press the CH1 On/Off button on the front panel to turn on waveform output.
11. Press the MANUAL button on the front panel.
Check on the oscilloscope to make sure CH1 waveform output advances one
step each time the button is pressed. The waveform or sequence for the step
is output once, then output stops.
This completes the Example 3.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć67

Operating Examples

Example 4: Loading and Saving Files


. When the instrument is switched off, the data in the internal memory is
erased. Accordingly, it is necessary to copy any files that have been created or
edited onto a floppy disk or into the instrument’s internal non-volatile memory
(NVRam).

In Example 4, you will load and save the file created in the previous operation.

LOAD menu. Used to enter files from a floppy disk or the instrument’s internal
NVRam.

SAVE menu. Used to save files that have been created or changed onto a floppy
disk or the instrument’s internal NVRam.

Saving Files To save files into internal non-volatile memory (NVRam), perform the following
steps:
1. Press the LOAD/SAVE button in the MENU column.
2. Select Device from the bottom menu.
3. Select NVRam from the side menu.
4. Select Save from the bottom menu.
Figure 2 -58 shows the SAVE menu displayed.

2 Ć68 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć58: SAVE Menu

5. Select Save All from the side menu.

When Save All is selected, all the files in internal memory (listed in the
upper screen) are saved to the NVRam. See Figure 2 -59.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć69

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć59: Files Saved in NVRam

When Save is selected from the side menu, only the file displayed inverted in the
internal memory list is saved to NVRam.
6. Check to make sure that Auto Load in the bottom menu is Off.
If it is not Off, select Auto Load from the bottom menu, then select Off
from the side menu.
7. Power the instrument off, then on again.

2 Ć70 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Loading Files The following procedure loads files into internal memory.
1. Press the LOAD/SAVE button in the MENU column.
Make sure that there are no files in the internal memory file list in the upper
screen (see Figure 2 -60).

Figure 2 Ć60: Internal Memory File List

2. Select Load from the bottom menu.

Here NVRam is selected in the Device bottom menu.
3. Select Load All from the side menu.
When this item is selected, all the files in the NVRam (listed in the lower
screen) are loaded into internal memory. See Figure 2 -61.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć71

Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć61: Files Loaded into Internal Memory

When you select Load from the side menu, the file displayed in inverted video
in the NVRam list is loaded into internal memory.

2 Ć72 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Auto Load Using the Auto Load process, it is possible to automatically load files from a
designated device into the instrument’s internal memory when the power to the
instrument is turned on. You can do this with the following procedure:
1. Select Auto Load from the bottom menu.
2. Select from NVRam from the side menu.
3. Power the instrument off, then on again.
Check to make sure that the designated files were loaded from the NVRAM
to the internal memory when the power to the instrument was turned on.
This completes the Example 4.
Also, note that files are loaded/saved in the same manner when the Device is set
to Disk. For a floppy disk, hierarchical file structures can be created using
directories. See the UTILITY menu Disk item in Section 3, Reference, for
directory creation instructions.


. You must format new floppy disks. See the UTILITY menu Disk item in
Section 3, Reference, for formatting instructions.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć73

Operating Examples

Example 5: Loading Waveforms From Other Instruments

The AWG2021 can transfer waveforms via a GPIB cable from a digital storage
oscilloscope (DSO).
In Example 5, you will transfer waveforms from a Tektronix TDS series digital
storage oscilloscope.
1. Connect the AWG2021 and the other instruments as shown in Figure 2 -62.



  

 



 


 



OUT  W


Figure 2 Ć62: Connections for Example 5

2. Adjust the amplitude of the signals from the signal generator so that the
waveform is displayed on the DSO screen with the amplitude and sweep
speed shown in Figure 2 -63.

2 Ć74 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples



m


Figure 2 Ć63: DSO Screen

3. Press the MENU column LOAD/SAVE button for the AWG2021.

4. Select Device from the bottom menu.
5. Select GPIB from the side menu.
At this point, if the remote port is not GPIB or the GPIB is not configured
for waveform transferring, these settings must be changed. In such cases, the
message shown in Figure 2 -64 will appear; if you change the setting, select
O.K. from the sub-menu.

Figure 2 Ć64: Confirmation Message (asking if it is O.K. to change the remote port
and GPIB configuration settings)

To change the settings, select O.K. from the sub-menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć75

Operating Examples

6. Select Load from the bottom menu.

7. Use the general purpose knob to select the name of the DSO instrument
connected to the instrument and the transferring source from the Name
column in the GPIB Source list. In this example, you should select “Tek
TDS CH1.” See Figure 2 -65.

Figure 2 Ć65: GPIB Source List

8. Set the DSO GPIB address to 1 and its communication mode to talk/listen.


. If the DSO GPIB debug mode is On, a time–out error may occur. If so,
switch off the debug mode.

9. Select Select Source Address from the side menu.

10. Use the general purpose knob to set the address to 1 which is the same as the
GPIB address of the load source DSO.
11. Select Load from the side menu.
When this is done, the waveform data will be transferred from the DSO
instrument to the AWG2021. The transferred waveform data will be loaded
into the internal memory of the AWG2021 under the name shown in the
“Loaded as” column of the GPIB Source list. In this example, the waveform
file is named “TDSCH1.WFM.” The clock, amplitude, and offset values
obtained from the waveform preamble are loaded into the waveform file as
setup data, together with the waveform data.


. If the amplitude, offset, or clock is outside the range that can be set for
the AWG2021, it is replaced with the maximum or minimum value that can be
set. If an attempt is made to transfer a waveform that exceeds any of these
ranges, a message to that effect is displayed.

2 Ć76 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

If Load Without Preamble in the side menu is selected, the waveform preamble
will not be loaded (in other words, only the waveform data will be loaded). In
such cases, all parameters will be set to the default values of the output
parameters.
This completes the Example 5.

AWG2021 User Manual 


Operating Examples

Example 6: Using the Waveform Function Generator

The instrument is equipped with a waveform function generator for generating
simple waveform functions. Pressing the F.G button on the front panel will
change the mode to function generator (FG) mode and enable you to set various
waveform parameters.
In Example 6, you will select a sine wave for CH1. Then you will set the
parameters and output the waveform.
1. Press the front panel F.G (Function Generator) button. The FG mode menu
is displayed.

CH1 Waveform Settings As described below, you will define a 200 kHz, 5 V amplitude, 0 V offset sine
wave on CH1.
1. Select Sine from the bottom menu.
Figure 2 -66 shows a sine wave displayed within the CH1 frame on the
screen.

Figure 2 Ć66: Screen When Sine Set for CH1

Set the frequency to 1 MHz.

2 Ć78 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

2. Select Frequency from the side menu.

3. Press 1 and the MHz/
s key in the Unit key to input the frequency with the
numeric keys.
4. To set the frequency with the general purpose knob, select the index digit for
input with the front panel arrow buttons (←/→). Press the ← button to move
the underscore to the left or press the → button to move the underscore to
the right. Turn the general purpose knob with the index digit selected to get a
1.000 MHz frequency.
In the same manner as the frequency, above, you will set the amplitude to 5 V
and the offset to 0 V.
5. Select Amplitude from the side menu.
Use the general purpose knob or numeric keys to set an amplitude of
5.000 V.
6. Select Offset from the side menu.
Turn the general purpose knob and check that the 0 V line (broken line) on
the screen moves within a range ±2.5 V. Then set the offset to 0.000 V. You
could also input the offset value with the numeric keys.
7. Check that when you press the Polarity button in the side menu, the polarity
toggles between Normal and Invert and the polarity of the sine wave on the
screen is reversed. Then set the polarity to Normal.
Figure 2 -67 shows the screen when the output parameters are set for a sine
wave on CH1.

AWG2021 User Manual 


Operating Examples

Figure 2 Ć67: CH1 Output Parameter Setting Display

This completes the sine–wave output parameter setting. Now you will check the
actual waveform on the oscilloscope screen.

2 Ć80 AWG2021 User Manual

 Operating Examples

Waveform Output Connect the AWG2021 to an oscilloscope with 50 W cables and 50 W termina-
tions as shown in Figure 2 -68. The waveform output for this instrument is
calibrated for a 50 W load.




   W    

 W  

Figure 2 Ć68: Connections for Example 6

1. Press the front panel CH1 On/Off button and switch on. The On/Off
indicator should light up. In this operation, the waveform outputs continu-
ously from the CH1 output connector. Set the oscilloscope appropriately to
display the waveform on the oscilloscope screen.
This completes the Example 6.

AWG2021 User Manual 2 Ć81

Operating Examples


 AWG2021 User Manual

Introduction

Section 3 will describe in detail the functions contained in each of the menus.
EDIT Menu
SETUP Menu
MODE Menu
LOAD/SAVE Menu
UTILITY Menu
FG Menu
Each section will describe menu functions in the following order:

Menu Structure. Each menu will be shown in a diagram listing the menu
items from left to right, with the highest menu level on the left and the
lowest menu level on the right. There are three types of menus: the bottom
menu, the side menu and the sub-menus. An ellipsis (...) in a side menu item
indicates that it has a sub-menu. If a menu has many levels, there will be a
“Description” section at the beginning which shows the detailed menu
configurations for that function.

Menu Functions. This is a list showing the menu functions and the number
of the page on which you can find a description of that function.

CRT Display. This shows a typical screen for that menu and a brief
explanation.

Description. This section gives a detailed explanation of the functions in
each menu. It includes examples with step-by-step instructions showing how
the function is used. Menu items in the text are shown in a bold typeface.

Menu Items Available With Each Editing Function

More When the side menu consists of two or more pages, this item is used to display
the next page. In the example shown at left, the side menu being displayed
consists of three pages and the first page is currently being displayed.

Go Back This item is displayed when you select a side menu item that has a sub-menu. It
allows you to escape from the sub-menu and return to the side menu level. (The
CLEAR MENU bezel button can also be used for this purpose.)

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć1

Introduction

Execute Select this button to execute the currently selected menu function. For example,
in the Draw... menu, pressing this button will cause the waveform to be drawn;
in the Shift... menu, it will cause the waveform to move.

Undo Select this button to cancel the most previous operation — for example,
Execute, calculations in the Math... sub-menu, or Marker settings, or Cut,
Paste, Insert or other operation. Pressing Undo again will cancel the Undo
operation and restore the waveform to the status before Undo was pressed.

O.K. Select this button to confirm that you really want to perform an operation, or to
respond to a query when a popup menu has appeared. A warning message will
appear when it is necessary to confirm an operation in this manner. If you are
sure you want to execute the operation, press this O.K. button.

Cancel This button is usually displayed along with the O.K. button. Select it when you
want to cancel an operation. (You may also use the CLEAR MENU bezel button
for this purpose.)

Continue This item appears in the side menu when a panel containing an error message
appears on the screen, or when the Show Catalog Entry or Show Overview
command is used to display a waveform in graphic form. Pressing this button
causes the panel to disappear. (You may also use the CLEAR MENU bezel
button for this purpose.)

3 Ć2 AWG2021 User Manual

EDIT Menu

General Description
To use the AWG2021 to output arbitrary waveforms, you must first create a file
for the waveform to be output. There are four file types, each created by a
different editor. Files created in this manner will have an extension after the file
name that identifies what type of file they are.

Editor File Extension


  

 .WFM
  
 .EQU
      
 .SEQ
    
 .AST


. When option 09 is installed, there are two additional functions: a

high-speed convolution function and an FFT editor. These allow you to perform
convolution calculations and edit the waveform file within the frequency range.

Pressing the EDIT button in the MENU causes the initial menu to be displayed.
When you want to edit an existing file or create a new file, select the appropriate
editor from this initial menu. In this section, we will briefly describe these
editors.

Waveform Editor This editor is used to create and edit waveform files. The waveform data display
formats are graphic, table, and timing.

Equation Editor This editor is used to create and edit equation files. Equation file data takes the
form of mathematical equations. An equation file is compiled to create a
waveform file and to output the waveform.

Sequence Editor This editor is used to create and edit sequence files. Sequence files assemble a
number of waveforms or sequence files in order.

Autostep Editor This editor is used to create and edit autostep files. Autostep files are created by
programming waveforms or sequence files. Each time a trigger is received, the
waveform moves on to the next step in this program. Since the output parameters
set for each waveform or sequence file are part of the autostep file, the output
parameters can change for each waveform.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć3

EDIT Menu

Initial Menu
To create or edit waveform files, press the EDIT button of the MENU column to
display the initial menu. Figure 3 -1 shows the structure of the initial EDIT
menu.

MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu

Initial Menu Editor

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Selecting

ÎÎÎÎ
an Existing Edit
File
Graphic Display
New Waveform Waveform
Editor Timing Display
.WFM
Table Display

New Equation Equation Editor

.EQU

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
EDIT
New Sequence
.SEQ
Sequence Editor

New Autostep Autostep Editor

.AST

Convolve Convolution Waveform Editor

Waveform .WFM ( Option 09 )

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Selecting
an Existing
Edit in
Frequency
FFT Editor

ÎÎÎÎ .WFM ( Option 09 )

.WFM File Domain

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Selecting
an Existing
Expand SEQ

ÎÎÎÎ
into WFM
.SEQ File
Rename

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Selecting
an Existing
Comment
Copy
Delete

ÎÎÎÎ File Delete All

Lock On/Off

Figure 3 Ć1: Initial EDIT Menu Structure

3 Ć4 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page
on which you can find a description of that function.

Table 3Ć1: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Edit Editing an existing file 3 Ć7
New Waveform Creating a new file (.WFM) 3 Ć7
Waveform editor 3 Ć14
Graphic display 3 Ć23, 3 Ć29
Timing display 3 Ć29, 3 Ć96
Table display 3 Ć29, 3 Ć129
New Equation Creating a new file (.EQU) 3 Ć7
Equation editor 3 Ć137
New Sequence Creating a new file (.SEQ) 3 Ć7
Sequence editor 3 Ć161
New Autostep Creating a new file (.AST) 3 Ć7
Autostep editor 3 Ć171
Expand SEQ into WFM Expanding a sequence file into a waveform 3 Ć12
file
Convolve Waveform Convolution waveform editor (Option 09) 3 Ć189
Edit in Frequency Domain FFT editor (Option 09) 3 Ć195
Rename Renaming a file 3 Ć8
Comment Comment input 3 Ć10
Copy Copying a file 3 Ć10
Delete Deleting a file 3 Ć10
Delete All Deleting a file 3 Ć10
Lock On/Off Locking and unlocking files 3 Ć11

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć5

EDIT Menu

CRT Display Figure 3 -2 shows the initial menu of the EDIT. A description for each callout
follows.

2 3

Figure 3 Ć2: Display of the Initial Menu

(1) Catalog:Memory              

(2) Free Memory  
         
(3) Scroll Indicator                 

                
 
              
    
        


3 Ć6 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

(4) File List   

     
   
  
   


  Name Type Size Date & Time
 Comment

    
    
 

    

Name.  
  
 
 
  

Type. 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 WFM EQU SEQ
 AST 
      
   
  
Size.     
    
   
Date & Time. 

    
 
  

   
   
Comment.        
 

Creating or Editing a File Select one of the items from the side menus in the initial menu to create a new
file (New Waveform, New Equation, New Sequence, or New Autostep) or to
edit an existing file (Edit).

Creating a New File. When a New command (New Waveform, New Equation,
New Sequence, New Autostep or New Clock Sweep) is selected, a new file will
be created by the appropriate editor.
1. Press the EDIT button in the MENU column to display the initial menu.
2. Select one of the following editors in the side menu, depending on what type
of file you wish to create.
New Waveform Waveform editor
New Equation Equation editor
New Sequence Sequence editor
New Autostep Autostep editor
To select the autostep editor, select More from the side menu in the initial
menu and then select New Autostep from the second page of the side menu.
3. Select an editor and create the file. The file name in the upper left of the
screen has not yet been assigned, so it is ******** extension.

Editing an Existing File. To edit an existing file, select Edit and perform the
following steps:
1. Press the EDIT button in the MENU column to display the initial menu.
2. Turn the general purpose knob to select a file from the internal memory file
list displayed in the initial menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć7

EDIT Menu

3. Select Edit from the side menu. The system automatically enters the editor
appropriate for the file-type extension so the selected file can be edited.

Using File Editing The following operations can be performed for the file that has been created:
Functions
Rename Renaming a file
Comment Comment input
Copy Copying a file
Delete Deleting a file


. When the file is locked (indicated by an asterisk displayed in front of the
file name), it is not possible to change the file name, enter a comment or delete
the file. See “Locking and Unlocking Files” in this section.

Renaming a File. The Rename item is used to change a file name.

1. Use the general purpose knob to select the file to be renamed from the initial
menu file list.
2. Select Rename from the bottom menu. The menu for changing the file name
is displayed. See Figure 3 -3.

3 Ć8 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć3: Menu Displayed When Rename is Selected

Before entering the new file name, you must delete the current file name.
3. To delete a character, press the Delete button on the front panel. This deletes
the character right before the cursor. The cursor can be moved with the front
panel z and ! buttons.
Now, input the new file name.
4. Use the general purpose knob to select a character.
5. Press the front panel VALUE button. The selected character is inserted
immediately before the cursor blinking in the file name input column.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the entire name has been entered. Up to 8
characters can be input.


. The following cannot be used as file names: CLOCK, CON, AUX,
COM1, COM2, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, NUL, and PRN. Also, the “ ”, “*”, and
“+” characters in the character menu can not be used in file names and cannot
be selected.

7. To enter the file name, select O.K. To cancel that file name, select Cancel.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć9

EDIT Menu

When O.K. is selected, the file is saved into internal memory with the
changed file name and displayed in the file list on the CRT screen. Select
O.K. or Cancel to return to the initial menu.


. If there is already a waveform file in internal memory with the name the
compiled waveform file will be given, a message is displayed asking if you are
sure you want to overwrite the old file. Overwriting erases the data in the old
file.

Comment Input. Select Comment to input a comment. The input method for the
comment is the same as that for Rename above. The comment may be up to 24
characters long. All the characters in the character menu can be used.

Copying a File. Select Copy to display a menu for inputting the copy destination
file name. The input method for the file name is the same as that for Rename
above.

Deleting a File. Select Delete or Delete All to delete unnecessary files. Delete
deletes files in internal memory one at a time; Delete All deletes all the files in
internal memory.
1. Use the general purpose knob to select the file to be deleted from the file list
in the initial menu.
2. Select Delete from the bottom menu. This instrument asks you if you are
sure you want to delete the selected file. See Figure 3 -4.

3 Ć10 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć4: Menu Displayed When Delete is Selected

If you select O.K. from the side menu, the file is deleted. If you decide not to
delete the file, select Cancel. When either O.K. or Cancel is selected, the
system returns to the initial menu.

Locking and Unlocking Select Lock to lock or unlock a file. When the file is locked, it is not possible to
Files delete the file or change the file name or the comments for that file.


. While a locked file can have its output parameters changed with the
SETUP menu, the original output parameters are retained. Thus, when the
locked file is loaded again into waveform memory, the original parameters are
set again.

1. Use the general purpose knob to select the file to be locked from the file list
in the initial menu.
2. Press the Lock bottom menu button. The selected file is locked and On is
selected for the Lock label. Locked files have “*” next to their names in the
display. See Figure 3 -5.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć11

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć5: Menu Displayed When Lock is Selected

3. Select Delete from the bottom menu. Check to make sure that the words
“File locked.” is displayed in the message area to indicate that it is not
possible to delete the file.
4. If you press the Lock bottom menu button again, the file is unlocked and
Off in the Lock label is displayed inverted. Files on a floppy disk or in
NVRam can be locked/unlocked in the same manner with the UTILITY
menu.

Expanding a Sequence The “Expand SEQ into WFM” item is displayed when a sequence file has been
File into a Waveform File selected from the file list in the initial menu. It is used to expand a waveform
created from a sequence file (.SEQ) into a waveform file (.WFM).
1. Select More from the side menu in the initial menu to display the second
page of the side menu.
2. Using the general purpose knob, select a sequence file (the file name should
end in .SEQ) from the file list in the initial menu. The “Expand SEQ into
WFM” item will appear in the side menu.

3 Ć12 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

3. Select Expand SEQ into WFM from the side menu. You will be asked to
provide a name for the resulting waveform file. See Figure 3 -6. If necessary,
change the default name. See “Renaming a File” described above.

Figure 3 Ć6: Menu Display When Expand SEQ into WFM is Selected

4. Press O.K. to confirm the file name. Press Cancel to cancel the operation.
When O.K. is pressed, the sequence file will be expanded into a waveform
file and the initial menu will reappear. The name of the new file will be
added to the file list in the initial menu. If a waveform file with that name
already exists, you will be asked whether it is all right to overwrite the
existing file with the new data. Be careful when answering this query, as a
“yes” will cause the existing data to be deleted and replaced with the new
file. Pressing “Cancel” will cancel the operation and the initial menu will
reappear.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć13

EDIT Menu

Waveform Editor
Use the waveform editor to create or edit waveform files with the extension of
.WFM. Waveform files contain waveform data, marker signal data, and the
waveform output parameters set with the SETUP menu. The waveform data
display formats are graphic, table, and timing. The editing functions displayed
depend on the data display format.
In the waveform editor, 0 to 4094 in 12-bit resolution on the vertical axis is
expressed as –1.0000 to +1.0000 (with 4095 as 1.0005). At this level, there is no
relationship to the Amplitude/Offset setting in the SETUP menu used when the
waveform is output.

Entering the Waveform 1. Press EDIT in the MENU column. The initial EDIT menu will appear.
Editor
2. Select Edit or New Waveform from the side menu.
Edit Use this command to select and edit an existing
waveform file (.WFM)
New Waveform Use this command to create a new waveform file
As a result of the procedure described above, the waveform editor will
appear on the screen. The waveform editor can be displayed in one of three
formats: graphic, timing or table; the default setting is graphic display.
Figure 3 -7 shows an example in which an existing waveform file has been
selected.

3 Ć14 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć7: Graphic CRT Display

In graphic display, the waveform is created or edited with the waveform

displayed in the waveform editor in graphic display. For details on the
different formats, see “Timing Display” and “Table Display”.

Opening and Selecting Up to three waveforms can be displayed and edited in the waveform editor at the
Editing Areas same time. This makes it easy to edit several related waveforms. Figure 3 -8
shows an example in which three waveforms are displayed. In this example, the
box around the Waveform2 area shows that this waveform is selected and is
currently being edited.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć15

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć8: Waveform Editor With Three Editing Areas

When there is more than one waveform displayed in the waveform editor, the
following menu items will be added:

Cursor Link to... will be added to the Setting menu item. See Page 3 -34.
Cursor Link to.. Used to link the cursors in different editing areas.

Three additional commands (Multiple Copy..., Convolute..., Compare...)
will be added to the Operation menu item. See pages 3 -79, 3 -85 and 3 -88,
respectively.
Multiple Copy... Used to copy a waveform in one editing area that
has been designated with the vertical bar cursors
into another editing area (in the space designated
with the vertical bar cursors in that area), using the
interval specified with Interval.
Convolute... Used to perform convolution calculations for the
waveform in one area (in the space designated with
the vertical bar cursors) with the part of a waveform
in another editing area designated by the vertical bar
cursors in that area.

3 Ć16 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Compare... Used to compare the waveform in the area desig-

nated by the vertical bar cursors with the waveform
in another editing area.
In this example, you will select three waveforms in the waveform editor. The
following procedure starts in the initial EDIT menu.
1. Select New Waveform from the side menu. The new waveform will be
displayed in area 1.
2. Press Select/Open from the bottom menu. In the side menu, “Waveform1”
refers to the waveform file in editing area 1.
3. Select Another Waveform from the side menu. A file list will appear,
allowing you to select the waveform file to be displayed in editing area 2.
The top item in the list (New Waveform) is used to create a new waveform
file. The subsequent items are the names of existing waveform files. See
Figure 3 -9.

Figure 3 Ć9: Menu Display When Another Waveform is Selected

4. Using the general purpose knob, select New Waveform. The new waveform
file created in this step will be assigned to editing area 2.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć17

EDIT Menu

5. Select O.K. from the sub-menu. When this is done, Waveform2 will be
added to the side menu and the Waveform2 editing area will appear on the
screen. See Figure 3 -10.

Figure 3 Ć10: Waveform2 Added

6. Select Another Waveform from the side menu.

7. Using the general purpose knob, select a waveform file. In this example, we
will select an existing waveform file.
8. Select Show Catalog Entry from the sub-menu. This allows you to check
the waveform for the selected file on the screen. See Figure 3 -11.

3 Ć18 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć11: Menu Display When Show Catalog Entry is Selected

9. Select Continue from the sub-menu.

10. Select O.K. from the sub-menu. Waveform3 will be added to the side menu
and the Waveform3 editing area will appear on the screen. See Figure 3 -12.

Figure 3 Ć12: Waveform3 Added

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć19

EDIT Menu

The three waveform items (Waveform1, Waveform2 and Waveform3) will be

displayed in the side menu. You will select the waveform to be edited from these
items.
11. Select Waveform2 from the side menu. A box will appear around the editing
area to indicate that this waveform has been selected.
To close a waveform, once again select that Waveform from the side menu and
then select Close/Write from the bottom menu. See “Saving Files and Exiting
the Editor” in this section.

Saving Files and Exiting When you select Close/Write from the bottom menu, the newly created or edited
the Editor file currently selected in the side menu will be saved to the instrument’s internal
memory and the waveform editor will disappear.


. The procedure for saving files and exiting the editor is the same for all
editors. The only difference is that the Close/Write item in the waveform editor
changes to Exit/Write in the other editor. (The word “Close” is used in the
waveform editor because more than one waveform is opened in this editor.)

Select Close/Write from the bottom menu to display a side menu containing
Write and Close, Close without Writing, and Write menu items. These
functions are explained next.

Write and Close. When a new file is created, if you select Write and Close, a
menu for naming the file is displayed. Input the file name, then select O.K. from
the sub-menu. The file is saved into internal memory with that name and the
system returns to the initial menu. If Cancel is selected, the input file name is
canceled and the system returns to the editor.
When you exit the editor after editing an existing file and you select Write and
Close, the menu for naming the file is not displayed. Instead, the system
immediately returns to the initial menu and the file created in internal memory is
saved with the existing file name.

Close without Writing. When this item is selected, the system returns to the initial
menu without saving the created or edited file to internal memory. In this case, a
message asking you if it is ok to erase the created data is displayed on the CRT
screen. Reply O.K. or Cancel.

Write. When Write is selected, the file name menu is displayed. If you input or
change the file name, then select the sub-menu O.K. item, the created or edited
waveform data is saved into internal memory with that file name and the system
returns to the editor it has been in. If the file name is changed, the old file is left

3 Ć20 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

as is and a new file is created with the new file name. If you select Cancel, the
input file name is canceled and the system returns to the editor without saving
the data into internal memory. Although the created or edited data is not saved at
this time, it is retained for further editing.

Naming a File When saving a newly created file, a file name must be created. The menu for
creating a file name is the same for all the editors.
1. Select Close/Write from the bottom menu.
2. Select Write and Close from the side menu. Figure 3 -13 shows the menu
with the file name.

Figure 3 Ć13: Menu With File Name


. When no editing has been performed in the editor, selecting the Write and
Close item will not cause the menu used to enter the file name to appear; the
initial menu will reappear instead.

Now, input the file name.

3. Use the general purpose knob to select a character.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć21

EDIT Menu

4. Press the front panel VALUE button. The selected character is inserted
immediately before the cursor.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the entire file name has been entered. In this
example, we will enter the name SAMPLE.

Up to 8 characters can be input. To delete a character, press the Delete button

on the front panel. This deletes the character right before the cursor. The
cursor can be moved with the front panel
and  buttons.


. The following can not be used as file names: CLOCK, CON, AUX,
COM1, COM2, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, NUL, and PRN. Also, the “ ” and “*” and
“+” characters in the character menu can not be used in file names and can not
be selected.

6. To enter the file name, select O.K. To cancel that file name, select Cancel
from the side menu.
When O.K. is selected, the file will be saved to the internal memory under
the file name that has been entered and the initial menu will reappear. The
new file name will be displayed in the file list in the initial menu. If Cancel
is selected, the name that has been entered will be disregarded and the editor
screen will reappear.


. If there is already a waveform file in internal memory with the name the
complied waveform file will be given, a message is displayed asking if you are
sure you want to overwrite the old file. Overwriting erases the data in the old
file.


 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Graphic Display
In graphic display, the waveform is displayed in graphic form in the waveform
editor and it is created or edited in that form. The horizontal axis indicates time or
number of points, while the vertical axis indicates the levels. Waveforms are
displayed at each data point in 12-bit resolution. On the beneath the waveform, the
on/off state of the marker signal is displayed in timing form. All editing operations
are performed between the two vertical bar cursors.
Figure 3 -14 is a diagram showing the menu structure for the waveform editor in
graphic display. This is not a complete list; for a complete list, see the diagram at
the beginning of the section on each menu. An ellipsis (...) next to an item in the
side menu indicates that there is a sub-menu below that item listing additional
choices. Commands in the sub-menu are executed with the Execute command;
when Go Back is selected, the sub-menu disappears and the side menu
reappears.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć23

EDIT Menu

Bottom Menu Side Menu SubĆMenu

Waveform1
Select/Open Waveform2 *1
Waveform3 *1
Another Waveform
Waveform Editor
Cut

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Copy to Buffer
Paste from Buffer
Add Draw Point
Draw... Delete Draw Point
Smooth
Shift
Shift...
Value
Scale
Factor
Scale... New Size *2
Origin *2
Invert... Invert
Clip... Clip
Level
Marker
Set High
Operation Marker...
Set Low
Set Pattern
Insert Other Waveform Show Catalog Entry
Single Waveform Math... Type
Add
Sub
Dual Waveform Math...
Mul
Show Catalog Entry
*1 Source
Multiple Copy...
Interval
Convolute... *1 Source
Source
*1 Hysteresis
Compare...
Set Result to
Type
Region Shift... Shift Scale Value
Config...

Figure 3 Ć14: Waveform Editor Graphic Display Menu Structure

3 Ć24 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Bottom Menu Side Menu SubĆMenu

Horizontal Zoom in
Horizontal Zoom out *3
Horizontal Zoom fit *3
Horizontal Pan *3
Zoom
Vertical Zoom in
Vertical Zoom out *4
Vertical Zoom fit *4
Vertical Pan *4
Waveform Points Graphic
View type... Timing
Table
Horiz.Unit
Setting
Clock *5
Waveformx
Cursor Link to... *1 Waveformxx
Link Off
Grid

Undo
Type
Cycle *6
Standard
Frequency *6
Waveform
Amplitude
Offset
Write and Close
Close/Write Close without Writing
Write

*1 Another Waveform under Select/Open in the bottom menu appears when another editing area has been
edited.

*2 If Horizontal is selected for Scale in the subĆmenu, New Size appears; if Vertical is selected, Origin
appears.

*3 The Horizontal Zoom in item under Zoom in the bottom menu item appears when the waveform on the
screen has been zoomed in the horizontal direction.

*4 The Vertical Zoom in item under Zoom in the bottom menu appears when the waveform on the screen
has been zoomed in the vertical direction.

*5 This item appears when Time has been selected for Horiz. Unit in the side menu.

*6 If Point is selected for Horiz. Unit under Setting in the bottom menu, Cycle appears; if Time is selected
for this item, Frequency appears.

Figure 3 Ć14: Waveform Editor Graphic Display Menu Structure (Cont.)

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć25

EDIT Menu

Menu Functions The following list describes the functions for each of the menu items and gives
the number of the page on which you can find a more detailed explanation of that
item.

Table 3Ć2: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Select /Open Opening and selecting the editing area 3 Ć15
Operation Editing waveforms in graphic display 3 Ć41
Cut Cutting waveforms 3 Ć43
Copy to Buffer Copying waveforms 3 Ć44
Paste from Buffer Pasting waveforms 3 Ć44
44
Draw... Draw function 3 Ć46
Shift... Shift function 3 Ć49
S l
Scale... S li ffunction
Scaling ti 3 Ć52
52
Invert... Invert function 3 Ć55
Clip... Clip function 3 Ć56
Marker... Setting a marker 3 Ć57
Insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveforms 3 Ć60
Single Waveform Math... Single waveform calculations 3 Ć63
63
Dual Waveform Math... Calculations with other waveform data 3 Ć68
Region Shift... Specified region shift 3-71
M lti l Copy...
Multiple C C
Convolution
l ti calculations
l l ti 3 Ć85
85
Convolute... Comparing waveforms 3 Ć88
Compare...
Zoom Zooming waveforms 3 Ć92
Setting Settings for the waveform to be edited 3 Ć28
View type... Selecting the waveform data display 3 Ć29
format
Waveform Points 3 Ć29
Setting waveform point count
Horiz. Unit 3 Ć31
Setting horizontal axis units
Clock 3 Ć32
Setting clock frequency
Cursor Link to... 3 Ć34
Linking the vertical bar cursors
Grid 3 Ć35
Displaying a grid in the editing area
Undo Canceling function execution 3 Ć2

3 Ć26 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Table 3Ć2: Menu Functions (Cont.)

Menu Function Page

#! %! !#  "#! $# &%!

)

"!# % "  '# # #!

) 

Graphic Display Screen The general graphic display is shown in Figure 3 -15. A description for each
callout follows.

2 3 4 5

11 12
10

13

Figure 3 Ć15: Graphic Display Screen

(1) File Name    # &%!   #  $!
! #   #" # " $# $!  ##
# &%!  #" #! $ # #! &%!"  
"(  # # # " #  #  " #
 "#  " "(
(2) LĄ &" # # %!# ! $!"! "# # ! # %$
ąąValue L  # %!# % Value  # $!"! %$ "
"( %!# #" " # $!"! %$  
 &# # ! $!"  ! $! ("

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć27

EDIT Menu

(3) D $ ! !  ! "! !$ ! !  !
#!  "  
(4) Horizontal Scroll  !  &   '!& $! Zoom !
Indicator !   & ! $ $ $# !  !
  !   &     &  !  
$ $! #!  &
(5) R $ ! ! #!  "   ! !  ! #"
ąąValue R  ! #! # Value
(6) No. of Waveform Points $ ! "  !  ! $#  !
(7) Top Waveform Level $ ! ! #  ! $# !  &  !

(8) Vertical Scroll Indicator  !  &   #!& $! Zoom !
!   & ! $ $ !   &   
!  ! #! % "     &  !
  $ $! #!  &
(9) Bottom Waveform Level $ ! !! #  ! $# !  &  !

(10) Marker $ ! !  !       "
! ! !  ! $ (MARKER ! ! !! #" 
!  ! $ ! !# #!  "  ! 
 & $!    ! 
(11) Left Vertical Bar Cursor  !# "    & $!    !
)#   & $!     ! " 
! ! ! !! !  !
(12) Right Vertical Bar
! ! !  !  !
Cursor
(13) Button Operations   $ $ ! !  "!! !  !
"

 ! CURSOR "!! ! ! ! !# #! 

"  !$ !  !

 #!  "    # &   !
CURSOR "!!

Settings for the Waveform Before waveform data is created, you must use the Setting item in the side menu
to be Edited to select the environment for editing. The following settings are available:
View type... Selecting the waveform data display format
Waveform Points Setting waveform point count
Horiz. Unit Setting horizontal axis units
Clock Setting clock frequency

3 Ć28 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Cursor Link to... Linking the vertical bar cursors

Grid Displaying a grid in the editing area


. These settings are the same in all display formats (graphic, timing and
table).

In the following section, each of these items will be discussed in detail.

Selecting the Waveform Data Display Format. The View type... item allows you to
set the display format for the waveform data. There are three choices: graphic,
timing and table. The following diagram shows the menu configuration.

!

## !    & #'


 

When you open the waveform editor, Graphic display is selected as the default
option. If you want to change the display format, select Setting from the bottom
menu and then View type from the side menu, then select the desired format
(Timing or Table) from the sub-menu. Pressing the Go Back button cancels the
operation and causes the side menu to reappear. See page 3 -96 for a discussion
of timing display and page 3 -129 for a discussion of table display.

Setting Waveform Point Count. Waveform Points sets the number of points for
waveform data. The following diagram shows the menu configuration.

## !    %! #"

The following formula is used to derive the number of points per period for the
waveform to be created:

( ! $'

( ( #"(
(
! $'( ( $#$#( &%!"

For example, for output of a 20 kHz sine wave, setting the clock frequency to
20 MHz will result in a waveform point value of 20 MHz / 20 kHz = 1000
points.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć29

EDIT Menu

When you create a new waveform file, the waveform point size is set to the
default value of 1000. Technically, you can change this size to any value up to
262,144 points and edit the waveform data as desired. However, due to hardware
limitations, the waveform point size on this instrument is limited to 64 – 262,144
points and to the multiple of 8. In the event that you have edited the data to a
waveform point size outside this range, you will be given an opportunity to
change to the nearest allowable size (in other words, 64 – 262,144 points and the
multiple of 8) when you save the file.

When the waveform point size is less than 64 points:
For example, if the waveform point size is 10 points, the following message
will appear:

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
  !       

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
!  
   
  

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
The following items will be displayed in the side menu:
Append 0 “0” (7FF) values will be added after the data until a
size of 64 points is reached.
Expand The data will be interpolated and expanded to make
it 64 points.
Expand with Clock The data will be interpolated and expanded to make
it 64 points, and the clock will be speeded up to the
same degree.
Cancel The operation will be canceled and the editor screen
will reappear.
Leave as it is The operation will be canceled and the data will be
written as is. The file that has been created cannot be
output on this instrument.

When the waveform point size is not the multiple of 8:
For example, if the waveform point size is 500 points which is not a multiple

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
of 8, the following message will appear:

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
  !       
       

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
  

The following items will be displayed in the side menu:


 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Append 0 “0” (7FF) values will be added after the data until a
size of a multiple of 8 is reached.
Expand The data will be interpolated and expanded to make
it a multiple of 8.
Expand with Clock The data will be interpolated and expanded to make
it a multiple of 8, and the clock speed will increase
proportionately.
Cancel The operation will be canceled and the editor screen
will reappear.
Leave as it is The operation will be canceled and the data will be
written as is. The file that has been created cannot be
output on this instrument.
Select the appropriate command from the side menu and change the waveform
point size.
If the data point count is set longer than the current waveform data, new points
with a value of zero are added at the right end of the waveform. On the other
hand, if the data point count is set shorter than the current waveform data, points
are deleted from the right end.
To set the waveform point value to 512:
1. Select Setting from the bottom menu.
2. Select Waveform Points from the side menu.
3. Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to enter a value of 512.
In the case of the numeric keys, press 5, 1, 2 and ENTER in that order.

Setting Horizontal Axis Units. Horiz. Unit sets the units for the horizontal axis for
the displayed waveform in either time or number of points. The following
diagram shows the menu configuration.



      


Each time the Horiz. Unit button in the side menu is pressed, the units toggle
between Time and Point. When Time is selected, the Clock item is added to the
side menu and the clock frequency can be set.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć31

EDIT Menu

Time Sets the horizontal axis unit to time. The cursor

position data at the top of the CRT is displayed in
time and data can be edited in time units.
Point Sets the horizontal axis unit to points. The cursor
position data at the top of the CRT is displayed in
points and data can be edited in points.
In Figure 3 -16, the display on the left shows the horizontal axis unit set to
Point, while the display on the right shows this value set to Time.

Figure 3 Ć16: Setting the Unit for the Horizontal Axis

When the horizontal axis unit is changed, even if you switch to table or timing
display mode, the horizontal axis there is changed too.

Setting Clock Frequency. When the unit of the horizontal axis is Time, the clock
frequency can be set. The following diagram shows the menu configuration.

            

Select Clock from the side menu to set the clock frequency. This parameter
determines the time between the data points (the inverse of the clock frequency).
For example, when the maximum clock frequency on the AWG2021 is set to

3 Ć32 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

250 MHz, waveform data can be edited at a resolution of 4 ns. Figure 3 -17
shows the Setting menu for Clock.

Figure 3 Ć17: Menu Displayed When Clock is Selected

1. Select Setting from the bottom menu.

2. Press the Horiz. Unit button in the side menu to select Time.
3. Select Clock from the side menu.
4. Input the clock frequency with the numeric keys or the general purpose
knob.
The default setting for clock frequency is 100 MHz. The clock frequency set in
this process will be displayed in the Internal Clock item in the SETUP menu
via the waveform file. When the clock frequency is changed, even if you switch
to table or timing display mode, the clock frequency there is changed too.

Linking the Vertical Bar Cursors. The Cursor Link to... item appears when two or
more waveforms are being edited simultaneously. This item is used to link the
movement of the vertical bar cursors in different editing areas. For example,
when the cursors in editing area 1 are linked to those in editing area 2, moving
the one of the cursors in editing area 1 will cause the corresponding cursor in

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć33

EDIT Menu

editing area 2 to move the same distance. The following diagram shows the
menu configuration.

 
 
 
       
 
 

Figure 3 -18 shows a display in which two editing areas have been created and
Cursor Link to... in the sub-menu has been selected.

Figure 3 Ć18: SubĆMenu Showing Cursor Link to... Selected

The 1z at the top of editing area 2 indicates that this area has been linked to
editing area 1.
In the following procedure, you will link the vertical bar cursors in editing area 2
(Waveform2) to the ones in editing area 1 (Waveform1) while editing area 1 is
being edited.
1. Select Select/Open from the bottom menu.

3 Ć34 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

2. Select Waveform2 from the side menu.

3. Select Setting from the bottom menu.
4. Select More 1 of 2 from the side menu and then select Cursor Link to....
5. Select Waveform1 from the sub-menu. 1z will appear at the top of editing
area 2.
6. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The Setting side menu will reappear.
7. Select Select/Open from the bottom menu.
8. Select Waveform1 from the side menu.
9. Press the front panel CURSOR button.
10. Using the general purpose knob, move the active vertical bar cursor in
editing area 1 and check to make sure that the vertical bar cursor in editing
area 2 moves to the same degree.
In the following procedure, you will unlink the editing areas that you linked in
the previous example while the waveform in editing area 1 is being edited.
1. Select Select/Open from the bottom menu.
2. Select Waveform2 from the side menu.
3. Select Setting from the bottom menu.
4. Select More 1 of 2 from the side menu and then select Cursor Link to....
5. Select Link Off from the sub-menu. The link will be canceled and the 1z at
the top of editing area 2 will disappear.

Displaying a Grid in the Editing Area. This item is used to display a grid in the
editing area to make it easier to edit the waveform. The following diagram shows
the menu configuration.



  
   


Figure 3 -19 shows an example of an editing area with the grid set to On.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć35

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć19: Grid Set to On

1. Select Setting from the bottom menu.

2. Select More 1 of 2 from the side menu.
3. Press the Grid button in the side menu and select On. A grid will appear in
the editing area.


. Grid On/Off can be set same as timing and table display. However, grid
display is only effect in graphic display.

3 Ć36 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Creating a Standard When you select the Standard Waveform item, a function waveform is created
Function Waveform in the area between the specified vertical bar cursors, or a waveform is created
through calculation of the original waveform and a function waveform.
When you select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu, the following
items are displayed in the side menu. Some of the items will change depending
on the settings. For example, if you press Setting in the bottom menu and Horiz.
Unit in the side menu and then select Point, the Cycle item appears in the menu;
if you press Setting and Horiz. Unit and select Time, the Frequency item
appears in the menu.
Type Select the type of function waveform
Cycle Set the cycle
Frequency Set the frequency
Amplitude Set the amplitude
Offset Set the offset
Execute Execute the process (draw the waveform)
In the following section, each of these items will be discussed in detail.

Selecting Function Waveform Type and Calculation Method. The Type item is used
to select the type of function waveform and the calculation method to be created.
There are six choices for waveform type and three choices for calculation
method, making a total of 18 different ways in which this item can be set.

Type of Function Waveform Calculation Method

 Sine
 
 Triangle Add

 Square Mul
 Ramp
 Noise
DC

For example:
Sine The data between the vertical bar cursors is replaced by a
sine wave
Add Sine A sine wave is added to the data between the vertical bar
cursors
Mul Sine The data between the vertical bar cursors is multiplied by a
sine wave

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć37

EDIT Menu

Setting the Parameters for Function Waveforms. The following parameters can be
set for each type of function waveform designated with the Type command.
Note, however, that only Amplitude and Offset can be set for a Noise
waveform, while only Offset can be set for a DC waveform.
Cycle 0.1 to 100,000 (in 0.1 increments)
Frequency 2 Hz to f / 5 (f = Clock frequency set with Setting menu
item
Amplitude ±2.0005 (if set to a negative number, the wave form will
haveinverse polarity)
Offset –1.0000 to +1.0005

Procedure 1: Creating a Sine Wave. In this example, you will replace the data
between the vertical bar cursors with a sine wave. The procedure begins at the
initial menu level.
1. Select New Waveform from the side menu in the initial menu.
2. Select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu.
3. Check to make sure that the left and right vertical bar cursors are all the way
to the left and right, respectively, to encompass the entire editing area. If they
are not, use the general purpose knob to set them in this manner.
4. Press the Type button in the side menu and select Sine.
5. Select Cycle from the side menu. Use the numeric keys or the general
purpose knob to set the number of cycles for the sine wave to 2.
6. Select Amplitude from the side menu. Use the numeric keys or the general
purpose knob to set the p-p amplitude for the sine wave to 1.
7. Select Execute from the side menu.
When Execute is selected, the sine waveform is created between the vertical
bar cursors with the set parameters. See Figure 3 -20.

3 Ć38 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć20: Creating a Sine Wave

Procedure 2: Adding a Waveform to Existing Data. In this example, you will add
noise to the sine wave you created in Procedure 1. The procedure starts from
where you left off in Procedure 1.
1. Select Type from the side menu. Turn the general purpose knob or press the
Type button in the side menu and select Add Noise.
2. Select Amplitude from the side menu. Using the numeric keys or the
general purpose knob, set the p-p amplitude for the noise to 0.1.
3. Select Execute from the side menu.
When you select Execute, a noise waveform will be added to the sine wave
displayed between the left and right vertical bar cursors. See Figure 3 -21.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć39

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć21: Adding Noise to the Sine Wave


. Portions of the waveform that protrude outside the editing area when the
other waveform is added will be clipped.

Procedure 3: Multiplying Waveforms. In this example, you will multiply the sine
wave you created in Procedure 1 by another sine wave with a different frequency.
The procedure starts from where you left off in Procedure 2.
1. Select Undo from the bottom menu. This will eliminate the noise waveform
added in Step 2.
2. Select Type from the side menu. Turn the general purpose knob or press the
Type button in the side menu and select Mul Sine.
3. Select Cycle from the side menu. Using the numeric keys or the general
purpose knob, set the number of cycles for the sine wave to 30.

3 Ć40 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

4. Select Amplitude from the side menu. Using the numeric keys or the
general purpose knob, set the p-p amplitude for the sine wave to 1.
5. Select Execute from the side menu.
When you select Execute, the sine wave between the vertical bar cursors
will be multiplied by the different frequency sine wave. See Figure 3 -22.

Figure 3 Ć22: Multiplying Sine Waves

Editing Waveforms in When Operation is selected with the waveform editor set to graphic display, it is
Graphic Display possible to edit the waveform data in various ways.
The side menu has three pages. Select More to switch the side menu to the next
page. The following is a list of the items in the side menu and their functions.
Cut Cutting waveforms
Copy to Buffer Copying waveforms
Paste from Buffer Pasting waveforms
Draw... Draw function
Shift... Shift function
Scale... Scaling function

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć41

EDIT Menu

Invert... Invert function

Clip... Clip function
Marker... Setting a marker
Insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveforms
Single Waveform Math... Single waveform calculations
Dual Waveform Math.... Calculations with other waveform data
Region Shift... Specified region shift
When editing two or more waveforms simultaneously, three more items are
added to the side menu (and the size of the menu increases to four pages).
Multiple Copy... Multiple copy
Convolute... Convolution calculations
Compare... Comparing waveforms
Items with “...” have further low-level side menus, called sub-menus.

Setting Editing Areas. The editing operations available under Operation are all
performed in the editing area located between the left and right vertical bar
cursors. Before beginning the editing process, you should define the editing area
using the following procedure.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to make the left vertical cursor
active (solid line).
3. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, move the left cursor to
the starting point for the editing operation you wish to perform.
4. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel again to make the right vertical
cursor active (solid line).
5. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, move the right cursor
to the endpoint for the editing operation you wish to perform.

3 Ć42 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

 



  

Figure 3 Ć23: Defining the Editing Area

Subsequent editing operations will be performed in the area that you have set
between the left and right vertical bar cursors.
The following section will describe each of the items in the side menu in detail.

Cutting Waveforms. Cut is used to remove a portion of the waveform from the
editing area. The following diagram shows the menu configuration.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
     

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


Move the right and left vertical bar cursors to define the area you wish to cut and
then select Cut from the side menu. There is no sub-menu for this command;
when it is selected, the section of the waveform that you have defined is cut
instantly. Marker signals associated with that waveform data are also cut.
Removing part of a waveform will naturally reduce the number of points in that
waveform.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć43

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 -24 shows an example of a waveform before and after a section is cut.
Note that only the section between the two vertical bar cursors is removed
including the bar cursors.

   

Figure 3 Ć24: Cutting Waveforms

Waveform data that has been cut is stored in the paste buffer. You can paste this
data into another editing area (by selecting Paste from Buffer), insert it into
another waveform (by selecting Insert Other Waveform) or use it to perform
calculations with another waveform (by selecting Math).


. If you cut out waveform data by mistake, select Undo from the bottom
menu to restore the original waveform data.

Copying/Pasting Waveforms. Use the Copy to Buffer and Paste from Buffer
items to copy the edited waveform area and paste it to another location. The
following diagram shows the menu configuration.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

          

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

          

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

3 Ć44 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

There are no sub-menus associated with these commands; when they are
selected, the copy or paste operation is performed instantly. Marker signals
associated with that waveform data are also subjected to the copy and paste
operations. Pasting data into a waveform will naturally increase the number of
points in that waveform.
1. Specify the waveform to be copied with the left and right vertical bar
cursors. Select Copy to Buffer from the displayed side menu.
When Copy to Buffer is selected, the waveform data between the vertical
bar cursors (including the left and right vertical bar cursor data) is copied
into the paste buffer. Marker signals associated with that waveform data are
also subjected to the copy operation. This operation does not affect the
display on the CRT.
2. Press the front panel CURSOR button.
3. Use the general purpose knob to specify the position to paste the data with
whichever of the vertical bar cursors is active.
The data is pasted directly before the active vertical bar cursor. However,
when the cursor is at the end of the waveform, the data is inserted directly
after the cursor.
4. Select Paste from Buffer from the side menu.
Figure 3 -25 shows an example of a waveform before and after additional data is
pasted into that waveform.




Figure 3 Ć25: Pasting Waveforms

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć45

EDIT Menu

When Paste from Buffer is selected, the waveform data copied into the paste
buffer with the copy processing is pasted directly before the active vertical bar
cursor. The left and right vertical bar cursors move to the two ends of the pasted
waveform data.
The paste buffer data can be inserted into a waveform or used for operations with
waveforms by selecting Insert Other Waveform or Math from the Operation
menu.

Draw Function. Draw... is used to draw points between the specified vertical bar
cursors and connect these points to create an arbitrary waveform. The following
diagram shows the menu configuration for the Draw... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
  
  


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
       

 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
!

Figure 3 -26 shows an example of the screen with the Draw... item selected. This
figure will be discussed in the following section.

3 Ć46 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć26: Menu Display When Draw... is Selected

(1) Point Cursor            
          
(2) XĆY Coordinate Axis  
         
          
           
 
(3) Button Operations

Pressing the CURSOR button toggles the active vertical bar cursor from left to
right and back again. Pressing the VALUE button toggles the direction in which
the point cursor can be moved from up-down to left-right and back again.
1. Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the area within which
the waveform will be drawn and then select Draw... from the side menu.
The point cursor will appear in the middle of the vertical axis between the
left and right vertical bar cursors.
2. Press VALUE button on the front panel.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć47

EDIT Menu

3. Use the general purpose knob to move the point cursor to the location where
you want to place a point.
Each time the front panel VALUE button is pressed, the direction of
movement for the point cursor switches between horizontal (X) and vertical
(Y). The X-Y coordinates for the point cursor position are displayed at the
bottom right of the CRT display.
4. Select Add Draw Point from the sub-menu to place the draw point.
Draw points can be placed outside the left and right vertical bar cursors.
However, such points are not drawn when Execute is pressed.


. You cannot set multiple draw points above the same horizontal position.
If you try to do so, the instrument asks you if you want to change the level for the
point already above the horizontal position. To do so, select O.K. To abort the
operation, select Cancel.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to place as many points as desired.

6. To delete a draw point added with Add Draw Point, move the point cursor
to the point to be deleted, then select Delete Draw Point. This deletes the
point.
If Delete Draw Point is pressed repeatedly, the added points closest to the
point cursor are deleted in order.
7. Press the Smooth button in the sub-menu to switch on smoothing.
Smoothing can be toggled On or Off by pressing the Smooth button. When
smoothing is On, the waveform data is spline interpolated and the curve
outside the left and right vertical bar cursors and the placed points are
connected with a smooth curve. When smoothing is Off, the interpolation is
linear and the curve outside the left and right vertical bar cursors and the
placed points are connected with a straight line. When the vertical bar
cursors are at the ends of the waveform being edited, the waveform start and
finish are given the values to be smooth waveform as the repetition
waveforms whether smoothing is on or off.
8. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The points between the vertical bar
cursors will be connected with smooth curves, as shown in the left screen in
Figure 3 -27. This is called spline interpolation.
9. To return to the original waveform, select Undo from the bottom menu.
10. Press the Smooth button in the sub-menu to switch off smoothing.


 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

11. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The points between the vertical bar
cursors will be connected with straight lines, as shown in the right screen in
Figure 3 -27. This is called linear interpolation.

    #     #

Figure 3 Ć27: Smoothing


. To cancel drawing execution, select Undo from the bottom menu. The
waveform before the drawing is displayed again.

12. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The display moves from the
Draw... sub-menu to the side menu.
This completes the drawing procedure.

Shift Function. Use Shift... to shift the waveform data in the area specified with
the vertical bar cursors in the vertical or horizontal direction. The following
diagram shows the menu configuration for the Shift... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ  $ 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 
        !

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

 
"! 

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć49

EDIT Menu

In the horizontal direction, the shift value is the number of points or time; in the
vertical direction, the shift value is specified with the vertical value.
1. Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the
waveform to be shifted. Then select Shift... from the second page of the side
menu (More 2 of 3).
2. Press the Shift button in the sub-menu to select Horizontal.
The Shift side menu item selects the direction in which the waveform data
between the vertical bar cursors is to be shifted.
Horizontal shift allows you to shift all of the points or time values in the
whole editing area; it can be set to either a positive or a negative value.
When the shift value is positive, the waveform moves to the right; when it is
negative, the waveform moves to the left. Data that protrudes outside the
range defined by the vertical bar cursors as a result of shifting is added to the
end of either the right or left vertical bar cursor, depending on whether the
shift value is positive or negative.
3. Select Value from the sub-menu.
4. Use the general purpose knob or the numeric keys to input the shift point
value. This value will be expressed as either number of points or time,
depending on the horizontal unit setting (the value set with Horiz. Unit
under Setting).
5. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The waveform is shifted horizontally
with the specified conditions.
Figure 3 -28 shows the waveform between the vertical bar cursors shifted
right 100 points.


 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu




Figure 3 Ć28: Horizontally Shifted Display

6. Press the Shift button in the sub-menu to select Vertical.

7. Select Value from the sub-menu. Use the general purpose knob or the
numeric keys to input the shift point value.
The waveform can be shifted between –1.0000 and +1.0005 for the full scale
of the vertical axis. A positive shift moves the waveform up, a negative shift
down. However, any points shifted beyond the vertical full scale are clipped.
8. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The waveform is shifted vertically with
the specified conditions. Figure 3 -29 shows the waveform between the
vertical bar cursors shifted up 0.3.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć51

EDIT Menu

 

Figure 3 Ć29: Vertically Shifted Display

9. Select Go Back from the sub-menu.

Scaling Function. Use Scale... to change the scale for the waveform data between
the vertical bar cursors. Executing scaling changes the waveform data. The
following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Scale... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ "  "

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

 



ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
      
 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
!

1. Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the editing area for
scaling, then select Scale... from the second page of the side menu (More 2
of 3).
2. Press the Scale button in the sub-menu to select Horizontal.
The Scale sub-menu item selects the direction in which the data between the
vertical bar cursors is scaled.
3. Select Factor or New Size from the sub-menu.
The magnification for scaling can be set with either Factor or New Size.

Factor. The waveform data between the vertical bar cursors is expanded/
reduced by this ratio. This parameter is linked with New Size. Factor can
be set within the range ±100 in steps of 0.01. However, the total number

3 Ć52 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

of points for the entire waveform can not exceed 262 144, so if x100
scaling would give more total points than that, the maximum setting
factor drops to the one that gives 262 144 points. A negative factor
reverses the waveform between the vertical bar cursors creating a mirror
image.
Scaling with a factor under 1.00 and greater than –1.00 (±0.99) reduces
the waveform horizontally between the vertical bar cursors and reduces
the number of points for the entire waveform. Scaling with a factor
greater than 1.00 or less than –1.00 expands the waveform horizontally
between the vertical bar cursors and increases the number of points for
the entire waveform.

New Size. This parameter expands/reduces the waveform data between
the vertical bar cursors in units of points. This parameter is linked with
Factor. The limit on the range of New Size is that the number of points
between the vertical bar cursors can not be increased to more than x100
their original number and the number of points for the entire waveform
can not exceed 262 144.
4. Use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to input the scaling factor or
the number of points.
5. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The section of the waveform between the
vertical bar cursors will be scaled horizontally in the middle of the left
vertical bar cursor.
Figure 3 -30 shows a waveform expanded to x2 horizontally between the
vertical bar cursors with a Factor.




Figure 3 Ć30: Display Expanded Horizontally

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć53

EDIT Menu

6. Press the Scale button in the sub-menu to select Vertical.

7. Select Origin from the sub-menu. Use the numeric keys or the general
purpose knob to input the numeric value of the origin.
This value is used as a reference when scaling vertically. It may be set to any
value between –1.0000 and +1.0005 for the full scale of the vertical axis.
8. Select Factor from the sub-menu.
9. Use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to input the scaling factor.
Factor can be set within the range ±100 in steps of 0.01. A negative factor
causes the waveform between the vertical bar cursors to produce a mirror
image about the origin value.
Scaling with a factor under 1.00 and greater than –1.00 (±0.99) reduces the
waveform vertically between the vertical bar cursors. Scaling with a factor
greater than 1.00 or less than –1.00 expands the waveform vertically between
the vertical bar cursors. Waveform data pushed beyond the full scale of the
vertical axis by scaling is clipped.
10. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The waveform is scaled with the
specified conditions.
Figure 3 -31 shows an example of Factor being used to enlarge the section
of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors. In this example, the
waveform has been enlarged 1.5 times vertically around the reference line.




Figure 3 Ć31: Display Expanded to x1.5 Vertically

3 Ć54 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

11. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The system moves from the Scale...
sub-menu to the previous side menu.

Invert Function. Use Invert... to invert the waveform data in the area specified
with the vertical bar cursors either up/down or left/right. The following diagram
shows the menu configuration for the Invert... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
      


 



ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 

1. Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the editing area for
inversion, then select Invert... from the second page of the side menu (More
2 of 3).
2. Press the Invert button in the sub-menu to select Horizontal.
The Invert selects the direction in which the waveform data between the
vertical bar cursors is inverted.
3. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The waveform is inverted horizontally
with the specified conditions.
Figure 3 -32 shows an example of the waveform before and after it is
inverted horizontally.

 

Figure 3 Ć32: Horizontally Inverted Display

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć55

EDIT Menu

4. Press the Invert button in the sub-menu to select Vertical.

5. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The waveform is inverted vertically with
the specified conditions. Figure 3 -33 shows an example of the waveform
before and after it is inverted vertically.

 

Figure 3 Ć33: Vertically Inverted Display

6. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The system returns from the
Invert... sub-menu to the side menu.

Clip Function. Use Clip... to clip (remove) any waveform data between the
vertical bar cursors that is above or below the set level. The following diagram
shows the menu configuration for the Clip... item.




       
 



1. Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the editing area for
clipping, then select Clip... from the second page of the side menu (More 2
of 3). A horizontal (broken) line showing the clip level will appear.
2. Press the Clip button in the sub-menu to select Upper or Lower.

3 Ć56 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

The Clip sub-menu item selects the area of the waveform data between the
vertical bar cursors to be clipped. Either the area above the clip level
(Upper) or below the clip level (Lower) can be selected.
3. Select Level from the sub-menu.
4. Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to input the clip level.
5. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The waveform is clipped with the
specified conditions. Figure 3 -34 shows the waveform clipped above 0.3.




Figure 3 Ć34: Display of Waveform Clipped Above Clip Level

6. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The system returns from the Clip...
sub-menu to the side menu.

Setting a Marker. The Marker... item is used to set the marker signal (shown at
the bottom of the screen) for the section of the waveform between the vertical
bar cursors. This signal may be set to High, Low or Pattern. The following
diagram shows the menu configuration for the Marker... item.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć57

EDIT Menu

1
Marker
2
Import Line Data /
Clear Pattern

Operation (More 3 of 3) Marker... Set High 1 Bit

Key Data
Set Low 4 Bits
Go Back 0
Initial Src
Set Pattern 1
User defined 0
Initial Code 1
Code Config...
High/Low
Out [I/O]
Invert/Keep
Cancel
O.K.


. When a new waveform file is created, the marker signal for the first point
of the waveform data is set to high as a default value.

The output level for the marker signals is 1.2 V with a termination of 50 W. The
marker signals for CH1 are output from the CH1 MARKER 1 output connector
on the front panel and CH1 MARKER 2 OUT connector on the rear panel,
respectively. Similarly, when Option 02 is installed, the CH2 marker signals are
output from the CH2 MARKER 1 OUT and CH2 MARKER 2 OUT
connectors, respectively, on the rear panel.
The marker level changes to low after waveform output is complete or when the
STOP button in the MODE menu is pressed.
1. Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the area for marker
setting, then select Marker... from the third page of the side menu (More 3
of 3).
2. Press the Marker button in the side menu to select marker 1 or marker 2.
3. Press the sub-menu Set High or Set Low button to set the desired marker
state. Figure 3 -35 shows marker signal set high between the vertical bar
cursors.

Set High. The marker signal for the section of the waveform between the
vertical bar cursors will be set to High.

Set Low. The marker signal for the section of the waveform between the
vertical bar cursors will be set to Low


 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu




Figure 3 Ć35: Marker Signal 1 Set High

4. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The system returns from the Marker...
sub-menu to the side menu.

Example: Setting a Marker Pattern. In this example, you will set a pattern for the
marker and then create a marker signal with that pattern used as the period.
Marker patterns are set with the Set Pattern item.
1. Move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the area for setting a
marker pattern, then select Marker... from the third page of the side menu
(More 3 of 3).
2. Select Set Pattern from the sub-menu. The sub-menu for this item will
appear.
3. Using the numeric keys, enter the data for the marker pattern. Data can be
entered in either 1-bit or 4-bits increments.

Key Data. Pressing this button toggles the increment setting from 1 Bit
to 4 Bits and back again.

Import Line Data/Clear Pattern. Pressing the Import Line Data button
imports the marker data for the designated editor as pattern data. When
this is done, the menu item will change to Clear Pattern. This
command is used to delete all of the pattern data that has been imported
or created. When the Clear Pattern button is pressed to delete the
pattern data, the menu item changes back to Import Line Data.

User defined Code Config... Used to define a custom conversion table
for code conversion.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć59

EDIT Menu

For detailed instructions on pattern setting, see “Setting Pattern Data” in the
timing display in this section as well as “Pattern Codes” in Appendix F.
For more detailed information on the method used to set patterns, see “Setting
Pattern Data” in the Timing Display in this section and “Pattern Code” in
Appendix F.
Figure 3 -36 shows an example of pattern data being entered.

Figure 3 Ć36: Entering Pattern Data

4. When you have finished creating the pattern data, select O.K. The marker
data between the left and right vertical bar cursors will be replaced with the
pattern data that you have created. To cancel the operation, select Cancel.
Whichever option you select O.K. or Cancel, the menu that was displayed
before Set Pattern was selected will reappear.
5. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The system returns from the Marker...
sub-menu to the side menu.

Inserting Other Waveforms. Use Insert Other Waveform to insert other

waveforms into any desired location within the waveform being edited. The
following diagram shows the menu configuration.

  


 
     
 
 

1. Press the front panel CURSOR button.

3 Ć60 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

2. Use the general purpose knob to move the active vertical bar cursor to the
position where the other waveform is to be inserted.

Figure 3 Ć37: Defining the Location for Insertion

The waveform is inserted right before the active vertical bar cursor. However, if
the cursor is at the end of the waveform, the data is inserted directly after the
cursor.
3. After setting the position to insert the other waveform, select Insert Other
Waveform from the side menu. A list of waveform files is displayed.
Data placed into the paste buffer with Cut or Copy is listed at the top of the
file list with the name “Paste Buffer.” The data in the paste buffer can be
inserted into any desired location by selecting this item.
4. Use the general purpose knob to select the waveform file to be inserted from
the file list.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć61

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć38: List of Files for Insertion

5. Select the Show Catalog Entry from the sub-menu. The waveform for the
selected file is displayed.

Figure 3 Ć39: File Waveform Display

6. Select O.K. from the sub-menu.

The waveform from the selected file is inserted right before the active
vertical bar cursor. Marker signal 1 and 2 belonging to the waveform data are
processed at the same time. Select Cancel to cancel the waveform insertion.
When O.K. or Cancel is selected, the display returns to the menu displayed
before Insert Other Waveform was selected.

3 Ć62 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć40: Inserting Waveforms

Single Waveform Calculations. The Single Waveform Math... item allows you to
perform mathematical calculations for the waveform itself. Calculations are
applied to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors.
Absolute Determines the absolute value for the amplitude.
Square Doubles the absolute value for the amplitude. If the
amplitude is a negative number, the calculated result is also
negative.
Cube Triples the amplitude.
Square Root Determines the square root for the absolute value of the
amplitude. If the amplitude is a negative number, the
calculated result is also negative.
Normalize Normalizes the amplitude values so that the maximum
absolute value is 1.0 (i.e. a value of +1.0 or –1.0).
Integral Integrates the amplitude and normalizes.
Differential Differentiates the amplitude and normalizes.
The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Single Waveform
Math... item.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć63

EDIT Menu

Absolute
Square
Cube
Type Square Root
Normalize
Operation (More 3 of 3) Single Waveform Integral
Math... Differential
Go Back
Execute

To derive the Absolute value for the amplitude of a sine wave between the
vertical bar cursors:
1. Create the sine wave to be subjected to Absolute calculation. Figure 3 -41
shows the sine wave before calculations are performed.

Figure 3 Ć41: Waveform Example before Calculation

2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.

3. Using the general purpose knob, move the left and right vertical bar cursors
to define the area for calculation.
4. Select Single Waveform Math... from the third page of the side menu
(More 3 of 3).
5. Press the Type button in the sub-menu and select Absolute.
6. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The absolute value will be derived for
the section of the waveform located between the vertical bar cursors.
Figure 3 -42 shows the waveform after calculation.

3 Ć64 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć42: Absolute Calculation

7. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The system returns from the Single
Waveform Math... sub-menu to the side menu.

Calculation Examples. The following diagrams show examples of a waveform

before and after various calculations are performed.

Square. Doubles the absolute value for the amplitude




Figure 3 Ć43: Square Calculation

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć65

EDIT Menu

Cube. Triples the amplitude




Figure 3 Ć44: Cube Calculation

Square Root. Determines the square root for the absolute value of the
amplitude.




Figure 3 Ć45: Square Root Calculation

3 Ć66 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Normalize. Normalizes the amplitude




Figure 3 Ć46: Normalize Calculation

Integral. Integrating the amplitude.




Figure 3 Ć47: Integral Calculation

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć67

EDIT Menu

Differential. Differentiating the amplitude.

 

Figure 3 Ć48: Differential Calculation

Calculations With Other Waveform Data. Use Dual Waveform Math... to perform
math calculations with the waveform currently being edited and other waveform
data. The following calculations can be performed:
Add Adds the waveform data being edited and the other
waveform file data.
Sub Subtracts the other waveform file data from the wave from
data being edited.
Mul Multiplies the waveform file data being edited by the other
waveform file data.
The region pushed out beyond the vertical axis full scale by the calculations is
clipped.
The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Dual Waveform
Math... item.



         

! 
"

3 Ć68 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

1. Create the waveform to be operated on with the other waveform file data.
Figure 3 -49 shows the example of waveform before the arithmetic opera-
tions.

Figure 3 Ć49: Example of Waveform Before Arithmetic Operations

2. Press the front panel CURSOR button.

3. Using the general purpose knob, move the vertical cursor bars to define the
area for calculation.
4. Select Dual Waveform Math... from the third page of the side menu (More
3 of 3).
5. A list of files will be displayed on the screen. Using the general purpose
knob, select the file for which the calculations will be performed. Calcula-
tions will be executed for both the section of the waveform data being edited
between the vertical bar cursors and the selected waveform file.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć69

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć50: List of Files for Waveform Calculation

6. Select Show Catalog Entry from the sub-menu. The waveform for the
selected file is displayed. See Figure 3 -51.

Figure 3 Ć51: Selected File Waveform Display

7. After verifying the waveform, select Continue from the sub-menu. The
waveform will disappear and the system returns to previous Dual Waveform
Math... sub-menu.
8. Select the desired calculation type from the sub-menu. The moment a
calculation type is selected, the calculation is carried out and the results are
displayed on the CRT screen. The display returns to the menu on display

3 Ć70 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

before Dual Waveform Math... was selected. Figure 3 -52 displays the
waveforms added (Add) between the vertical bar cursors.

Figure 3 Ć52: Waveform Addition Display

If you select Cancel, the menu returns to the menu on display before Dual
Waveform Math... was selected without any calculations being made.
Data placed into the paste buffer with Cut or Copy is listed at the top of the file
list with the name “Paste Buffer.” When this item is selected, an operation is
carried out with the data in the paste buffer.

Specified Region Shift. The Region Shift... item shifts a specified region of a
waveform either right or left, towards the center or away from the center. If the
specified amount of the shift is less than the sampling interval, the original
waveform is resampled using data interpolation to derive the shifted values. The
Region Shift... item has the following menu configuration.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć71

EDIT Menu

Right
Type Left
Expand
Compress

Linear
Shift Scale Value Interpolation
Quadratic
Operation ( More 4 of 4 ) Region Shift... Add
Data Value
Replace
Config...
Exclude
Cursor Point
Include
Go Back
Go Back
Execute Smooth +/- Points

Table 3-3 lists the differences between this function and the Shift function .

Table 3Ć3: Differences Between the Shift Operations

Item Shift Region Shift

Area Rotates the area delimited by the Shifts the area delimited by the
cursors. cursors to a different area.
Shift amount Data point spacing Amounts less than the data point
spacing
Interpolation at None Interpolation performed
intersection

Data changed by manipulations performed from Region Shift... menu can be

restored to a prior state (for one operation only) using the Undo item on the
bottom menu. If the result of the operation was not what was intended, use the
Undo function to restore the original data. Iterating parameter modifications and
the Undo function can be a good way of finding optimal settings for the shift
parameters.

Shift Type Selection. There are four types of specified region shifts, Right or
Left, in which a region is shifted to the right or left, and Expand or
Compress, in which the shift moves the data towards the center or away
form the center. The Type item selects the shift type.
Right or Left. Shifts the area bordered by the vertical bar cursors the amount
specified by the Shift Scale Value item to right or left. Figure 3 -53 shows
the data shown in the right figure is shifted by 1.

3 Ć72 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 !  !

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
      

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
   
 
      
   
 

 ! ! ! ! ! " 

Figure 3 Ć53: Data Shifted Using the Right" Item

Although the maximum value that can be specified for the shift is the
number of waveform data points, the section of the data that is shifted
beyond the maximum number of data points is lost after the shift.
Expand or Compress. The area delimited by the left and right vertical bar
cursors is divided into two sections at the center of the cursors, and those
two regions are shifted towards the center point by shift scale values for
Compress and away from the center for Expand. In Figure 3 -54, when the
shift type is Compress, the data shown at the right of figure results when the
data shown at the left is compressed by 1.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 !  !

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
   ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
   
   
 
      
   
 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 ! !   " 

Figure 3 Ć54: Data Compressed Using the Compress" Item

The Shift Values For Selecting Expand or Compress

Expand. Although the maximum value that can be specified for the shift is
the number of waveform data points, the section of the data that is shifted
beyond the maximum number of data points is lost after the shift.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć73

EDIT Menu

Compress. In this case the value of the shift must be less than one half the
size of the area surrounded by the left and right vertical bar cursors. The
section that exceeds the position of one half the region is lost after the shift if
the Data Value item (described below) is set to Replace.

Shift Scale Value. When shifting waveform data, it is possible to specify a
Shift Scale Value with a precision that exceeds that of the sampling points.
In the AWG2021 arbitrary waveform generator, values may be specified with
a resolution as fine as 1/1000 point. However, there are cases where it is not
possible to realize a shift of that precision due to the form of the waveform
itself. In particular, changes in the lowest digit of the shift value will not be
reflected in the output unless the amplitude of the original waveform spans
the full scale of the data representation.


. Since data values between the data points are calculated by interpolation
when shifting by a fractional value, certain characteristics of the original
waveform may be lost. Therefore, a filter must be inserted to prevent aliasing.
If the changes in the waveform are extremely smooth, fractional shift amounts
may not result in the intended effect.

1. Specify the region to be shifted with the left and right vertical bar cursors,
and select the Region Shift... item on the fourth page of the side menu
(More 4 of 4).
2. Select the shift type by pressing the sub menu Type button.
3. Select Shift Scale Value from the sub menu.
4. Enter the shift amount using either the general purpose knob or the numeric
keys. The shift value can also be displayed as a time value.
5. If other settings related to the shift need to be specified, select the Config...
item from the sub menu. See the “Other Shift Settings” item below for more
information.
6. Select Execute from the sub menu. The waveform in the edit region will be
shifted with the specified conditions.

Other Shift Settings. The following parameters can be set from the Config...
item.
Interpolation Selecting the interpolation method
Data Value Handling of overlapping regions in the shift result
Cursor Point Interpolation of the data on the cursors
Smooth +/– Points Setting the smoothing width at the data boundary
positions


 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Interpolation. The data is re-sampled when shifting by fractional amounts.

Data values between data points are acquired by interpolation. The Inter-
polation item selects the interpolation method used. The following two
options are provided.
Linear interpolation
Quadratic interpolation
Linear interpolation is appropriate if the original waveform consists of
straight lines, such as triangle or square waves. However, the peaks in
waveforms with extremely sharp peaks may be flattened somewhat.
Quadratic interpolation is appropriate for waveforms with curves, such as
sine waves. However, in waveforms with extremely sharp peaks, some peaks
may become wider.
Linear Interpolation. Figure 3 -55 provides an overview of linear interpola-
tion. If the point X2 is shifted to the left by 0.2, the new value is calculated
by interpolating with the next point to the left.







 
 

Figure 3 Ć55: Linear Interpolation

If the coordinate of the shifted point is X2 ’, then the value of the point Y2 ’ is
given by the following formula.
YȀ 2 + 0.2 Y 1 ) (1 * 0.2) Y2

Quadratic Interpolation. Figure 3 -56 provides an overview of quadratic

interpolation. If the point X2 is shifted to the left by 0.2, the new value is
calculated by interpolating using three points, the shifted point itself and the
preceding and following points.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć75

EDIT Menu







 
 

Figure 3 Ć56: Quadratic Interpolation

Quadratic interpolation is expressed as follows.

f (x) + Ax 2 ) Bx ) C

The coefficients A, B, and C in the above formula are derived using the three
points including those directly preceding and following the position to be
derived.

y 1 + Ax 21 ) Bx 1 ) C
y 2 + Ax 22 ) Bx 2 ) C
y 3 + Ax 23 ) Bx 3 ) C

Simplifying by letting x1 = –1, x2 = 0, x3 = 1, gives:

y1 + A * B ) C
y2 + C
y3 + A ) B ) C

This allows the coefficients A, B, and C to be derived as follows:

y1 ) y3
A+ * y2
2
y * y1
B+ 3
2
C + y2

Using these values, the value y2 ’ at position x2 ’ can be derived as follows.

y1 ) y3 y3 * y1
y Ȁ2 + ( * y 2) (* 0.2) 2 ) ( ) (* 0.2) ) y 2
2 2

3 Ć76 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Data Value. This item selects the handling of overlapping regions in the
shift.
Add The shifted data and the overlapping data are added.
Replace Replaces the region with the shifted data. When Type is
Compress, the data for points shifted beyond the center is
lost.

Cursor Point. This item selects whether the data boundary points are
interpolated.
When the Cursor Point is Exclude
The points on the left and right vertical bar cursors are not interpolated.
Figure 3 -57 shows the original data at the left and the shifted data at the
right.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
         
 

Figure 3 Ć57: Shift with Cursor Point" Set to Exclude"

In this case, the first and last data points remain at their original values,
exactly as though they had not been shifted. However, this error can be made
inconspicuous by the insertion of an appropriate anti-aliasing filter.
When the Cursor Point is Include
The points on the left and right vertical bar cursors are interpolated.

Smooth +/– Points. This item specifies the smoothing width with points at
the data boundary positions. Smoothing is only performed over the points
specified for the area around the boundary positions. No smoothing is
performed if this point is set to zero. Points can be set between 0 through 20.
Smoothing is performed on a specified region without regard for the shift.
The smoothing technique takes the average of the point itself and the two
adjacent points (three points) as the new value.
Figure 3 -58 shows an example, with the original data shown on the left and
the smoothed data shown on the right.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć77

EDIT Menu

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

 


Figure 3 Ć58: Smoothing


. Since smoothing is equivalent to low pass filtering, features of the

original waveform can be lost resulting in significant changes to the waveform.
To acquire appropriate output waveforms, experiment with a variety of values
for the Smooth +/– Points parameter.

Side Effects from Shifting. The left side of Figure 3 -59 shows data prior to
shifting and the right side shows the result of shifting the data between the
cursors indicated with solid lines to right by 0.5. Since shifting to right by
0.5 requires determining the data at the 0.5 location to left, the data in Figure
3 -59 is interpolated to derive the data at locations 0.5 to left from the
positions of each data point. Linear interpolation is used in this case.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
  
    

Figure 3 Ć59: Data Shifting

When this data is output through an appropriate filter, the waveform will be
shifted to right by 0.5 point units. When this shift is performed, the data
point at the position of the left cursor is lowered. This is a side effect of the
interpolation process. There are several techniques for preventing this data
lowering phenomenon as follows.
1) Increase the size of the area.

3 Ć78 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

2) Set the Cursor Point setting to Exclude.

3) Apply smoothing. However, there are waveforms for which smoothing
may not be effective.

Increasing the Size of the Area. Data that is identical across the operation can
be acquired by increasing the size of the area. (See Figure 3 -60.) Smooth
data is acquired when this area is shifted, as shown in the right of the figure.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Original Data Data Shifted to Right by 0.5

Figure 3 Ć60: Increasing the Size of the Area

This is due to the fact that when using linear interpolation to derive data values
between points, the value of the data does not change when interpolating
between points with the same value. The value not changing is equivalent to not
performing a shift. However, this error can be made inconspicuous by the
insertion of an appropriate anti-aliasing filter.

Multiple Copy. The Multiple Copy... item appears in the menu when two or more
waveforms are being edited simultaneously. It is used to copy the section of the
waveform between the two vertical bar cursors in one editing area to the
waveform between the vertical bar cursors in another editing area, at the interval
specified with Interval. The following diagram shows the menu configuration
for the Multiple Copy... item.

Source
Interval
Operation (More 4 of 4) Multiple Copy...
Go Back
Execute

See Page 3 -15 “Opening and Selecting Editing Areas” for further information on
designating multiple editing areas.
In this example, we will copy the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in
editing area 1 to editing area 2. We will start from the point at which only one
waveform has been designated in the waveform editor.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć79

EDIT Menu

To designate a second editing area in the waveform editor:

1. Choose Select/Open from the bottom menu.
2. Select Another Waveform from the side menu.
3. Using the general purpose knob, select New Waveform from the waveform
list and then select O.K. A second editing area will appear, as shown in
Figure 3 -61.

Figure 3 Ć61: Two Waveform Editing Areas Designated

To select the area for waveform copying:

4. Select Waveform1 from the side menu to designate this waveform area as
the source for copying.
5. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.
6. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, move the vertical bar
cursors to designate the section of the waveform to be copied. In this
example, we will set the left cursor to point 250 and the right cursor to point
749.

3 Ć80 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu


. Copying will include the point at which the cursor is located. The value
indicated by
at the top of the waveform area indicates the number of points
between the two cursors, so the number of points that will be copied will be this
value plus one point (the point at which the cursor is located).

Figure 3 Ć62: Setting the Copy Source

Setting the Destination for Waveform Copying

7. Select Waveform2 from the side menu to designate this area as the
destination for copying (the area to which the waveform will be copied).
8. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.
9. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, move the vertical bar
cursors to set the area within which the waveform will be copied. In this
example, we will set the left cursor to point 0 and the right cursor to point
999.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć81

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć63: Setting the Copy Destination

To copy the waveform:

10. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
11. Select Multiple Copy... from the fourth page of the side menu (More 4 of
4).
When three waveform areas have been designated in the waveform editor,
select one of the remaining two editing areas as the source for waveform
copying with Source item in the sub-menu.
12. Select Interval from the sub-menu.
13. Using the numeric keys, set the interval value to 500 points. When copying
the section of a waveform between the bar cursors in one editing area to the
area between the bar cursors in another editing area, the Interval value
determines the interval at which the waveform will be repeated horizontally
(in points).

3 Ć82 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

14. Select Execute from the sub-menu.

If the number of points in the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in
the copy source is the same as the value set for Interval, the copied
waveform will be displayed repeating at the interval designated with
Interval. In the example shown in Figure 3 -64, both the waveform point
size and the Interval value are set to 500.





Figure 3 Ć64: Waveform Copying (number of points in waveform = Interval value)

If the number of points in the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in the
copy source is less than the value set for Interval, data at level 0 (in other words,
a straight line) will be added at the end of the waveform. Figure 3 -65 shows an
example in which the waveform point size has been set to 500 and the Interval
has been set to 600. Data at level 0 has been added from point 500 to point 599;
the next waveform begins from point 600.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć83

EDIT Menu







Figure 3 Ć65: Waveform Copying (number of points in waveform < Interval value)

If the number of points in the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in the
copy source is greater than the value set for Interval, the overlapping portion
will be added to the waveform. Figure 3 -66 shows an example in which the
waveform point size has been set to 500 and the Interval value has been set to
300. The copied waveform will be pasted at intervals of 300, starting from points
0, 300, 600 and 900, and so the waveform will overlap in phase between points
300 – 499, 600 – 799 and 900 – 999. As a result, the amplitude in these areas
will be doubled.













Figure 3 Ć66: Waveform Copying (number of points in waveform > Interval value)

3 Ć84 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

15. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The display moves from the
Multiple Copy... sub-menu to the side menu.

Convolution Calculations. The Convolute... menu item appears when two or more
waveforms are being edited. It is used to convolute the section of the waveform
between the two vertical bar cursors in one editing area with the waveform
between the vertical bar cursors in another editing area. The result is normalized.
The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Convolute... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
  
       


See Page 3 -15 “Opening and Selecting Editing Areas” for further information on
designating multiple editing areas.
On a discrete system, convolution is called discrete convolution. The convolu-
tion y (n) of waveform x (n) and waveform h (i) can be expressed by the
following formula, where N is the number of data items:

ȍ x (i)h(n–i)
N–1
y (n) +
i+0

The operation expressed by this formula is called convolution.

In this example we will perform convolution with the waveform between the
vertical bar cursors in editing area 1 as the Source, and the waveform in editing
area 2.
A Gaussian pulse of 256 points is used for Waveform1, while a Magnetic Disk
Writing signal of 512 points is used for Waveform2. The Gaussian pulse
(GAUSS_P.WFM) and Magnetic Disk Writing signal (MDSK_WR.WFM) are
included on the Sample Waveform Library Disk that came with the instrument.
Figure 3 -67 shows the waveforms for Waveform1 and Waveform2.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć85

EDIT Menu


 

 

Figure 3 Ć67: Waveforms Used for Waveform1 and Waveform2

The procedure after the two waveforms have been set in each editing area is as
follows:
Setting the convolution range
1. Select Select/Open from the bottom menu.
2. Select Waveform1 from the side menu.
3. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.
4. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, set the positions of the
left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the waveform for
convolution. In this example, we will set the left cursor to point 0 and the
right cursor to point 255.
5. Select Waveform2 from the side menu.
6. Select Setting from the bottom menu.
7. Select Waveform Points from the side menu and, using the numeric keys or
the general purpose knob, set the waveform point size to 768.
512 points is sufficient for the range of operation for Waveform2; in order to
display all of the results of operation, the Waveform2 editing area (where
the results will be displayed) must be enlarged. The area needed is the sum
of the point sizes for the two waveforms.
8. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.

3 Ć86 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

9. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, set the positions of the
left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the waveform for
convolution. In this example, we will set the left cursor to point 0 and the
right cursor to point 767.
Calculating the waveforms
10. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
11. Select Convolute... from the fourth page of the side menu (More 4 of 4).
When three waveform areas have been designated in the waveform editor,
select one of the other two editing areas as the source for waveform
convolution with Source item in the sub-menu.
12. Select Execute from the sub-menu.
Figure 3 -68 shows the screen before and after convolution.
In this example, the results of operation will be displayed between the left and
right vertical bar cursors in editing area 2 (the one enclosed by a box on the
screen) where editing is being performed. The convolution process will take
approximately 20 seconds.


. The convolution process will take around 80 seconds for two waveforms
consisting of 1000 points each; the time will vary slightly depending on the type
of waveform. An instrument with Option 09 installed is equipped with the
convolution waveform editor which performs convolution at high speed.




Figure 3 Ć68: Convolution

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć87

EDIT Menu

13. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The display moves from the
Convolute... sub-menu to the side menu.

Comparing Waveforms. The Compare... item appears when two or more

waveforms are being edited simultaneously. It is used to compare the section of
the waveform between the two vertical bar cursors in one editing area to the
waveform between the vertical bar cursors in another editing area. The following
diagram shows the menu configuration for the Compare... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Source

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Hysteresis DATA
Operation (More 4 of 4) Compare... Set Result to MARKER1

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Go Back
Execute
MARKER2

See Page 3 -15 “Opening and Selecting Editing Areas” for more detailed
information regarding how to designate multiple editing areas.
Depending on whether the result of comparison is displayed in the editing area or
in the MARKER area (as determined by the Set Result to item), the results are
displayed as follows:
DATA selected in Set Result to

Comparison Result (waveform level)

Destination > Source 1.000 (FFE in hexadecimal format)
Destination ≤ Source 0.000 (7FF in hexadecimal format)

MARKER1 or MARKER2 selected in Set Result to

Comparison Result (MARKER)

Destination > Source 1
Destination ≤ Source 0

In this example, we will designate the portion of the waveform between the
vertical bar cursors in editing area 1 as the reference (Source) and then compare
it with the waveform between the vertical bar cursors in editing area 2. The
procedure begins from the point at which two waveforms have been selected in
the waveform editor.
Designating the Section for Comparison
1. Select Select/Open from the bottom menu.

3 Ć88 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

2. Select Waveform1 from the side menu. This waveform will be the reference
for comparison.
3. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.
4. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, set the positions of the
left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the waveform for
comparison. In this example, we will set the left cursor to point 125 and the
right cursor to point 625.


. The value indicated by
shows the difference in points between the left
and right vertical bar cursors. This value includes the point occupied by the
cursor, so the number of points in the waveform is
+ 1.

5. Select Waveform2 from the side menu. This waveform will be compared to
the reference waveform.
6. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.
7. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, set the positions of the
left and right vertical bar cursors to define the section of the waveform for
comparison. In this example, we will set the left cursor to point 125 and the
right cursor to point 875.
8. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
9. Select Compare... from the fourth page of the side menu (More 4 of 4).
Figure 3 -69 shows the menu with the Compare... item selected.
When three waveform areas have been designated in the waveform editor,
select one of the remaining two editing areas as the source for waveform
comparison with Source item in the sub-menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 


EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć69: Compare... Item Selected

10. Press the Set Result to button in the sub-menu to select MARKER1.
This item is used to set where the results of comparison will be displayed.
11. If you would like to apply hysteresis to the reference waveform, select
Hysteresis and enter a value. If hysteresis is not necessary, this item should
be set to 0.
Hysteresis comparison uses a higher and lower signal level than the Source
signal level; the degree is determined by the value set with the Hysteresis
item.
12. Select Execute from the sub-menu.
Comparison Without Hysteresis — The left part of Figure 3 -70 shows a
comparison of a triangular wave for Waveform2 and a square wave for
Waveform1, with the results output to the Waveform2 MARKER display area.
The figure on the right has been provided as an aid to understanding this process.
Comparison is only performed for the section of Waveform2 between the
vertical bar cursors (in other words, from point 125 to point 875). Data outside
this range is preserved as it was before comparison. The figure on the right
shows the default marker set at point 0 remains “1.”

3 Ć90 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

As there is less data in the Source waveform than the destination waveform, data
at level 0 (in other words, a straight line) has been automatically added from
point 626 to point 875 in the Source waveform.

 

 
 

 

   

Figure 3 Ć70: Comparison Without Hysteresis

Comparison With Hysteresis — The left part of Figure 3 -71 shows a

hysteresis comparison between a triangular wave as Waveform2 and a square
wave as Waveform1, with the results output to the MARKER1 display area in
the Waveform2 area. The figure on the right has been provided as an aid to
understanding this process.
In hysteresis comparison, the waveform only becomes high level when the
destination waveform exceeds the level above the Source waveform set for
Hysteresis. The waveform only becomes low level when the destination
waveform exceeds the level below the Source waveform set for Hysteresis.
Comparison is only performed for the section of the waveform between the
vertical bar cursors (in this example, from point 0 to point 999).

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć91

EDIT Menu

  
   
 

  
   
 

  
 

Figure 3 Ć71: Comparison With Hysteresis

13. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The display moves from the
Compare... sub-menu to the side menu.

Zooming Waveforms. The Zoom item is used to enlarge or reduce the waveform
being displayed, either horizontally or vertically. This process is for display
purposes only; it does not affect the waveform data. The side menu consists of 2
pages: the first page contains the horizontal zoom items and the second page
contains the vertical zoom items.

3 Ć92 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć72: Zoom Menu

Horizontal Zooming. When the waveform is enlarged horizontally using the

Horizontal Zoom in item, three additional items are displayed in the side menu:
Horizontal Zoom out Used to reduce the waveform
Horizontal Zoom fit Used to return to normal waveform size (x1)
Horizontal Pan Used to scroll through the waveform when it
is enlarged
1. Select Zoom from the bottom menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.
3. Using the general purpose knob, move the active vertical bar cursor to the
center of the position at which you want the waveform to be displayed.
Horizontal waveform enlargement will be centered around the active vertical
bar cursor.
4. Select Horizontal Zoom in from the side menu. The waveform will be
enlarged horizontally.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć93

EDIT Menu




Figure 3 Ć73: Horizontal Zoom

5. Select Horizontal Zoom in again from the side menu.

The degree of enlargement will increase each time the button is pressed.
When the maximum enlargement is reached, the Horizontal Zoom in item
will disappear. The displayed inverted portion of the horizontal scroll
indicator above the waveform editing area indicates which section of the
waveform is currently being displayed on the screen.
6. Select Horizontal Zoom out from the side menu.
The degree of enlargement will decrease each time the button is pressed.
When normal size (x1) is reached, the Horizontal Zoom out item will
disappear.
7. Select the Horizontal Zoom in item once again to enlarge the waveform.
8. Select Horizontal Pan from the side menu.
This item enables you to scroll through the entire waveform by turning the
general purpose knob. The displayed inverted portion of the horizontal scroll
indicator above the waveform editing area indicates which section of the
waveform is currently being displayed on the screen.
9. Turn the general purpose knob and check to make sure the waveform moves
horizontally.
10. Select Horizontal Zoom fit from the side menu. The waveform will revert
to normal size (x1).

3 Ć94 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Vertical Zooming. When the waveform is enlarged vertically with the Vertical
Zoom in item, three new items will be added to the side menu:
Vertical Zoom out Used to reduce the waveform.
Vertical Zoom fit Used to return to normal waveform size (x1).
Vertical Pan Used to scroll through the waveform when it is
enlarged.
The process of vertical zooming is the same as that for horizontal zooming.
However, the waveform is enlarged/reduced as the reference for the center of the
vertical axis.
Figure 3 -74 shows an example of a waveform before and after vertical zooming.




Figure 3 Ć74: Vertical Zoom

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć95

EDIT Menu

Timing Display
To show the timing display for the waveform editor using the View type.... item
in the Setting menu follow this procedure.
1. Select Setting from the bottom menu.
2. Select View type... from the side menu.
Three items will be displayed in the sub-menu: Graphic, Timing and Table.
3. Select Timing from the sub-menu.
The timing display of the waveform editor will appear. See Figure 3 -75.

Figure 3 Ć75: Timing Display

4. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The system moves to the previous
Setting side menu.

3 Ć96 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Timing Display Menu Figure 3 -76 shows the menu configuration for the timing display.
Structure
Bottom Menu Side Menu SubĆMenu

Waveform1
Waveform2 *1
Select/Open *1
Waveform3
Another Waveform

Cut
Copy to Buffer
Paste from Buffer
Waveform Editor Line
Set High
Set...
Set Low
Set Pattern
Line
Shift...
Value

Invert... Line

Source
Copy Line...
Destination
Operation
Source
Exchange Line...
Destination

Source
Logical Function... Destination
Func Type

Data Expand... Factor

Insert Other Waveform

Shift Register Line

Generator... Register Config...
User defined
Code Config...

Figure 3 Ć76: Waveform Editor Timing Display Menu Structure

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć97

EDIT Menu

Bottom Menu Side Menu SubĆMenu

Horizontal Zoom in
Horizontal Zoom out *2
Zoom *2
Horizontal Zoom fit
Horizontal Pan *2

Waveform Points Graphic

View type... Timing
Table
Horiz.Unit
Setting
Clock *3
Waveformx
*1 Waveformxx
Cursor Link to...
Link Off
Grid
Undo
Pattern
Standard Step
Waveform Max *4
Min *4
Write and Close
Close/Write Close without Writing
Write

*1 This item appears when two or more waveforms are being edited simultaneously with Another
Waveform in the side menu (under Select/Open in the bottom menu).

*2 These items appear when the displayed waveform data has been zoomed in the horizontal direction
with Horizontal Zoom in in the side menu (under Zoom in the bottom menu).

*3 This item appears when Time has been selected for Horiz. Unit in the side menu (under Setting in the
bottom menu).

*4 These items appear when Count Up or Count Down has been selected for Pattern in the side menu
(under Standard Waveform in the bottom menu).

Figure 3 Ć76: Waveform Editor Timing Display Menu Structure (Cont.)

3 Ć98 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page
on which you can find a description of that function.

Table 3Ć4: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Select /Open Opening and selecting the editing area 3 Ć15
Operation Editing waveforms in timing display 3 Ć104
Cut Cutting waveforms 3 Ć43, 3 Ć104
Copy to Buffer Copying waveforms 3 Ć44, 3 Ć104
Paste from Buffer Pasting waveforms 3 Ć44, 3 Ć104
Set... Setting waveform data 3 Ć104
Shift... Shifting waveform data 3 Ć117
Invert... Inverting waveform data 3 Ć118
C
Copy Li
Line... C i lilines
Copying 3 Ć119
119
Exchange Line... Exchanging lines 3 Ć120
Logical Function...
F ctio Appl i g logical operations
Applying ope atio s to lines
li es 3 Ć121
121
Data Expand... Expanding waveform data 3 Ć122
Insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveform data 60 3 Ć124
3 Ć60, 124
Shift Register Generator... PseudoĆrandom pulse generator using 3 Ć124
shift register
Zoom Zooming displayed waveforms data 3 Ć92, 3 Ć129
Setting Settings for the waveform to be edited 3 Ć28, 3 Ć101
Waveform Points... Setting waveform point count 3 Ć29
View type... Selecting the waveform data display 3 Ć29
format
Horiz. Unit Setting horizontal axis units 3 Ć31
Clock Setting clock frequency 3 Ć32
Cursor Link to... Linking the vertical bar cursors 3 Ć34
Grid Displaying a grid in the editing area 3 Ć35
Undo Canceling function execution 3 Ć2
Standard Waveform Creating standard waveform data 3 Ć101
Close/Write Saving files and exiting the editor 3 Ć20

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć99

EDIT Menu

Timing Display Screen Figure 3 -77 shows the timing display screen. This section will describe each
portion of the screen; however, descriptions of areas that are identical to the
graphic display will be omitted. See “Graphic Display Screen” for a description
of the graphic display.

Figure 3 Ć77: Timing Display Screen

(1) DATA 11 - DATA 0   #            
      
  ! $      
        "!      
 " "   !
(2) MARKER1 / MARKER2   #          !
     # %MARKER        
      "!        "
"   !

3 Ć100 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

(3) Button Operations   ! !       


  CURSOR       

 !   

  CURSOR       

   

Settings for the Waveform to be Edited. Before waveform data is created, you
must use the Setting item in the side menu to set the environment for editing.
The method used to set values is the same as for the graphic display. See
“Setting for the Waveform to be Edited” for a description of the graphic display.

Creating Standard Waveform Data. Use this item to create waveform data in the
area between the designated vertical bar cursors.
The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Standard
Waveform item.


  "



 ! "


  
# 

"

Pattern Types. Use this item to select the waveform to be created. You can choose
from the following three pattern options:

Count Up. Data is created sequentially, increasing from the initial value
designated with Min to the maximum value designated with Max. When the
maximum value is exceeded, the waveform will return to the initial value
and begin counting up again. In the example shown in Figure 3 -78, the
waveform point size is 4096, Step has been set to 1, and the Min and Max
values have been set to 0 and 4095, respectively.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć101

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć78: Count Up Pattern Display

The following parameters can be set:

Step The number of points for each data item. This value can be
set to 1 – 10.
Max The maximum value for the data. This value can be set
anywhere between (Min value + 1) and 4095.
Min The minimum value for the data. This value can be set
anywhere between 0 and (Max value – 1).

Count Down. Data is created sequentially, decreasing from the initial value
designated for Max to the minimum value designated for Min. When the
minimum value is exceeded, the value returns to the maximum value and
countdown begins again. The values for Step, Max and Min can be set in
the same manner as with Count Up.

Gray Code. A data pattern is created in which the difference between
adjacent data is only 1 bit. When the 4096 items of 12-bit data end, the data
repeats from the beginning. In the example shown in Figure 3 -79, the
waveform point size has been set to 4096 and Step has been set to 1. Only
the Step parameter is set for the Gray Code pattern option.

3 Ć102 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć79: Gray Code Pattern Display

Example of Waveform Data Creation. In the following operation, you will replace
the data between the vertical bar cursors with a Count Up pattern, with the
waveform point size set to 4096.
1. Select Standard Waveform from the bottom menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel. Using the general purpose
knob, move the left and right vertical bar cursors all the way to the left and
right, respectively, so the entire editing area is selected.
3. Select Pattern from the side menu, then select Count Up by turning the
general purpose knob or pressing the Pattern button in the side menu.
4. Select Step from the side menu. Using the numeric keys or the general
purpose knob, set the step to 1.
5. Select Max from the side menu. Using the numeric keys or the general
purpose knob, set the end point for the Count Up pattern to 4095.
6. Select Min from the side menu. Using the numeric keys or the general
purpose knob, set the starting point for the Count Up pattern to 0.
7. Select Execute from the side menu.
The data between the vertical bar cursors will be replaced by the Count Up
pattern that you have designated. Figure 3 -78 shows the Count Up pattern
created with the values used in this example.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć103

EDIT Menu

Editing Waveform Data in Use Operation to edit the waveform data in a variety of ways.
Timing Display
The side menu is made up of 3 pages. To get to the next page of the menu, select
More. The following list shows the names and functions of the items in the side
menu.
Cut Cutting waveforms
Copy to Buffer Copying waveforms
Paste from Buffer Pasting waveforms
Set... Setting the waveform data
Shift... Shifting waveform data
Invert... Inverting waveform data
Copy Line... Copying lines
Exchange Line... Exchanging lines
Logical Function... Applying logical operations to lines
Data Expand... Expanding waveform data
Insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveform data
Shift Register Generator... Pseudo-random pulse generator
Using shift register

Cut, Copy, and Paste Processing Function. Use these functions cut, copy to the
buffer, and paste to any other time or point value within the waveform data area
between the vertical bar cursors. The functions for these items are the same as for
the corresponding items in waveform editor graphic display. See Pages 3 -43
through 3–46.

Setting Waveform Data. Use Set... to designate data for each data line and marker
in the editing area between the designated vertical bar cursors. The following
diagram shows the menu configuration for the Set... item.

Import Line Data /

Clear Pattern
Line 1 Bit
Set High Key Data
4 Bits
Operation ( More 1 of 3 ) Set... Set Low
Go Back 0
Initial Src 1
Set Pattern
User defined 0
Initial Code
Code Config... 1
High/Low
Out [I/O]
Invert/Keep
Cancel
O.K.

3 Ć104 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Setting Data to High/Low. Use Set High and Set Low to set the data lines or
marker in the area designated by the right and left vertical bar cursors to either
High or Low.
1. Select Set... from the side menu displayed.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.
3. Using the general purpose knob, move the vertical bar cursors to designate
the area for the High or Low state.
4. Select Line from the sub-menu. Using the general purpose knob, select the
data line (DATA 11 – DATA 0) or the marker (MARKER) that you want to
set to High or Low.
5. Select Set High or Set Low to set the state between the vertical bar cursors
for the selected line.
Set High Sets the state to High
Set Low Sets the state to Low
Figure 3 -80 shows an example in which the state of the DATA 5 line
between the vertical bar cursors has been set to Low.

Figure 3 Ć80: Setting Waveform Data to High/Low

6. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The system moves from the
Set... sub-menu to the previous side menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć105

EDIT Menu

Setting Pattern Data Use Set Pattern to designate pattern data for the part of a data line or marker
between the designated vertical bar cursors. Figure 3 -81 shows the pattern data
menu that appears when you select Set Pattern from the sub-menu.

Figure 3 Ć81: Pattern Data Setting Menu

When the designated pattern is shorter than the area between the vertical bar
cursors, the pattern data is repeated. You can create a variety of bit strings for the
same pattern data by selecting Code in the menu.
Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the items needed for
setting the pattern data. The following items can be selected; use the general
purpose knob to set the desired value.
Cursor Position (sets the position of the cursor)
Point/Step (sets the number of points per step)
Code (used to select the data code)

Entering Pattern Data and Pattern Length. To enter the pattern data, press the
CURSOR button on the front panel and select Cursor Position. A knob icon
will appear to the left of the Cursor Position area. The value next to “Cursor
Position” in the menu indicates the current position of the cursor.

Now you can use the numeric keys to enter the pattern data. Any value up to
32,768 bits can be entered for pattern data. However, only 40 bits can be
displayed on the screen at one time; use the general purpose knob to scroll

3 Ć106 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

through the rest of the data. The inverted display area in the Pattern Length
indicates the portion of the pattern data currently being displayed on the screen.
Pattern Length indicates the length of the pattern data that has been entered.
This value will increase each time more pattern data is entered.

Changing the Data Bits. When entering pattern data, you can enter data either 1
bit at a time (for each keystroke) or 4 bits at a time, depending on the setting for
Key Data in the side menu.
When Key Data is set to 1 Bit, the 0 key has a value of 0 and the other numeric
keys have a value of 1, meaning that 1-bit data is inserted each time one of these
keys is pressed. In the figure shown below, numeric key values of 0, 1, 0 and 1
have been entered in that order.

When Key Data is set to 4 Bits, a hexadecimal number (4-bit data) is entered
each time one of the numeric keys is pressed. In the figure shown below,
numeric key values of 0, 1 and 2 have been entered in that order.

Point/Step. Point/Step is used to set how many points make up each item of
pattern data. The data after Code conversion will be one item of pattern data. For
example, when NRZ is selected for Code and Point/Step is set to 2, each pattern
will consist of 2 points.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć107

EDIT Menu

To set the point size for each item of pattern data, press the CURSOR button on
the front panel and then select Point/Step. A knob icon will appear to the left of
the Point/Step area.

Pattern Code.Code is used to select the coding system used when the pattern
strings are output. Depending on the designated length of the area between the
vertical bar cursors, the code may be cut off in the middle.
To select the code, use the following procedure:
1. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel and select Code. A knob icon
will appear in the upper left-hand corner of the Code area.

2. Using the general purpose knob, select the desired code from the choices
listed. The following 8 code options are available:
NRZ
NRZI
RZ
MFM
BI-PHASE
f/2f
1-7 RLL
2-7 RLL
user defined
The “user defined” code allows the user to create a custom conversion table.
See “User defined Code Conversion” later in this section. For a description
of the other codes, see “Pattern Codes” in Appendix F.

Sample Pattern Data Setting. In the following example, pattern data (at DATA 5;
Point/Step: 2, Code: NRZI) will be created in the area between the vertical bar
cursors.
1. Select Set... from the side menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.

3 Ć108 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

3. Using the general purpose knob, move the vertical bar cursors to define the
area in which the pattern will be set. In this example, we will set the left
vertical bar cursor to 250 and the right vertical bar cursor to 750.
4. Select Line from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob, select
DATA5 for which you want to set the pattern.
5. Select Set Pattern from the sub-menu.
6. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Cursor Position.
7. Press the Key Data button in the sub-menu to select 4 Bits.
8. Press 1, 2 in that order.

9. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Point/Step.

10. Using the general purpose knob, set Point/Step to 2.

11. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Code.
12. Using the general purpose knob, select NRZI.

13. Select O.K. from the sub-menu. The pattern that you have set in the
preceding steps will appear between the vertical bar cursors. See Fig-
ure 3 -82.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć109

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć82: Setting Pattern Data

User defined Code Config... . Users can define their own conversion tables for
code conversion. This function enables RLL codes, etc. to be freely defined. For
sample codes, see “Pattern Codes” in Appendix F. Conversion tables defined
with this menu item are protected by the backup battery, so they are preserved
even after the power is turned off. To reset this item to the factory default
(NRZ), select Reset to Factory in the UTILITY menu.
The following process is used to create a user-defined conversion table.
1. Perform steps 1 through 5 of the sample process for defining pattern data.
2. Select User defined Code Config... from the side menu. See Figure 3 -83.

3 Ć110 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć83: User defined Code Conversion Menu

3. Define the codes as desired (see “Basic Operations” on the following).

4. Select Go Back to return to the Set Pattern menu.
5. Define the pattern data, using the same procedure as in steps 6 – 10 of the
sample process for defining pattern data.
6. Press the CURSOR button to select Code menu item. A knob icon will
appear in the upper left side of the code selection menu.
7. Turn the general purpose knob to select user defined.
8. Press O.K. in the sub-menu to execute code conversion. The result will be
inserted between the cursors on the data line defined in Step 1.

Moving the Cursor. To move the cursor, turn the general purpose knob. The cursor
can be moved throughout the area where data has already been defined, plus one
more space. From the Source Data Pattern item, the cursor moves to the
Converted Code item. When the cursor reaches the last data item, it will return
to the beginning. The cursor can also be moved using the left and right arrow
buttons.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć111

EDIT Menu

Inserting a Blank Line. Pressing the ENTER key causes a blank line to be inserted
above the data item marked by the cursor.


. Blank lines cannot be inserted if there are more than two consecutive
blank lines or if there are more than 16 lines in all.

Defining Data. Move the cursor to the desired location to enter a value on the
numeric keys. The value at that location will be replaced by the one you have
entered. Enterable values will vary depending on the location of the cursor:
In the Source Data Pattern area, only numeric keys 0 through 7 are
operational.
In the Converted Code area, only numeric keys 0 through 3 are operational.

Deleting Data. Pressing the delete key will delete the data indicated by the cursor.
When a data item is deleted, all of the subsequent data items will move forward
one space. If there is no data at the cursor position, the cursor will move one
position to the left.

Deleting a Line. When all of the data on the line indicated by the cursor has been
deleted, that line will also be deleted and all subsequent data will move up one
line.

Setting Items. The Source Data Pattern is used to write the pattern for input
data.
0 Data at that position is LOW
1 Data at that position is HIGH
2 The preceding Converted Code data item is 0
3 The preceding Converted Code data item is 1
4 The preceding Source Data Pattern data item is 0
5 The preceding Source Data Pattern data item is 1
6 The following Source Data Pattern data item is 0
7 The following Source Data Pattern data item is 1

2, 3, 4 and 5 can only be written at the beginning of Source Data Pattern

6 and 7 cannot be written at the beginning of Source Data Pattern

Only the data for the immediately preceding time can be referenced with 2,
3, 4 and 5

6 and 7 are effective as long as the pattern can be written

3 Ć112 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

After the first time 6 and 7 appear, 0 will be treated as 6 and 1 will be treated
as 7

6 and 7 read the input data and search for the same pattern. When the same
pattern has been detected, the portion of the data that has been read is
returned to its original status and then the next pattern is analyzed.

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 can be used together
Converted Code writes the output data pattern
0 Sets the output data to LOW
1 Sets the output data to HIGH
2 Turns the inverse of the preceding Converted Code data item into
output data
3 Turns the inverse of the preceding Source Data Pattern data item
into output data
Initial Source is the default value for the source pattern. Affects output data
when the Source Data Pattern is 4 and 5 and when 3 is used for Converted
Code.
Initial Code is the default value for the output pattern. Affects output data
when the Source Data Pattern is 2 and 3; when 2 is used for Converted
Code; and when Out [1/0] is set to Invert/Keep.
Out/[1/O] determines the handling of 1/0 for data converted using Con-
verted Code.
High/Low 1: data HIGH 0: data LOW
Invert/Keep 1: output is inverted 0: data is output as is

AWG2021 User Manual 


EDIT Menu

Sample Pattern Conversion. When Source Data Pattern is unaffected by other

conditions
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] High/Low

Source Data Pattern Converted Code

 
 
 
 

In the case of the above conversion, the data will be as follows:

       
 
!               
"            
!           


. 3 of 30 in pattern 11 starting from position 0 is the inverse of the 0 in the

Source Data Pattern at position –1.
2 of 20 in pattern 10 starting from position 4 is the inverse of result 1 at position
3.
2 of 20 in pattern 10 starting from position 6 is the inverse of result 0 at position
5.

When Out[1/0] is set to Invert/Keep for the same table, the data will be as
follows:

!               
"            
"  "!           
!           

3 Ć114 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

When Source Data Pattern is affected by other conditions

If 4 and 5 are used:
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] High/Low

Source Data Pattern Converted Code

 
 
 
 


       

          
          

If 6 and 7 are used (1):

Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] High/Low

Source Data Pattern Converted Code

 
 
 
 

In the case of the above conversion, the data will be as follows:


       

          
         

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć115

EDIT Menu

If 6 and 7 are used (2):

Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] High/Low

Source Data Pattern Converted Code

 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 

In the case of the above conversion, the data will be as follows:


       

          
           

Importing Waveform or Marker Data as Pattern Data. Import Line Data is used to
import the selected bit data as pattern data. It can be used to perform code
conversion even for waveform data.
The commands in the Import Line Data menu will change depending on
whether or not there is data in the pattern data area. When there is no data, the
Import Line Data command will appear in the sub-menu. When data has been
entered, this command will change to Clear Pattern.
1. Select Set... from the side menu.
2. Select the data to be imported and then use the cursors to specify the
required range.
3. Select Set Pattern from the sub-menu.
4. If pattern data exists, press Clear Pattern button in the sub-menu to clear
the existing data.
5. Select Import Line Data from the sub-menu. The selected bit data will be
read into the pattern data input area.

3 Ć116 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Clear Pattern. When data has been entered in the pattern data input area, the
Import Line Data item in the sub-menu will change to Clear Pattern. Pressing
the Clear Pattern button will delete all pattern data.

Shifting Waveform Data Use the shift function to shift the data between the designated vertical bar cursors
in individual data lines or markers by the specified points or time. The following
diagram shows the menu configuration for the Shift... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ



       

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 


1. Move the vertical bar cursors to define the part of the waveform data to be
shifted, then select Shift... from the second page of the side menu (More 2
of 3).
2. Select Line from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob, select the
data line (DATA 11 – DATA 0) or marker (MARKER1 or MARKER2) on
which the data is to be shifted.
3. Select Value from the sub-menu. Using the general purpose knob or the
numeric keys, input the shift point value.
Value sets the amount of the shift in points or time. The range for the shift
value is ± (designated waveform point size). To shift the data between the
vertical bar cursors to the right, enter a positive value; points that shift out
beyond the right cursor will be shifted in from the left. To shift the data to
the left, enter a negative number; points that shift out beyond the left cursor
will be shifted in from the right.
4. Select Execute from the side menu. The waveform data is shifted with the
specified conditions. Figure 3 -84 shows the screen before and after the data
on line DATA 5 between the vertical bar cursors is shifted 30 points to the
right.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć117

EDIT Menu

 

Figure 3 Ć84: Shifting Waveform Data

5. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The system returns from the
Shift... sub-menu to the previous side menu.

Inverting Waveform Data Use Invert... to invert each data line or marker between the designated vertical
bar cursors. The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the
Invert... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
      

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

 


1. Move the vertical bar cursors to define the section of the data to be inverted.
Then select Invert... from the second page of the side menu (More 2 of 3).
2. Select Line from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob, select the
data line or marker whose state is to be inverted.
3. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The state is inverted with the specified
conditions. Figure 3 -85 shows the screen before and after the data between
the vertical bar cursors on line DATA 5 is inverted.

3 Ć118 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

 

Figure 3 Ć85: Inverting Waveform Data State

4. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The system returns from the
Invert... sub-menu to the previous side menu.

Copying LInes Use Copy line... to copy the waveform data between the designated vertical bar
cursors from one data line to another data line. Copy processing replaces the
previous value of the copy destination line with the data of the copy source. The
following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Copy Line... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
        



ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 


1. Move the vertical bar cursors to define the section of the data to be copied.
Then select Copy Line... from the second page of the side menu (More 2 of
3).
2. Select Source from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob, select
the copy source data line or marker.
Source selects the waveform data copy source. Data line DATA 11 – DATA
0 or marker (MARKER) can be selected.
3. Select Destination from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob,
select the copy destination data line or marker.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć119

EDIT Menu

Destination selects the destination to which the waveform data selected with
Source will be copied. Data line DATA 11 – DATA 0 or marker (MARK-
ER) can be selected as the copy destination. From the copy source to the
copy destination is indicated with an arrow.
4. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The data is copied with the specified
conditions. Figure 3 -86 shows the screen before and after the section of
waveform data between the vertical bar cursors on line DATA 0 is copied to
line DATA 11.

 

Figure 3 Ć86: Copying Lines

5. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The system returns from the
Copy Line... sub-menu to the previous side menu.

Exchanging LInes Use Exchange Line... to take the data between the designated vertical bar
cursors on one line and interchange it with the data on another line. The
following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Exchange Line... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ



ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
      
 
 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ



1. Move the vertical bar cursors to define the section of the data to be ex-
changed. Then select Exchange Line... from the second page of the side
menu (More 2 of 3).

3 Ć120 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

2. Select Source from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob, select
one of the data lines or marker for data interchange.
3. Select Destination from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob,
select the other data line or marker for data interchange.
4. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The data will be exchanged as desig-
nated. Figure 3 -87 shows the screen before and after the data on line DATA
0 is exchanged with the data on line DATA 11.




Figure 3 Ć87: Exchanging Lines

5. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The system returns from the
Exchange Line... sub-menu to the previous side menu.

Applying Logical Use Logical Function... to apply a logical operation to the data between the
Operations to Lines vertical bar cursors on one data line with the data on another line and replace the
data on the designated line with the result. The following diagram shows the
menu configuration for the Logical Function... item.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć121

EDIT Menu

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ "



ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 !!
!       

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

"!
" $

 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
%
#"! %

Types of Logical Operation. You can choose from the following six logical
operation options in the Func Type sub-menu:
AND
NAND
OR
NOR
EX-OR
EX-NOR
See “Logical Operation” in Appendix F for a description of each of these
operations.
1. Move the vertical bar cursors to define the section of the data to which a
logical operation is applied. Then select Logical Function... from the third
page of the side menu (More 3 of 3).
2. Select Source from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob, select
the first data line or marker for logical operation.
3. Select Destination from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob,
select the other data line or marker for logical operation. The calculated
result will replace the data line or marker designated with Destination.
4. Select Execute from the sub-menu. Logical operation will be performed for
the selected lines.
5. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The system returns from the
Logical Function... sub-menu to the previous side menu.

Expanding Waveform Data Use Data Expand... to expand the section between the designated vertical bar
cursors for all of the data lines and marker. The following diagram shows the
menu configuration for the Data Expand... item.

3 Ć122 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ



ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
          


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1. Move the vertical bar cursors to define the section of the data to be expand-
ed. Then select Data Expand... from the third page of the side menu (More
3 of 3).
2. Select Factor from the sub-menu.
Factor is used to set the degree of expansion to any value between 2x and
10x.
3. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, set the degree of
expansion.
4. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The section of the waveform between the
vertical bar cursors will be expanded to the designated degree, and the
waveform point size will increase accordingly. Figure 3 -88 shows the screen
before and after the data between the vertical bar cursors is expanded by a
factor of 2.

 

Figure 3 Ć88: Expanding Waveform Data

5. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The system returns from the
Data Expand... sub-menu to the previous side menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć123

EDIT Menu

Inserting Other Waveform Use Insert Other Waveform to insert data from another waveform at a
Data designated point in the waveform being edited. This item is located on the third
page(More 3 of 3) of the side menu. The functions of this item are the same as
for the Insert Other Waveform item for the graphic display of the waveform
editor. See Page 3 -60.

PseudoĆRandom Pulse Use Shift Register Generator... to set a pseudo-random pulse pattern using a
Generator shift register for the data between the designated vertical bar cursors on a data
line or marker. The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the
Shift Register Generator... item.

Line Clear All Taps

Set Maximal
Register Linear Taps
Config... Set All Regs
Cancel
O.K.
0
Shift Register Initial Src
Operation ( More 3 of 3 ) 1
Generator...
User defined 0
Initial Code
Code Config... 1
Out [I/O] High/Low
Invert/Keep
Go Back
Execute

Register Configuration. The pseudo-random pulse generator (with shift register)

consists of 2 to 32 registers together with the register output for each and the tap
of the feedback loop that performs the EX-OR operation. Selecting Register
Config... from the sub-menu enables you to set the pattern for the shift register
generator. Figure 3 -89 shows the menu used to set the shift register.

Figure 3 Ć89: Shift Register Configuration Menu

3 Ć124 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Use the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the items needed for the
shift register. The following items can be selected; the general purpose knob is
used to set the desired value for each item.
Register Length (sets the length of the register)
Register Position (sets the position of the cursor)
Point/Step (sets the number of points per step)
Code (used to select the data code)

Setting the Register Length. The register length may be set to any value between
2 and 32. The register length is displayed at the top of the shift register configu-
ration menu, as shown below. In this example, the shift register is made up of 32
items.

Entering the Register Value and Setting Taps. To enter the register value and set
taps, press the CURSOR button on the front panel and select Register Position.
A knob icon will be displayed to the left of the Register Position area. Turn the
general purpose knob to move the cursor. The current location of the cursor is
shown beside the Register Position item.



Figure 3 Ć90: Register Values and Taps

The numeric keys can now be used to enter the register value at the position of
the cursor.
Press 0 to set the register value to 0
Press 1 to set the register value to 1
Pressing the VALUE button on the front panel toggles the tap between on and
off.

Clearing All Taps. Use Clear All Taps in the sub-menu to delete all taps that
have been set.

Setting the Maximum Length Code Series for Taps. Set Maximal Linear
Taps in the sub-menu allows you to easily create M series (maximum length

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć125

EDIT Menu

code series) bit strings. M series bit strings are combined with several
different kinds of tap arrangements. The tap arrangement will change each
time the Set Maximal Linear Taps button is pressed.

Setting Register Values. Use Set All Regs in the sub-menu to set all register
values to 1.
Sample Settings for Register Values and Taps
Set simply set register and tap values as follows:
Register Length: 3
Register Value: 101
Use Set Maximal Linear Taps to set taps
Figure 3 -91 shows the output for the above settings. This output will be the
maximum length code series.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 
 

  

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ         

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Figure 3 Ć91: Sample Settings for Register Values and Taps

Point/Step. Point/Step is used to set how many points make up each data bit. The
data after Code conversion will be one item of bit data. For example, when
NRZI is selected for Code and Point/Step is set to 2, each data bit will consist
of 4 points.

Code. This command selects the code system used when data pattern strings are
output. The user defined code enables you to define a custom conversion table.
For a detailed description of each code, see “Pattern Codes” in Appendix F.

User defined Code Config... .The following process is used to execute a user-de-
fined code conversion.

3 Ć126 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

1. Select Shift Register Generator... from the side menu.

2. Select User defined Code Config... from the sub menu.
3. Define the codes as desired. For the basic operations used when defining
codes, see “User defined Code Config...” on Page 3 -110.
4. Select Go Back to return to the Shift Register Generator... menu.
5. Select Register Config... from the side menu.
6. Set the values for Register Length and Point/Step as well as the register
value and tap.
7. Press the CURSOR button to select Code menu item. A knob icon will
appear in the upper left side of the Code selection menu.
8. Turn the general purpose knob to select user defined.
9. Press O.K. in the sub-menu to confirm the settings. The Shift Register
Generator... menu will automatically reappear.
10. Using the general purpose knob, define the data line and area where the
pattern will be inserted.
11. Press Execute in the sub-menu. The result will be inserted between the
cursors on the data line selected in the previous step.

Creating the M Series PseudoĆRandom Signal. An M series pseudo-random signal

has a length of 2n-1 assuming the number of levels for the shift register is n. In
this example, we will create an M series pseudo-random signal of 215-1 bits (15
levels) with 1 point for each step. This signal is included on the Sample
Waveform Library Disk that came with the AWG2021.
1. Select Setting from the bottom menu.
2. Select Waveform Points from the side menu. Then set the waveform point
size to 32,767 using the numeric keys. The waveform point size needed to
display all the bits of the pseudo-random signal is given by the following
formula:
(Value for Point/Step) × (2n-1)=1 × (215-1)=32,767
3. Select Shift Register Generator... from the third page of the side menu
(More 3 of 3).
4. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel.
5. Using the general purpose knob, move the vertical bar cursors to designate
the area to which pseudo-random signals are inserted. In this example, we
will set the left cursor to point 0 and the right cursor to point 32,766.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć127

EDIT Menu

6. Select Line from the sub-menu. Turning the general purpose knob, select
DATA11 for which you want to set the pattern.
7. Select Register Config... from the sub-menu.
8. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Register Length.
9. Using the general purpose knob, set the register length to 15.

10. Select Clear All Taps in the sub-menu to delete all taps.
11. Select Set All Regs in the sub-menu to set all registers to 1.
12. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Register Position.
13. Using the general purpose knob, set the Register Position to 13.
14. Press the VALUE button on the front panel to set the tap.

15. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Point/Step.
16. Using the general purpose knob, set Point/Step to 1.

17. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select Code.
18. Using the general purpose knob, select NRZ.

19. Select O.K. from the sub-menu.

20. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The timing display shown below will
appear.

21. Select Go Back from the sub-menu.

3 Ć128 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Zooming Waveforms. The function for this item is the same as for the Zoom item
in waveform editor graphic display. See Page 3 -92.

Table Display
To show the table display for the waveform editor using the View type.... item in
the Setting menu:
1. Select Setting from the bottom menu.
2. Select View type... from the side menu.
Three items will be displayed in the sub-menu: Graphic, Timing and Table.
3. Select Table from the sub-menu.
The table display of the waveform editor will appear. See Figure 3 -92.

Figure 3 Ć92: Table Display

4. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The system moves to the previous
Setting side menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć129

EDIT Menu

Table Display Menu Figure 3 -93 shows the menu configuration for the table display.
Structure
Bottom Menu Side Menu SubĆMenu

Waveform1
Waveform2 *1
Select/Open
Waveform3 *1
Another Waveform
Cut
Copy to Buffer
Operation
Paste from Buffer
Insert Other Waveform

Waveform Points
Graphic
View type... Timing
Table

Point
Waveform Editor Horiz. Unit
Time
Setting Clock *2
Waveformx
Cursor Link to... *1 Waveformxx
Link Off

Binary
Radix... Hexadecimal
Real
Off
Grid
On
Undo

Write and Close

Close/Write Close without Writing
Write
*1 This item appears when two or more waveforms are being edited simultaneously with Another Waveform
in the side menu (under Select/Open in the bottom menu).

*2 This item appears when Time has been selected for Horiz. Unit in the side menu (under Setting in the
bottom menu).

Figure 3 Ć93: Waveform Editor Table Display Menu Structure

3 Ć130 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page
on which you can find a description of that function.

Table 3Ć5: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Select /Open Opening and selecting the editing area 3 Ć15
Operation Editing waveforms in timing display 3 Ć135
Cut Cutting waveforms 3 Ć43,
3, 3 Ć136
36
Copy to Buffer Copying waveforms 3 Ć44,
44 3 Ć136
136
Paste from Buffer Pastingg waveforms 3 Ć44,, 3 Ć136
Insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveform data 3 Ć60,
60 3 Ć136
136
Setting Settings for the waveform to be edited 3 Ć28, 3 Ć133
Waveform Points... Setting waveform point count 3 Ć29
View type... Selecting the waveform data display 3 Ć29
format
Horiz. Unit Setting horizontal axis units 3 Ć31
Clock Setting clock frequency 3 Ć32
Cursor Link to... Linking the vertical bar cursors 3 Ć34
Radix... Setting a cardinal number 3 Ć133
Grid Displaying a grid in the editing area 3 Ć35
Undo Canceling function execution 3 Ć2
Close/Write Saving files and exiting the editor 3 Ć20

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć131

EDIT Menu

Table Display Screen Figure 3 -94 shows the table display screen. This section will describe each
portion of the screen; however, descriptions of areas that are identical to the
graphic display will be omitted. See “Graphic Display Screen” for a description
of the graphic display.

1 2 3 4 5

9
7

10

Figure 3 Ć94: Table Display Screen

(1) U       Value   

   
 
ąąValue      U         
                

                

(2) ∆      
       
 
(3) Data                
      
   
       
         
  
     

  
  
             
   
 MSB
(4) Horizontal Scroll                
Indicator                
         
   

3 Ć132 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

(5) L #    "! Value   $   ! 

ąąValue     ! L   !     #
 !
(6) Upper Line Cursor      $   $  !  ! 
 "
(7) MARKER (1,2) $ $      
      #"
  
(8) Lower Line Cursor   !     [ ]   "
(9) Point Index or Time #  #"     !    #  
Setting       !
(10) Button Operations   # #    !     
!

  VALUE !      ! 

#   "  $ !   ! $  
!  !      # !  z!
"   !   

  CURSOR !      !  

"

Settings for the Waveform Before waveform data is created, you must use the Setting item in the side menu
to be Edited to set the environment for editing. Apart from the cardinal number settings, the
procedure for setting values is the same as for the graphic display. See “Setting
for the Waveform to be Edited” for a description of the graphic display.

Setting a Cardinal Number. Use Radix... to set a cardinal number to display

waveform data in a table format. Waveform data can be displayed in numeric
form as Binary, Hexadecimal or Real numbers.
When Radix... is selected, the following items appear in the sub-menu:
Binary
Hexadecimal
Real
Go Back
The description of these cardinal numbers is given below.
Binary 12-bit waveform data is created using the 0 or 1 numeric
keys.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć133

EDIT Menu

Hexadecimal Waveform data is created using the 0–9 and A–F numeric
keys. When the cardinal numbers are changed to Hexadeci-
mal, numeric keys and unit keys are allocated to A–F.
Real The data is input, as with regular number input, by pressing
numeric keys, then pressing the ENTER key to enter the
number. Any real number (Real), up to the vertical axis full
scale, can be entered in the graphic display.
The markers are displayed in binary notation even when the cardinal numbers are
set to Hexadecimal or Real.
1. Select Setting from the bottom menu.
2. Select Radix... from the second page of the side menu (More 2 of 2).
3. Select the desired cardinal number (Binary, Hexadecimal or Real) from the
sub-menu. Figure 3 -95 shows how the same waveform data is displayed in
each of the cardinal numbers.

Figure 3 Ć95: Numeric Displays for Waveform Data

4. Select Go Back from the current sub-menu. The system returns from the
Binary... sub-menu to the previous side menu.

3 Ć134 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Editing Waveform Data Waveform data can be edited at the waveform point, regardless of what item is
selected in the bottom menu.
Move the line cursor to the data point to be edited.
1. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to move the line cursor.
2. When the CURSOR button is pressed, the active line cursor is toggled
between Upper and Lower.
3. Use the general purpose knob to move the active line cursor to the time or
point value to be edited.
Enter the waveform data
4. Press the VALUE button on the front panel to input the waveform data with
the set cardinal number.
Within the inverted display active line cursor is a block cursor. The data in
the block cursor can be changed.
5. Use the z and ! buttons on the front panel to move the block cursor to the
data to be changed.
When the block cursor is at the left end of the DATA, pressing the z button
moves the block cursor to MARKER for the previous waveform point or
time value. When the block cursor is at the MARKER, pressing the !
button moves the block cursor to the left and of the DATA for the subse-
quent waveform point or time value.
6. Data can be input with the numeric keys. Pressing numeric or character keys
unrelated to the cardinal number you have designated will have no effect on
the data.
When a number or character is input, the block cursor moves to the next
character to the right.

Editing Waveform Data in Use Operation to edit waveform data for the area between the upper and lower
Table Display line cursors.
The following list shows the names and functions of the items in the side menu.
Cut Cutting waveforms
Copy to Buffer Copying waveforms
Paste from Buffer Pasting waveforms
Insert Other Waveform Inserting other waveform data

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć135

EDIT Menu

Cut, Copy, and Paste Use these functions cut, copy to the buffer, and paste to any other time or point
Processing Function value within the waveform data area between the upper and lower line cursors.
The functions for these items are the same as for the corresponding items in
waveform editor graphic display. See Page 3 -43 through 3–46.

Inserting Other Waveform Data. Use Insert Other Waveform to insert data from
another waveform at a designated point in the waveform being edited. The
functions of this item are the same as for the Insert Other Waveform item for
the graphic display of the waveform editor. See Page 3 -60.

3 Ć136 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Equation Editor
Use the equation editor to edit files with the extension of .EQU. Equation file
data takes the form of mathematical equations. An equation program file can
have up to 100 lines. An equation file is compiled to create a waveform file and
to output the waveform.
Figure 3 -96 shows an example of a waveform obtained by compiling the data
from an equation file and its equation.




 


Figure 3 Ć96: Example of Equation File Data and Resulting Waveform

Entering the Equation 1. Press the EDIT button in the MENU column. The initial EDIT menu will
Editor appear.
2. Select Edit or New Equation from the side menu.
Edit Used to select and edit an existing equation file
(.EQU)
New Equation Used to create a new equation file
The equation editor screen will appear.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć137

EDIT Menu

Saving Files and Exiting Use Exit/Write in the bottom menu to save the file to the internal memory of the
the Editor AWG2021 and exit from the editor depending on the selected side menu item.
The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the equation editor as
for the waveform editor. See “Saving Files and Exiting the Editor” in the section
on the waveform editor.
When you compile the equation then exit the equation editor, the waveform file
and the equation file are saved in internal memory with the same name but
different extension.


. If there is already a waveform file in internal memory with the name the
compiled waveform file will be given, a message is displayed asking if you are
sure you want to overwrite the old file. Answer either Cancel or O.K.

Equation Editor Menu The Equation Editor menu has the structure shown in Figure 3 -97.
Structure
!!
" 
"

"! 

& ! "

!  !  "

 

 ! ! "!

"! ! !! # !





!  %!

%!! %! $!"! !

!

*1 This item appears when Operation in the bottom menu has been selected.

Figure 3 Ć97: Equation Editor Menu Structure

3 Ć138 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page
on which you can find a description of that function.

Table 3Ć6: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Operation Editing functions 3 Ć156
Cut Cutting a line 3 Ć156
Copy to Buffer Copying a line 3 Ć156
156
Paste from Buffer Pasting a line 3 Ć156
Word Table Changing the component menu
men 3 Ć144
144
Insert Other Waveform Inserting other equation file 3 Ć157
Setting Settings for the waveform to be edited 3-149
Waveform Points Setting waveform point count 3 Ć157
Compile Compiling equations into waveform data 3 Ć159
Undo Canceling function execution 3 Ć2
Exit/Write Saving files and exiting the editor 3 Ć20, 3 Ć138

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć139

EDIT Menu

Equation Editor Menu Figure 3 -98 shows the general equation editor display. A description for each
Display callout follows.

Figure 3 Ć98: Equation Editor CRT Display

(1) File Name        

        

       ********.EQU
(2) Line     
         
       
(3) Equation List            
              
              
(4) Component Menu                 
              
         
     
               

                
 
Word Table   Operation  
    

3 Ć140 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

(5) Button Operation 


    
  
  


    CURSOR      
    
  
    

  

  VALUE  ENTER       

 
     
 
   

        VALUE
 ENTER 

      
 

  VALUE  ENTER     

      
 

    CURSOR     

 
  
     
  

  

        

 

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć141

EDIT Menu

Creating and Editing Select Operation in the bottom menu to create or edit an equation file. When
Equation Files this item is selected, the time range can be designated with the component menu
and the equation can be created. Figure 3 -99 shows a menu with Operation in
the bottom menu selected.

Figure 3 Ć99: Menu With Operation Selected

Specifying the Time Domain. The equation must specify the time domain. If the
time domain is not defined, this is an error. The time domain is specified with
range().
When making a new equation file, range(0, is input in the first line of equation.
Next, the time is specified. This setting is valid until the next range( item is
specified. With the first range() specification, any number of lines of equation
can be input. Text written after the range() on the same line is invalid. Here is
the format for the range( item.
range( Equation starting time, Equation ending time )

3 Ć142 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Specification of subsequent time ranges use the component menu range( item.
The clock frequency is obtained from the total time (period) set with range() and
the waveform point count set with Setting, thus:

Waveform point count

Clock frequency

Equation period

In this example, you will create a sine wave with a period of 1ms, using the
following equation:
range(0,1ms) Time range
sin(2*pi*x) Equation
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. After range(0, in the equation list use the numeric keys and the unit keys to
enter 1, ms. The expression now reads range(0,1ms.
3. Using the general purpose knob, select ) from the component menu.
4. Press VALUE or ENTER on the front panel. The ) that you selected in the
component menu will be inserted in front of the position of the cursor (I) , in
the inverted line cursor in the equation list. The expression now reads
range(0,1ms).
5. Press the
key. The inverted line cursor will move to the next line.
6. Using the general purpose knob, select sin( from the component menu.
7. Press VALUE or ENTER on the front panel. The expression sin( will
appear on the screen.
8. Using the numeric keys, enter 2. The expression now reads sin(2.
9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter *, pi, *, x, and ). The expression now reads
sin(2*pi*x).

Using the Front Panel Buttons in Editing. The functions of the CURSOR,
VALUE, and ENTER button affect the operation of the general purpose knob
and the cursor. Here are details on these functions.

CURSOR. When you press the CURSOR button, you can move the
inverted line cursor and the cursor (I) with the general purpose knob. Each
time you press the CURSOR button, the cursor that can be moved with the
general purpose knob toggles between the inverted line cursor and the cursor.
While the inverted line cursor can be moved with the general purpose knob,
you can also move the inverted line cursor directly to the desired line by
using the numeric keys to enter the desired line number.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć143

EDIT Menu

VALUE/ENTER buttons. After the CURSOR button has been pressed,

pressing the VALUE or ENTER button makes it possible to select an item
from the component menu. In this state, pressing the VALUE or ENTER
button again inserts the items selected from the component menu into the
equation list. At this time, input with the numeric keys is also possible.
The cursor (I) can also be moved using the z and ! keys on the front panel.

Decimal Point. When Option 09 is installed, all internal calculations use 32-bit
floating point precision (IEEE 754 compatible). If Option 09 is not installed,
32-bit fixed precision is used when precision is not required (minimum unit
15 ms or greater). When precision is required, 32-bit floating point precision
(IEEE 754 compatible) is used.
For fast and highly precise calculations, we recommend that Option 09 be
installed.

Component Menu. The component menu contains the items used to set the time
range as well as functions, operators, variables, constants, syntax items and
characters. You can use these items to create equations and enter comments.
To display the other page of the menu, press Word Table in the side menu under
Operation. Figure 3 -100 shows the two pages of the components menu.

Figure 3 Ć100: Component Menu

Syntax Items. These are parentheses – ( and ) – for specifying the order of
operations. Each opening (left) parenthesis must be paired with a closing

3 Ć144 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

(right) parenthesis. When there are two arguments – for example, range,
max, min – they are separated with a ,(comma).

Variables. Here are the variables that can be used in an equation.
t : Time from the head of that range() statement.
x: Variable taking on a value from 0.0 to 1.0 within that range ( )
statement.
v: Variable showing the current value of the waveform data at that
position.

Operators
+, –, *, /
These add, subtract, multiply, or divide the components. The priorities are
the same as usual for these four operators – * and / have priority over + and
–.

^
Expresses exponents. Only integers can be raised to a higher power.
^ has the same priority as * and /. Therefore, parentheses are required to give
priority to multiplication.
Example: pi * (2^3) * x where 2^3 = two raised to the third power.

Comment. Comments are preceded by a number sign (#). When a number
sign is entered, all characters after that until the end of the line are treated as
a comment. All of the items in the component menu can be used in a
comment.

Characters. The characters available in the component menu are the letters of
the alphabet (a–z) and several symbols (%, $, &, @, A and _ ). These are
used in comments.

Other items
pi, e, k, =, ↵
pi
The circumferential ratio.
e
Exponent (for an implied 10)
The range for numbers expressed in this scientific notation is from |5.9e–39|
to |3.4e38|.
Examples: 1e6=1,000,000, 1e–3=0.001

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć145

EDIT Menu

k
The k0–k9 can be specified; these are constants that may be used in
equations. Specifying a new value for the same k# replaces the old value
with the new one. If no constant is defined for k, this value will be automati-
cally set to 0.
=
Equals sign. = is used with k constants.
Example: k0=2*pi
↵
Ends the line for the range or equation; inserting a return (↵) in the middle of
the line partitions it.

Functions. Here are the functions that make up the equation.
sin(, cos(
The arguments for these trigonometric functions are in radians.
Example: range(0,100 ms)
cos(2*pi*x)

Figure 3 Ć101: Trigonometric Function Waveform Expressed With Variable x

3 Ć146 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Example: range(0,100 ms)

sin(2*pi*1e4*t)

Figure 3 Ć102: Trigonometric Function Waveform Expressed With Variable t

exp(, log(, ln(

Exponential function, common log function, natural log function. The log
and ln arguments must be positive.
Example: range(0,50 ms)
1–exp(–5*x)
range(50 ms,100 ms)
exp(–5*x)

Figure 3 Ć103: Equation Using exp(

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć147

EDIT Menu

Example: range(0,100 ms)

log(10*(x+0.1))

Figure 3 Ć104: Equation Using log(

Example: range(0,100 ms)

ln(2*(x+0.2))

Figure 3 Ć105: Equation Using ln(

3 Ć148 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

sqrt(
The square root; the argument must be a positive value.
Example: range(0,100 ms)
sqrt(sin(pi*x))

Figure 3 Ć106: Equation Using sqrt(

abs(
The absolute value.
Example: range(0,100 ms)
abs(sin(2*pi*x))

Figure 3 Ć107: Equation Using abs(

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć149

EDIT Menu

int(
Truncates the fraction to obtain the integer.
Example: range(0,100 ms)
int(5*sin(2*pi*x))/5

Figure 3 Ć108: Equation Using int(

round(
Rounds off the fraction to obtain the integer.
Example: range(0,100 ms)
round(5*sin(2*pi*x))/5

Figure 3 Ć109: Equation Using round(

3 Ć150 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

norm(
Normalizes the range specified with range() and scales the amplitude values
so that the maximum absolute value is 1.0 (i.e. a value of +1.0 or –1.0). The
norm() statement comprises an entire line.
Example: range(0,100 ms)
sin(2*pi*x)+rnd()/10
norm()

Figure 3 Ć110: Equation Using norm(

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć151

EDIT Menu

max(
Takes the larger of two values.
min(
Takes the smaller of two values.
Example: range(0,100 ms)
sin(2*pi*x)
range(0,50 ms)
min(v,0.5)
range(50 ms,100 ms)
max(v,–0.5)

Figure 3 Ć111: Equation Using max( and min(

3 Ć152 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

rnd (integer from 1 to 16,777,215)

When an argument is specified, generates a random number
sequence using that argument as the initial value. If the argument is omitted,
1 is used.
Example: range(0,100 ms)
rnd(2)/3

Figure 3 Ć112: Equation Using rnd(

See “Random (rnd) Function” in Appendix F for a discussion of the

algorithms for rnd functions.
diff(
Differentiates the function over the range specified with range().
Specified with diff(). The diff() comprises an entire line.
Example: range(0,33 ms)
–0.5
range(33 ms,66 ms)
0.5
range(66 ms,100 ms)
–0.5
range(0,100 ms)
diff()
Differentiating the waveform in Figure 3 -113 gives the waveform shown in
Figure 3 -114.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć153

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć113: Waveform Before Calculation

Figure 3 Ć114: Waveform After Differentiation Using diff(

See “Differentiation” in Appendix F for a discussion of the algorithms for

diff functions.

3 Ć154 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

integ(
Integrates the function over the range specified with range().
Specified with integ(). The integ() comprises an entire line. After
integ(), specify normalization (norm()) as necessary.
Example: range(0,33 ms)
–0.5
range(33 ms,66 ms)
0.5
range(66 ms,100 ms)
–0.5
range(0,100 ms)
integ()
norm()
Figure 3 -113 shows the waveform before integration. Figure 3 -115 shows
the waveform after integration.

Figure 3 Ć115: Waveform After Integration Using integ(

See “Integration” in Appendix F for a discussion of the algorithms for integ

functions.
mark (marker1 or marker2)
Sets the marker for the range set with range(). After compiling, there is no
marker display, but the set marker can be verified with the waveform editor.
The mark() statement comprises an entire line. For example, when mark(1)
is input, nothing else can be input on that line.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć155

EDIT Menu

Editing Functions When you select Operation in the bottom menu, the following items appear in
the side menu:
Cut Line
Copy to Buffer
Paste from Buffer
Word Table
Insert Other Equation

Cutting a Line. Use Cut Line to cut out a line in the equation list.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Pressing the front panel CURSOR button twice puts the system into scroll
mode. Pressing the CURSOR button toggles the unit between cursor mode
and scroll mode.

Cursor mode. Cursor moves between items in the equation list, item by
item.

Scroll mode. A inverted line cursor moves through the lines in the
equation list, line by line.
3. Use the general purpose knob to move the displayed inverted line cursor to
the line to be deleted from the created equation list.
4. Select Cut Line from the side menu.
When Cut Line is selected, the line displayed inverted in the equation list is
deleted. The deleted line is placed in the paste buffer. To restore this line to
its original state, select Undo from the bottom menu or Paste from Buffer
from the side menu.

Copying and Pasting a Line. Use the Copy to Buffer and Paste from Buffer
items to copy a line in the equation list and paste it to another line.
1. Use the same procedure as described in Cutting a Line to line up the inverted
display cursor with the line to be copied.
2. Select Copy to Buffer from the side menu.
When Copy to Buffer is selected, the line displayed inverted in the equation
list is placed in the paste buffer. This item has no effect on the CRT display.
3. Use the general purpose knob to specify the position to paste the copied line
with the inverted display cursor. The position for pasting is directly before
the inverted display cursor in the equation list.
4. Select Paste from Buffer from the side menu.

3 Ć156 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Insert Other Equation File. Use Insert Other Equation to select an equation file
from internal memory (see Figure 3 -116). An equation file is inserted from this
list into the equation list.

Figure 3 Ć116: Menu Displayed When Insert Other Equation is Selected

1. Use the same procedure as described in Cutting a Line to line up the inverted
display cursor with the line where the other equation file is to be inserted.
2. Select Insert Other Equation from the side menu.
3. Use the general purpose knob to select the equation file to be inserted.
4. After selecting the file, press the O.K. side menu button to insert the selected
file directly before the inverted cursor within the equation list. Press the
Cancel side menu button to cancel the selection and return the system to the
equation editor.

Setting Waveform Point When Setting is selected from the bottom menu, the number of waveform points
Count for equation file compilation and waveform file creation can be set. Figure
3 -117 shows the menu for when Setting is selected.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć157

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć117: Setting Waveform Point Count

1. Select Setting from the bottom menu.

2. Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the number of
waveform points.
The default value for the number of waveform points is 1000. The waveform
point size can be set to any value between 1 and 32,768. However, due to
limitations in outputting the waveforms from this instrument, the waveform
point is limited to 64 – 32,768 points and to a multiple of 8. When the set value
causes the calculated clock frequency to become greater than 20 MHz, the clock
frequency will be limited to the maximum value of 250 MHz and the following
message will appear, asking you to confirm that this is all right. If it is, select
O.K. from the side menu. In such cases, the waveform period will change.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
The clock calculated (xxxxx Hz)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
is not supported by this instrument.
The waveform will be output

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
with the maximum clock of 2.5e+08Hz.

3 Ć158 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Compiling Equations into Use Compile to convert the assembled equation into waveform data and to
Waveform Data create a waveform file. This waveform file is given the same name as the
equation file it was compiled from.
Here is the procedure for compiling the equation to make a waveform file.
1. Select Compile from the bottom menu. The equation is compiled.
The busy icon is displayed on the status line of the CRT display to show that
the compilation is being processed. Cancel is displayed in the side menu.
Selecting this item cancels the compilation.
2. The equation is converted into waveform data and the waveform is dis-
played. Along with the waveform, the set number of waveform points and
clock frequency are displayed. Figure 3 -118 is an example of the display of
a compiled waveform.

Figure 3 Ć118: Example of Compiled Waveform Display

3. Verify the waveform, then select Continue Operation from the side menu.
The system returns to the equation editor.
If an error is detected, an error message is displayed at the top of the screen
at high intensity and the inverted display cursor is moved to the equation or

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć159

EDIT Menu

time domain with the syntactical error. Correct the error as instructed by the
message, and then compile again.
The compiled waveform file contains the settings for the number of waveform
points (set with Setting) and the clock frequency (obtained from the total time set
with the range item.) Other output parameters are set to the default values.
The compiled waveform also has a vertical axis on which –1.0 is data value 0
and +1.0 is data value 4094. There is no relation between these values and the
actual output voltage.

3 Ć160 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Sequence Editor
Use the sequence editor to edit files with the extension of .SEQ. Sequence files
assemble a number of waveforms or sequence files in order. The file data
contains waveform file names in sequence, their repetition counts, and the
sequence waveform output parameters. Sequences may be up to approximately
4000 lines long.
Figure 3 -119 shows an example of the data in a sequence file and the waveform
display for that data.

Table 3Ć7: Sequence File

File Name Number of Repetitions Waveform



 



 



 

Figure 3 Ć119: Sequence File Data and Sample Waveform Display

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć161

EDIT Menu

Entering the Sequence 1. Press the EDIT button in the MENU column. The initial EDIT menu will
Editor appear.
2. Select Edit or New Sequence from the side menu.
Edit Used to select and edit an existing sequence file
(.SEQ)
New Sequence Used to create a new sequence file
The sequence editor screen will appear.

Saving Files and Exiting Use Exit/Write in the bottom menu to save the file to the internal memory of the
the Editor AWG2021 and exit from the editor depending on the selected side menu item.
The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the equation editor as
for the waveform editor. See “Saving Files and Exiting the Editor” in the section
on the waveform editor.

Sequence Editor Menu The Sequence Editor menu has the structure shown in Figure 3 -120.
Structure
!! "  "

"!


& ! "

!  !  "

$ ! !&


 ! !!  "

" ! $ ##$




!  %!

%!! %! $!"! !

!

*1 This item appears in the side menu when a sequence file (XXX.SEQ) has been selected with Catalog in the
menu.

*2 This item appears when Operation in the bottom menu has been selected.

Figure 3 Ć120: Sequence Editor Menu Structure

3 Ć162 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page
on which you can find a description of that function.

Table 3Ć8: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Operation Editing functions 3 Ć167
Cut Cutting a line 3 Ć167
Copy to Buffer Copying a line 3 Ć167
Paste from Buffer Pasting a line 3 Ć167
Show Catalogg Entryy Changing
g g the waveform display
p y 3 Ć168
Insert
se CoContents
e s oof Inserting
se g a seque
sequence
ce filee 3 Ć168
Sequence
Show Overview Sequence the display 3 Ć169
Undo Canceling function execution 3 Ć2
Exit/Write Saving files and exiting the sequence 3 Ć20, 3 Ć162
editor

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć163

EDIT Menu

Sequence Editor Menu Figure 3 -121 shows the general sequence editor display. A description for each
Display callout follows.

4 5

Figure 3 Ć121: Sequence Editor CRT Display

(1) File Name The name of the sequence file being edited; if the name has
not been set yet, ********.SEQ is displayed.
(2) Line The line number displayed inverted in the Destination list or
Repeat column.
(3) Destination List of the waveform or sequence files included in the
sequence file being edited.
(4) Repeat The repetition count for the file in (3), above. The waveform or
sequence file is repeated the specified number of times. This
number can be set from 1 to 65535.

3 Ć164 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

(5) Catalog    

     
  

   
      
(6) Button Operations 

    
  
  


    CURSOR   

  
    Destination   Repeat   

  

           

VALUE  ENTER     
  
Repeat 

  VALUE  ENTER      

        
    
Catalog
    
    
Destination 

  VALUE  ENTER     

 

    Catalog   
 
   Destination 

  z         

   Destination   Repeat 

  !        

    Destination   Repeat 

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć165

EDIT Menu

Creating and Editing Select Operation in the bottom menu to create or edit a sequence file. After you
Sequence Files have done this, you can select a waveform or sequence file from Catalog and
then put together a sequence and set the number of repetitions for that file to
create the sequence file.

Creating a Sequence File. In this example you will create a new sequence file.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Use the general purpose knob to select the file from the Catalog to insert
into the Destination list.
3. Press the front panel VALUE button or ENTER button. The file selected
from the Catalog is inserted into the Destination list. The file being inserted
is placed directly before the inverted display cursor. When the file is
inserted, the inverted cursor will move to Repeat on the same line.
4. Use the numeric keys to input the repetition count, then press the ENTER
button to enter the value. The inverted cursor will move to Destination on
the next line.
The default value for repetition counts is 1. If there is no need to change this
value, press the ! button. The inverted cursor will move to Destination on
the next line.
5. Repeat Steps from 2 to 4 to create the desired sequence. As long as there is
enough memory, the sequence may be up to approximately 8192 lines long.

Button Functions. To select files within the Destination list, press the CURSOR
button, then select with the general purpose knob or numeric keys. When the
numeric keys are used, input the specified line number in the Line input column
at the top left of the CRT screen. Pressing the VALUE or ENTER button enters
this line number and moves the inverted display cursor to the specified line
number.
When the CURSOR button has been pressed, and if the VALUE button or
ENTER button is pressed, the system goes into Insert mode. Pressing either of
these buttons again inserts the file selected from the Catalog into the Destina-
tion list.
Pressing the ! button causes the inverted cursor to move to the right or
downward. Pressing the z button causes the inverted cursor to move to the left
or upward.

3 Ć166 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Editing Functions When you select Operation in the bottom menu, the following items appear in
the side menu:
Cut Line
Copy to Buffer
Paste from Buffer
Show Catalog Entry
Insert Contents of Sequence
(Appears when a sequence file has been selected with Catalog)

Cutting a Line. Use Cut Line from the side menu to cut out a line in the
Destination list.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Press the front panel CURSOR button.
3. Use the general purpose knob to select the line to be cut from the Destina-
tion list.
4. Select Cut Line from the side menu.
When Cut Line is selected, the line displayed inverted in the Destination
list is deleted. This deleted line is put into the paste buffer. To return the
Destination list to its original state, select Undo from the bottom menu or
Paste from Buffer from the side menu.

Copying and Pasting a Line. Use Copy to Buffer and Paste from Buffer to copy
a line in the Destination list and paste it to another line.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Press the front panel CURSOR button. Use the general purpose knob to
select the line to copy from the Destination list.
3. Select Copy to Buffer from the side menu. When Copy to Buffer is
selected, the line displayed inverted in the Destination list is copied into the
paste buffer. This operation does not affect the display on the CRT.
4. Use the general purpose knob to specify the position to paste the copied line
with the inverted display cursor. The position for pasting is directly before
the inverted display cursor in the Destination list.
5. Select Paste from Buffer from the side menu.
Each time Paste from Buffer is selected, the line copied into the paste buffer
with the copy processing are pasted into whatever line you want.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć167

EDIT Menu

Catalog File Waveform Display. Use this item to observe the waveforms of the
files being assembled into the sequence.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Use the general purpose knob to select the file you want to observe from the
Catalog.
3. Select Show Catalog Entry from the side menu.
The waveform is displayed and the file name, the vertical axis voltage, the
number of waveform points, and the clock frequency data are shown.
Figure 3 -122 is an example of waveform display for when Show Catalog
Entry is selected.

Figure 3 Ć122: Example of Waveform Display When Show Catalog Entry is Selected

4. After observing the waveform, select Continue Operation from the sub
menu to return to the sequence editor.

Inserting a Sequence File. Select a sequence file in the Catalog to display the
Insert Contents of Sequence item in the side menu. When this item is selected,
the contents of the sequence file are developed and inserted into the Destination
list.

3 Ć168 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu


. When creating a sequence file you cannot use source–sequence files that
contain other sequence files. If you try to do this, a message will be displayed. In
this case, you can use the Insert Contents of Sequence item to develop the
sequence and insert it.

1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.

2. Press the front panel CURSOR button.
3. Use the general purpose knob to select the line where the sequence file is to
be inserted from the Destination list. The file is inserted directly before the
inverted display cursor in the Destination list.
4. Press the front panel VALUE button.
5. Use the general purpose knob to select the sequence file from the Catalog.
The Insert Contents of Sequence item will appear in the side menu.
6. Select Insert Contents of Sequence from the side menu. The contents of the
selected sequence file are inserted directly before the inverted display cursor
in the Destination list.

Sequence File Display Use Show Overview from the bottom menu to display the waveform for the
created or edited sequence file.
1. Select Show Overview from the bottom menu.
The waveform will be displayed, together with such information as the
voltage indicated by the vertical axis, the waveform point size and the clock
frequency. Figure 3 -123 shows an example of a waveform display with the
Show Overview item selected.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć169

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć123: Example of CRT Display When Show Overview is Selected

2. After observing the waveform, select Continue Operation from the side
menu to return to the sequence editor.

3 Ć170 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Autostep Editor
Use the autostep editor to edit files with the extension of .AST. Autostep files
are created by programming waveforms or sequence files. Each time a trigger
signal is received, the waveform changes to the waveform for the next step, in
accordance with the program. Each waveform or sequence file contains the
output conditions that have been set for that file, so the output conditions can be
changed for each waveform.
Files created with the autostep editor are started up using Autostep in the
MODE menu. At this point of time, it is not possible to change the output
parameters in the SETUP menu. Figure 3 -124 shows an example of the data and
output waveform for an autostep file.

Table 3Ć9: Autostep File Ċ CH1

Step File Name Output Conditions Waveform

     
  
  
    
  
      
  

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć171

EDIT Menu


  




  




  

Figure 3 Ć124: Autostep File Data and Output Waveforms

Entering the Autostep 1. Press the EDIT button in the MENU column. The initial EDIT menu will
Editor appear.
2. Select More from the side menu to display the second page of the side
menu: More 2 of 2.
3. Select Edit or New Autostep from the side menu.
Edit Used to select and edit an existing autostep file
(.AST)
New Autostep Used to create a new autostep file
The autostep editor screen will appear.

Saving Files and Exiting Select Exit/Write from the bottom menu in the autostep editor to save the file
the Editor (which you have either created or edited, depending on the side menu) to the
internal memory of the AWG2021 and exit from the editor.
The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the autostep editor as
for the waveform editor. See “Saving Files and Exiting the Editor” in the section
on the waveform editor.

3 Ć172 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Autostep Editor Menu The Autostep Editor menu has the structure shown in Figure 3 -125.
Structure
Bottom Menu Side Menu
Cut Step
Copy Step
Paste Step
Operation Insert New Step
Append New Step

Insert Current SETUP

Swap Channel Contents...

Autostep Editor Step No.
Jump To First Step
To Last Step
Undo
Write and Exit
Exit/Write Exit without Writing
Write

Internal Clock
External Clock
Default Value
Normal
Add
AM
Ext AM
Show Catalog Entry
Clear
Set Without Parameter
* Set
Through
* 1) Select Operation
from the bottom menu. 50 MHz
Ă2) Select the icon on the 20 MHz
ă screen.
Ă3) Press the VALUE button. 5 MHz
1 MHz
Amplitude
Default Value
Offset
Default Value

Figure 3 Ć125: Autostep Editor Menu Structure

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć173

EDIT Menu

Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page
on which you can find a description of that function.

Table 3Ć10: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Operation Editing functions 3 Ć186
Cut Step Cutting a step 3 Ć186
C
Copy S
Step C i a step
Copying 3 Ć186
186
Paste Step Pasting a step 3 Ć186
Insert New Stepp Addingg a stepp 3 Ć187
Append New Step Adding a step 3 Ć187
Insert Current SETUP Inserting SETUP menu waveforms and 3 Ć187
output parameters
Swap Channel Contents... Swapping steps between channels 3 Ć187
Jump Jumping to a step 3 Ć188
Undo Canceling function execution 3 Ć2
Exit/Write Saving files and exiting the editor 3 Ć20, 3 Ć172
Items selected on the screen
Clock Clock settings 3 Ć181
CH1 Operation CH1 operation settings 3 Ć182
Waveform/Sequence Setting files 3 Ć177
Filter Filter settings 3 Ć183
Amplitude Amplitude settings 3 Ć184
Offset Offset settings 3 Ć185

3 Ć174 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Autostep Editor Menu Figure 3 -126 shows the general autostep editor display. A description for each
Display callout follows.

4 3

Figure 3 Ć126: Autostep Editor CRT Display

(1) File Name The name of the autostep file being edited; if the name has not
been set yet, ********.AST is displayed.
(2) Step No. Indicates the step number in the program.
(3) CH2 File Setting Area This setting area is only effective when Option 02, with CH2, is
(Option 02) installed. Indicates the file set for CH2 in the step indicated by
(2). The waveform and output parameters for that file are
shown in this area. These output parameters may be changed.
(4) CH1 File Setting Area Indicates the file set for CH1 in the step indicated by (2). The
waveform and output parameters for that file are shown in this
area. These output parameters may be changed.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć175

EDIT Menu

(5) Clock Frequency and Indicates the clock frequency and CH1 operation mode that
CH1 Operation have been saved to the CH1 file. These output parameters
may be changed.
(6) Button Operation This area shows how the front panel buttons operate in this
menu.

Output parameters can be selected by turning the general

purpose knob.

Pressing this key at a programmed step moves to the previous

step.

Pressing this key at a programmed step moves to the next

step.

Pressing the VALUE button makes it possible to set the

selected output parameter. Use the general purpose knob to
select the output parameter to be set.

3 Ć176 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Creating and Editing Select Operation from the bottom menu to create or edit autostep programs. Up
Autostep Programs to 100 steps can be programmed. If blank steps exist in the autostep program that
has been created, these steps will be deleted when you quit the editor. If blank
steps exist in CH1 in an autostep file created on an instrument with Option 02
(2-channel output) installed, the instrument will stop at a blank step when the file
is started up.

Setting Files. The following procedure is used to set a new file at each step.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
To set a file for Step 1 of the autostep program:
2. Using the general purpose knob, select the item for which a file will be set
on CH1.

Figure 3 Ć127: Selecting the Item for File Setting

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć177

EDIT Menu

3. Press the VALUE button on the front panel. A list of files that can be set will
appear.

Figure 3 Ć128: File Selection List

4. Using the general purpose knob, select the desired file.

5. If you want to check the waveform of the selected file, select Show Catalog
Entry from the side menu.

Figure 3 Ć129: Sample File Waveform Display

3 Ć178 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

The waveform for that file will appear along with the waveform point size,
the clock frequency and the voltage value.
6. Select Continue from the sub-menu.
The menu shown before you selected Show Catalog Entry will reappear.
7. Select Set from the side menu.
The selected file will be inserted and the output parameters for that
waveform will be set.

Figure 3 Ć130: Setting a File

Selecting Cancel will cancel the setting operation and the previous menu
will appear.
Use Set Without Parameter instead of Set when you want to designate the
waveform without changing the parameters. The default parameters will be
set when the editor is opened using New Autostep or when a waveform is
designated for a new step added with Insert New Step or Append New
Step. The default values for the output parameters are shown below.
Clock 100.0MHz
CH1 Operation Normal
Filter Through
Ampl 1.000V
Offset 0.000V
Among them, Clock and CH1 Operation depend on the CH1 file.
Use Clear from the side menu to delete the file setting for the channel
indicated by the cursor.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć179

EDIT Menu

To add a step:
8. Select More 1 of 2 from the side menu and then select Append New Step.
The instrument will proceed to Step 2. See “Adding a Step” in this section.
Repeat this procedure to create the program.

Changing Parameters. It is possible to change the output parameters for a file that
has been set. Changing the output parameter values does not change the
parameters in the original file.
1. Use the z and ! buttons on the front panel or the Jump item in the bottom
menu to move to the step whose parameters you want to change.
2. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
3. Turn the general purpose knob to select the parameter to be changed.
4. Press the VALUE button on the front panel. The menu for that parameter
will appear.
5. Set the parameters as desired. See the descriptions of the individual
parameters on the following pages.
6. Select O.K. from the side menu. The parameters will be updated to the
selected items or set values. Selecting Cancel will cancel the setting
operation and the previous menu will reappear.

3 Ć180 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Clock Settings. Select using the general purpose knob.

Then press the VALUE button on the front panel. The menu shown in Figure
3 -131 will appear.

Figure 3 Ć131: Clock Setting Menu

Set the clock source and the clock frequency by selecting the appropriate items
in the side menu. The settings for clock source and clock frequency are used for
both channel 1 and channel 2.
Internal Clock Selects the internal clock. Use the numeric keys or
the general purpose knob to set the internal clock
frequency.
External Clock Selects the external clock. The external clock signal
is input through the CLOCK IN connector on the
rear panel of the instrument.
Default Value Sets the internal clock frequency to the default value
of 100.0 MHz.
After setting the clock source and clock frequency,
select O.K. from the side menu. The values for

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć181

EDIT Menu

clock source and clock frequency will be updated to

the values you have set.

CH1 Operation Settings. Select using the general
purpose knob. Then press the VALUE button on the front panel. The menu
shown in Figure 3 -132 will appear.

Figure 3 Ć132: CH1 Operation Setting Menu

Using the general purpose knob, select the type of operation to be performed
with the CH1 waveform. You can only selecting Add or AM in instruments that
have Option 02 installed. See “CH1 Waveform Operations” in “SETUP Menu.”
After selecting the type of operation, select O.K. from the side menu. The
operation type will be updated to what you have set.

3 Ć182 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Filter Settings. Using the general purpose knob, select the

for the channel that you want to change and then press the VALUE button on
the front panel. The menu shown in Figure 3 -133 will appear.

Figure 3 Ć133: Filter Setting Menu

Using the general purpose knob, select the type of filter. After selecting the filter
type, select O.K. from the side menu. The filter type will be updated to what you
have set.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć183

EDIT Menu

Amplitude Settings. Using the general purpose knob, select the

for the channel that you want to change and then press the
VALUE button on the front panel. The menu shown in Figure 3 -134 will
appear.

Figure 3 Ć134: Amplitude Setting Menu

Select the appropriate item in the side menu and set the amplitude.
Amplitude Select this item and use the numeric keys or the
general purpose knob to set the desired amplitude
value.
Default Value This item sets the amplitude to the default value of
1.000 V.
After setting the amplitude, select O.K. from the
side menu. The value for amplitude will be updated
to the value you have set.

3 Ć184 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Offset Settings. Using the general purpose knob, select the

for the channel that you want to change and then press the VALUE button on
the front panel. The menu shown in Figure 3 -135 will appear.

Figure 3 Ć135: Offset Setting Menu

Select the appropriate item in the side menu and set the offset.
Offset Select this item and use the numeric keys or the
general purpose knob to set the desired offset value.
Default Value This item sets the offset to the default value of
0.000 V.
After setting the offset, select O.K. from the side
menu. The value for offset will be updated to the
value you have set.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć185

EDIT Menu

Editing Functions When you select Operation in the bottom menu, the following items appear in
the side menu:
Cut Step
Copy Step
Paste Step
Insert New Step
Append New Step
Insert Current Setup
Swap Channel Contents...

Cutting a Step. Use Cut Step if you wish to delete a step in the autostep file that
you have programmed.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Using the z and ! buttons on the front panel, move to the step to be
deleted.
3. Select Cut Step from the side menu.
When Cut Step is selected, the current step is deleted. All of the steps after
the one that you have deleted will move up one step. To restore this step to
its original state, select Undo from the bottom menu or Paste from Buffer
from the side menu.

Copying and Pasting a Step. Use the Copy Step and Paste Step items to copy a
step in the program and paste it to another step.
1. Move to the step to be copied, using the same procedure as in “Cutting a
Step” above.
2. Select Copy Step from the side menu.
When Copy Step is selected, the current step is placed in the paste buffer.
This item has no effect on the CRT display.
3. Use the z and ! buttons on the front panel or the Jump item in the bottom
menu to move to the step to which the step in the paste buffer is to be pasted.
4. Select Paste Step from the side menu.
All of the steps after the one that has been pasted will move down one step.

3 Ć186 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Adding a Step. Use Insert New Step and Append New Step from the side menu
when you wish to add a step to an autostep file being created.
Insert New Step Used to insert a step at the current step number.
For example, suppose the current step number is
Step 2 of 3. Selecting Insert New Step at this point
will add a blank step at Step 2 and the step display
will read Step 2 of 4.
Append New Step Used to add a step after the current step number.
For example, suppose the current step number is
Step 2 of 3. Selecting Append New Step at this
point will add a blank step at Step 3 and the step
display will read Step 3 of 4.

Inserting the SETUP Menu Waveforms and Output Parameters. Use Insert
Current SETUP from the side menu to insert the waveforms and output
parameters for all channels that are currently set in the SETUP menu at the
current step.

Swapping Steps Between Channels. Use Swap Channel Contents... from the
side menu to interchange the contents of steps between channel 1 and channel 2.
This item is effective to edit the autostep file created on instrument with Option
02 installed. The following diagram shows the menu configuration.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ





ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

!  


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
        "
   

  

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
#! 

1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.

2. Using the z and ! buttons on the front panel, move to the step whose
contents are to be swapped with another channel.
3. Select More 1 of 2 from the side menu and then select Swap Channel
Contents...
4. Select Channel from the sub-menu.
5. Using the general purpose knob, select the channel with which the step
contents are to be swapped.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć187

EDIT Menu

6. Press Range in the sub-menu and select Current Step or All Steps.
Current step Swaps only the contents of the current step.
All Steps Swaps the contents of all steps.
7. Select Execute in the sub-menu.
Data will be exchanged between the designated steps in the designated
channels.

Jumping to a Step Use Jump in the bottom menu to go quickly to a certain step in the autostep
program. Using the items in the side menu, you can jump to the first step, the
last step or to any step in between.
Step No. Used to move to a step other than the first or last
step.
Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to
enter the number of the desired step.
To First Step Used to move to the first step.
To Last Step Used to move to the last step.

3 Ć188 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Convolution Waveform Editor (Option 09)

On instruments with Option 09 installed, high-speed convolution and correlation
can be performed for up to 32,000 words of waveform data in existing waveform
files (those bearing the extender .WFM).
The number of points in the waveform after calculation will be the sum of the
point sizes of the two selected waveform files. The calculated amplitude will be
normalized.


. The calculated result of waveforms consisting of P number of points and

N number of points will be P+N–1. For the sake of convenience, however, on
this instrument a final value of 0.0 is added , so the result is P+N.

On discrete systems, the convolution y(n) of waveform x(n) and waveform h(i) is
expressed by the following formula. Here N is the number of data items. The
operation expressed by this formula is called convolution.

ȍ x(i)h(n–i)
N–1
y(n) +
i+0

Alternately, the correlation y(n) of waveform x(n) and waveform h(i) is

expressed by the following formula. Here N is the number of data items. The
only difference between this equation and the one expressing convolution above
is the minus sign in the parentheses, so with left-right symmetrical waveforms
the results will be identical.

ȍ x(i)h(n ) i)
N–1
y(n) +
i+0

Entering the Convolution In this editor, you select an existing waveform file and perform either convolu-
Waveform Editor tion or correlation and then create a new file. Use the following procedure to
open the editor:
1. Press the EDIT button in the MENU column. The initial EDIT menu will
appear.
2. Select More from the side menu to display the third page of the side menu:
More 3 of 3.
3. Select Convolve Waveform from the side menu.
The convolution waveform editor screen will appear.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć189

EDIT Menu

Saving Files and Exiting When you select Exit/Write from the bottom menu, depending on what you have
the Editor selected in the side menu, a file name will be assigned to the calculated result and
the file will be saved to internal memory, after which the editor will close. When
you quit the editor, the initial EDIT menu will reappear.
The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the convolution
waveform editor as for the waveform editor. See “Saving Files and Exiting the
Editor” in the section on the waveform editor.

Convolution Waveform The Convolution Waveform Editor menu has the structure shown in Fig-
Editor Menu Structure ure 3 -136.

Bottom Menu Side Menu

Waveform 1
Waveform
Waveform 2
Convolution
Func type
Correlation

Convolution None
Operation Math type
Waveform Editor Differential

Execute

Exit / Write

Figure 3 Ć136: Convolution Waveform Editor Menu Structure

Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page
on which you can find a description of that function.

Table 3Ć11: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Waveform Selecting a waveform file 3 Ć192
Operation Executing convolution/correlation 3 Ć193
Exit/Write Saving files and exiting the editor 3 Ć20, 3 Ć190

3 Ć190 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Convolution Waveform Figure 3 -137 shows the general convolution waveform editor display.
Editor Menu Display

Figure 3 Ć137: Convolution Waveform Editor CRT Display

(1) Source Waveform1 

 

 
 
  


 

Display Area 
 

    
 

   

  


  

  
  
  


(2) Source Waveform2 
 

 
 
 
  



Display Area 
 
 

    
 


  
   


  

  

    


(3) Destination Waveform 

  
  Waveform1  Waveform2 
Display Area 

   
   
 

 

 

  
 
  Waveform1 
Waveform2 
 
  
 
 

 
Waveform1  

   


AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć191

EDIT Menu

Selecting a Waveform File In this example, you will select a waveform file for operation.
1. Select Waveform from the bottom menu.
2. Select Waveform1 from the side menu.
3. Using the general purpose knob, select the waveform file for operation from
the Select Waveform list and then select O.K. The waveform you have
selected will be displayed in the Waveform1 display area under Source.
4. Select Waveform2 from the side menu.
5. Using the general purpose knob, select the other waveform file for operation
from the Select Waveform list and then select O.K. The waveform you have
selected will be displayed in the Waveform2 display area under Source.

Figure 3 Ć138: Selecting a Waveform File

3 Ć192 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Executing When you select Operation in the bottom menu, convolution or correlation will
Convolution/Correlation be performed. If Differential has been selected for the Math type item, the
calculated result will be differentiated.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Press Func type in the side menu and select either Convolution or
Correlation.
3. If you would like to differentiate the calculated result, select Differential for
the Math type item. Differentiation will be used when reading waveforms
from magnetic disks.
4. Select Execute from the side menu to execute the operation.
The point size of the waveform data after operation will be the sum of the
point sizes of the two waveform files you have selected.
Figure 3 -139 shows an example of convolution for which differentiation has
been performed. Figure 3 -140 shows an example of correlation.

Figure 3 Ć139: Sample Convolution

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć193

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć140: Sample Correlation

3 Ć194 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

FFT Editor (Option 09)

On instruments with Option 09 installed, existing waveform files up to 16,000
waveform points with the extension .WFM can be edited in the frequency
domain. When the editor is started, Fast Fourier transformation occurs automati-
cally and the data is transformed into the frequency domain. When you leave the
editor, inverse fast Fourier transformation is carried out to convert the frequency
domain data into time domain data.
The window function for fast Fourier transform is selected when the editor is
started. Within the editor, filtering (high pass, low pass, band pass, band cut) and
clipping are possible.

Entering the FFT Editor This editor is not used to make new files. Rather, it edits existing waveform files
in the frequency domain. Here is the procedure for editing the FFT editor.
1. Press the EDIT button in the MENU column. The initial EDIT menu will
appear.
2. Select More from the side menu to display the third page of the side menu:
More 3 of 3.
3. Using the general purpose knob, select the waveform file (.WFM) from the
file list.
The Edit in Frequency Domain item is added to the side menu.
4. Select Edit in Frequency Domain from the side menu. The menu for
selecting the window function is displayed. See Figure 3 -141.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć195

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć141: FFT Window Selection Menu

5. Using the general purpose knob, select the window function.

When you enter the FFT editor, you must select the window function. This
instrument has the following six FFT windows.
Rectangle
Hanning
Hamming
Blackman-Harris
Blackman
Triangle
For repetitive waveforms in which the waveform data starting point and
ending point match, the rectangle window is usually used. For details on the
window functions, see the FFT (Fast Fourier Transforms) description in
Appendix F.
6. Next, select O.K. from the side menu to enter the FFT editor. The time
domain data is transformed into the frequency domain.
To cancel the FFT operation, select Cancel. This returns the system to the
initial EDIT menu.

3 Ć196 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Saving Files and Exiting Select Exit/Write from the bottom menu. Then select from the side menu to
the Editor save the edited file to the internal memory of the AWG2021 and exit from the
editor. When this is done, the frequency domain data is converted into time
domain data and saved as a waveform file.
The same procedure is used to save the file and exit from the FFT editor as for
the waveform editor. See “Saving Files and Exiting the Editor” in the section on
the waveform editor.

FFT Editor Menu Structure The FFT Editor menu has the structure shown in Figure 3 -142.

Bottom Menu Bottom Menu Side Menu

Right peak

Operation Left peak

Draw...
Zoom

LowĆPass
HighĆPass

Rectangle Filter BandĆPass

Hanning BandĆElim
Hamming O.K. Apply filter
Select
FFT Editor Window BlackmanĆ Cut under
Harris Cancel Delete Even
Blackman Limiter
Delete Odd
Triangle Shift Mag

Undo

Write and Exit

Exit/Write Exit without Writing
Write

Figure 3 Ć142: FFT Editor Menu Structure

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć197

EDIT Menu

Menu Functions The following list shows the functions available for each menu item and the page
on which you can find a description of that function.

Table 3Ć12: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Select Window Selecting a window 3 Ć195
Operation Editing in the frequency domain 3 Ć200
Right peak, Left peak Searching for peaks 3 Ć201
Draw... Drawing magnitude and phase 3 Ć201
Zoom Magnifying a signal 3 Ć204
Filter Selecting a filter 3 Ć205
Limiter Selecting a limiter 3 Ć207
Cut under Cutting extraneous frequency components 3 Ć208
Delete Even, Delete Odd Deleting even or odd components 3 Ć208
Shift Mag Shifting magnitudes 3 Ć209
Undo Canceling function execution 3 Ć2
Exit/Write Saving files and exiting the editor 3 Ć20, 3 Ć197

3 Ć198 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

FFT Editor Menu Display Figure 3 -143 shows the general FFT editor display. A description for each
callout follows.

2 3 4

7 8

Figure 3 Ć143: FFT Editor CRT Display

(1) File Name           

  
(2)ĂFreq1:                
Magnitude:        
    CURSOR

Phase:  
         
  
 VALUE
  
        

                
                  
(3)ĂFreq2:                
Magnitude:       
 
Phase:
(4) Scroll Indicator            
              
    
(5) Magnitude Display Area             
 
(6) Phase Display Area               

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć199

EDIT Menu

(7) Left vertical bar cursor   

 
        


       
(8) Right vertical bar cursor 
      
(9) Button Operations           


  CURSOR    

 
 



  VALUE  ENTER      

  
     
   


 

 


  VALUE  ENTER      

  
     
   
 



 


 Draw...   
   CURSOR
   
 
 


 Draw...   
   VALUE 
ENTER    


 Draw...   
  VALUE  ENTER
  
  
  
  

    


Editing in the Frequency Select Operation from the bottom menu to change the signal magnitude and
Domain phase in the frequency domain. The following items will appear in the side
menu:
Right peak
Left peak
Draw...

Editing Magnitude. Here is the procedure for editing the magnitudes.

1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the left/right vertical
bar cursor. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, move the
active vertical bar cursor to the frequency to be edited.

3 Ć200 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

3. Press the VALUE button on the front panel and select Magnitude. The knob
icon is displayed on the Magnitude side.
4. Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys, change the magnitude.
5. To change the magnitude for another frequency, press the CURSOR button
on the front panel, and use the general purpose knob to move the active
vertical bar cursor to the frequency to be edited. Next, repeat Steps 3 and 4.

Editing Phase. Here is the procedure for editing the phase.

1. Select Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the left/right vertical
bar cursor. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, move the
active vertical bar cursor to the frequency to be edited.
3. Press the VALUE button on the front panel and select Phase. The knob icon
is displayed on the Phase side.
4. Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys, change the phase.
5. To change the phase for another frequency, press the CURSOR button on
the front panel, and use the general purpose knob to move the active vertical
bar cursor to the frequency to be edited. Next, repeat Steps 3 and 4.

Searching for Peaks. Select Operation from the bottom menu to display the
Right peak and Left peak items on the side menu. These items detect the signal
peaks.
Right peak The active vertical bar cursor is moved to the peak
in the signal to the right of the active vertical bar
cursor. Each time this item is selected, the peak
value moves to the right.
Left peak The active vertical bar cursor is moved to the peak
in the signal to the left of the active vertical bar
cursor. Each time this item is selected, the peak
value moves to the left.

Drawing Magnitude and Phase. Use Draw... from the side menu to draw points
between the left and right vertical bar cursors and then connect the points to
create an arbitrary magnitude and phase. Immediately after you select the
Draw... item, a point cursor will appear midway between the vertical bar cursors,
in the center of the vertical axis. The following diagram shows the menu
configuration for the Draw... item.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć201

EDIT Menu

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 

 


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

   



ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 


Figure 3 -144 shows an example of the screen with the Draw... item selected.

Figure 3 Ć144: Menu Displayed When Draw... is Selected

When you select Draw... from the side menu, the following items will appear in
the sub-menu: Add Draw Point, Delete Draw Point, Draw Area, Go Back and
Execute. Each of these items will be explained below in detail.
1. Select Operation from the bottom menu, and then select Draw... from the
side menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel. Using the general purpose
knob, move the left and right vertical bar cursors to define the frequency
domain for drawing the magnitude or phase. Use the CURSOR button to
toggle between the left and right vertical bar cursors.

3 Ć202 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

3. Press Draw Area in the sub-menu and select Mag (magnitude) or Phase
(phase).
4. Press the VALUE button on the front panel. Using the general purpose knob,
move the point cursor to the location of the new point. Pressing the VALUE
button will toggle the direction of movement from horizontal (X) to vertical
(Y) and vice-versa. The location of the point cursor is displayed in the upper
right-hand corner of the screen in X (frequency) and Y (magnitude or phase)
coordinates.
5. When you have placed the point cursor at the desired location, select Add
Draw Point from the sub-menu to add a point at that location.
It is possible to add points outside the area defined by the vertical bar
cursors. However, such points will be ignored when Execute is pressed.


. It is not possible to draw more than one point at the same location on the
horizontal axis. If you attempt to do this, a message will appear asking you to
confirm that you want to change the level of the existing point. Press O.K. or
Cancel in response to this message.

6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to add several new points.

7. To delete a point that you have added with Add Draw Point, move the point
cursor to that point and select Delete Draw Point. The point will be deleted.
If you press Delete Draw Point several times in succession, the points that
you have added will be deleted in sequence starting with that nearest to the
point cursor.
8. Select Execute from the sub-menu. The points that you have added will be
connected to the magnitude or phase on the left and right vertical bar cursors.
Figure 3 -145 shows an example of a magnitude drawn between the vertical
bar cursors.

AWG2021 User Manual 


EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć145: Drawing a Magnitude

9. To cancel the execution of a draw operation, select Undo from the bottom
menu. The screen will revert to the waveform before Execute was selected.


. When you quit and once again enter the waveform editor, the points you
have drawn will disappear.

10. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The system returns from the Draw...
sub-menu to the previous side menu.
This concludes the draw process.

Magnifying a Signal Select Zoom from the bottom menu to display menu items that magnify the
signal to x1, x4, x8, x16, or x64 along the frequency axis. Figure 3 -146 shows
the magnified signal display when Zoom is selected from the bottom menu with
x16 is selected.

3 Ć204 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć146: Magnified Signal Display

In the scroll indicator at the top of the screen, the section of the signal being
displayed on the screen is displayed inverted. You can scroll through the
frequency domain outside the screen by turning the general purpose knob.

Selecting a Filter When Filter is selected from the bottom menu, the following four frequency
filters can be selected from the side menu.

Low Frequency Pass Filter (Low-Pass) — This filter eliminates frequencies
greater than the specified frequency.

High Frequency Pass Filter (High-Pass) — This filter eliminates frequencies
lower than the specified frequency.

Band Pass Filter (Band-Pass) — This filter eliminates frequencies outside
the specified band.

Band Cut Filter (Band-Elim) — This filter eliminates frequencies in the
specified band.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć205

EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć147: Low Pass Filter

Figure 3 Ć148: High Pass Filter

Figure 3 Ć149: Band Pass Filter

3 Ć206 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

Figure 3 Ć150: Band Cut Filter

The procedure below applies the filters to the signal.

1. Select Filter from the bottom menu.
2. Select Low-Pass, High-Pass, Band-Pass, or Band-Elim from the side
menu.
3. Press the VALUE button on the front panel and select the filter frequency
field.
4. Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys, set the filter frequency.
5. Press the VALUE button on the front panel to select the filter slope field.
6. Using the general purpose knob or the numeric keys, set the filter slope.
Here octave (oct) indicates double the frequency.
For a band filter, set the frequency and slope for both ends of the band.
7. After setting the filter frequency and slope, select Apply filter from the side
menu. The specified filter is applied to the signal.

Selecting a Limiter Use Limiter from the bottom menu to cut the frequency component below the
limit level, to cut the even or odd components on the discrete frequency axis, or
to shift the magnitude to the limit level. When Limiter is selected from the
bottom menu, the following items will appear in the side menu.
Cut under
Delete Even
Delete Odd
Shift Mag

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć207

EDIT Menu

Cutting Extraneous Frequency Components. Here is the procedure for using the
Cut under item to remove the extraneous frequency component.
1. Select Limiter from the bottom menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the left/right vertical
bar cursor. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, set the
domain to remove the extraneous frequency component.
3. Press the VALUE button on the front panel. Using the general purpose knob
or the numeric keys, set the limit level for the magnitude. The limit level is
displayed at the top the screen.
4. Select Cut under from the side menu. The frequency component under the
limit level is cut.

Deleting Even or Odd Components. Here is the procedure for using the Delete
Even or Delete Odd item to delete the even component or odd component in the
discrete frequency domain.
1. Select Limiter from the bottom menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the left/right vertical
bar cursor. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, set the
domain to delete the even component or odd component.
3. Select Delete Even (even) or Delete Odd (odd) from the side menu. The
even or odd component within the left and right vertical bar cursors is cut.
Figure 3 -151 shows the fundamental, even, and odd component.

3 Ć208 AWG2021 User Manual

 EDIT Menu

DC   
   


Figure 3 Ć151: Fundamental, Odd, and Even Components

Shifting Magnitudes. Here is the procedure for using the Shift Mag item to shift
the magnitude to the limit level.
1. Select Limiter from the bottom menu.
2. Press the CURSOR button on the front panel to select the left/right vertical
bar cursor. Using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob, set the
domain to be used when shifting the magnitude.
3. Press the VALUE button on the front panel. Using the general purpose knob
or the numeric keys, set the limit level for the magnitude. The limit level is
displayed at the top the screen.
4. Select Shift Mag from the side menu. The entire area within the left and
right vertical bar cursors will shift so the signal with the maximum magni-
tude between the cursors becomes the limit level.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć209

EDIT Menu

3 Ć210 AWG2021 User Manual

SETUP Menu

General Description
The SETUP menu is used to set a variety of output parameters during actual
output of the waveforms and sequence waveforms that have been created with
the editors. The menu can display output parameter values and selected items in
both text form and as a graphic (in other words, with items connected in the form
of a circuit).
When the power to the instrument is turned on, the SETUP menu appears
automatically. Also when the power is switched on, if you have select from Disk
or from NVRam in the Auto Load item of the LOAD/SAVE menu, all the files
on the disk or in the NVRam, whichever is selected, are loaded automatically
into internal memory. If the waveform or sequence file selected with the SETUP
menu was in internal memory the last time you switched off the power, then that
file is selected.
The bottom menu consists of seven items: the six output parameters that you can
set (Clock, Waveform Sequence, CH1 Operation, Filter, Amplitude and
Offset) and the Display item which allows you to set the format for menu
displays. To set these items, press the corresponding button in the bottom menu
and use the general purpose knob or the numeric keys to set the desired value.
A waveform or sequence file that is created with the editor has the default output
parameters set in it. When the output parameters are changed with the SETUP
menu, the new settings are saved together with the waveform data in the file.
When the operating mode is Autostep, the output parameters cannot be changed
at all. If the file is locked and the operating mode is any other mode, the output
parameters can be changed, but the changes are not written to the waveform file.
For further information on locking files, see “Locking and Unlocking Files” item
in the section on editors.
This section will discuss the menus found on the AWG2021 Option 02 with the
CH2 output. Instruments without the Option 02 have no channel switching and
parameters are only set for CH1.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć211

SETUP Menu

SETUP Menu Structure

Figure 3 -152 shows the configuration of the SETUP menu.

MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu Select/Set Item

CH1 Clock
Internal Clock
Frequency Setting
Internal
Clock Source
External
*1 CH2 Clock
Divider
Frequency Setting
Waveform *2
Channel Selection File Setting
Sequence

Normal
AM *1
CH1 Operation *1
Add
External AM
Through
50 MHz
*2
SETUP Filter Channel Selection 20 MHz
5 MHz
1 MHz
*2
Channel Selection Amplitude Setting
Amplitude
*1 Off
Track
CH1
*2
Channel Selection Offset Setting
Offset
*1 Off
Track
CH1
Graphics
Display
Text

*1 Available when Option 02 has been installed.

*2 For instruments with Option 02 installed (CH2), these items switch between CH1 and CH2.

Figure 3 Ć152: SETUP Menu Structure

3 Ć212 AWG2021 User Manual

 SETUP Menu

Menu Functions
The following table shows the function of each menu item and the page to refer
to for a more detailed explanation.

Table 3Ć13: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

 ""  !#    #& 
'
$  # "  %$   !#  
'

  "
 %$   " 
'
" "" " 
'
"# "" "# 
'
!" "" !" 
'
!& " " !&  "  " 
'
SETUP #

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć213

SETUP Menu

SETUP Menu Display

Figure 3 -153 shows the graphic mode for SETUP menu display. A description
for each callout follows.

5 6

22 7
4

Figure 3 Ć153: SETUP Menu (Graphic Mode)

(1) Display Area for CH1 &" # &%! ! " $  &%! # 
Waveform/Sequence #
  $# $  #  "   L " "& 
Waveform # $! !# !!  #" !
(2) CH1 Clock Setting &" #  "$!  # ! $' ! # #!

(3) CH2 Clock Setting ! "#!$#" &# #  "# 
  "&" #
#!  ! $' !
  # %$ ! ! $'
%"  #
 
(4) CH1 Operation Setting &" # !# "## ! #
 &%!
(5) CH1 Output Parameter &" # #!  # $#$# # #$  # $#$#
Settings &%!  # "# "##
(6) CH1 Output On/Off &" &#!
 $#$# "  !   #$!
 $#$# 
!  $" #
  $##  # !# 

3 Ć214 AWG2021 User Manual

 SETUP Menu

(7) CH1 Output Parameter The output status of the waveform or sequence waveform is
Status shown as follows:
Period : Period
Points : Number of data points
Max : Upper voltage for full scale vertical axis when
terminated with 50 W
Min : Lower voltage for full scale vertical axis when
terminated with 50 W
The period is the number of data points in the waveform or
sequence, multiplied by the clock frequency.
(8) CH2 Output Parameters For instruments with Option 02 installed (CH2), shows the CH2
output parameters as well as CH1 output parameters.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć215

SETUP Menu

Selecting the Display Format for the SETUP Menu

The SETUP menu can be displayed in either text or graphic form.
Graphics This is the mode normally used. This format displays the
output parameters connected in the form of a circuit.
Selected parameters are indicated by a inverted display
around them; these values may be changed. See Fig-
ure 3 -153.
Text This mode shows the output parameters in text form for each
channel. It is convenient for printing a hard copy of the
settings. See Figure 3 -154.

Figure 3 Ć154: SETUP Menu (Text Mode)

3 Ć216 AWG2021 User Manual

 SETUP Menu

Selecting Output Parameter Fields

There are three ways to select a parameter.
1. Press the bottom button for the item to be set. Then select the channel in the
side menu and select the field.
2. Press the bottom button for the item. Then press the bottom button again;
each time the button is pressed, the CURSOR will move to a different
channel. When you reach the desired setting field, set the appropriate value.
3. Press the CURSOR key on the front panel and select the field. When the
CURSOR key is pressed again, the cursor moves to the next setting field for
that channel.

Numeric Input Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to input a numeric into the
Clock, Amplitude, and Offset item fields.
1. Press the bottom button for the item to be set.
2. Use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to input the number for the
parameter.
When using the numeric keys, press the front panel ENTER key, VALUE
key, or the appropriate unit key to enter the number. When this is done, the
value will be confirmed and will appear in the icon on the screen.
Each time the general purpose knob is turned, the numeric value is entered.
The value in the icon will change accordingly.

Selecting a Waveform or Sequence File

The first step in setting the waveform output parameters is to select the
waveform or sequence file.
Each waveform or sequence file has output parameter settings attached. When a
file is selected, the output parameters are also automatically changed to the
settings for that file. A waveform or sequence file that has just been created with
the editor has the default output parameters set.
Clock 100.0 MHz (can also be set using the editor)
Operation NORMAL
Filter Through
Amplitude 1V
Offset 0V

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć217

SETUP Menu

To select a waveform or sequence file:

1. Select Waveform Sequence from the bottom menu. The waveform display
area will be highlighted on the screen.

2. Select the channel for setting in the side menu.

3. Turn the general purpose knob to open the file list. Use the general purpose
knob to select the desired waveform or sequence file from the list.

4. After the file has been selected, select O.K. in the sub-menu. The selected
file will be confirmed and the waveform and file name will appear in the
icon, as shown in the figure below.

When the file is confirmed, the output parameters for that file will be set
automatically.

3 Ć218 AWG2021 User Manual

 SETUP Menu

When a sequence waveform is output, the output parameters for that sequence
file are used.


. When a sequence file is selected, and if the waveform or sequence file
making up the sequence is not in internal memory, the waveform display area is
blank and the output switch is off. In this case, you must load the waveform or
sequence file making up the sequence into internal memory.

Setting Clock Source and Frequency

The Clock menu item is used to set the clock source and the clock frequency.
The clock source can be set to either internal or external. If the clock source is
set to External, there is no need to set the frequency.
The clock period is the time between the data points for the waveform created.
Therefore, the product of that clock period and the number of waveform points is
the period for that waveform or sequence waveform. For example, suppose the
clock frequency is 1 MHz (for a period of 1 msec). If the waveform has 100
points, the period for the entire waveform is 100 msec.

 m

 m

Figure 3 Ć155: Clock and Waveform Points

To set Clock, perform these steps:

To set the Source to Internal and then set the CH1 clock frequency:
1. Select Clock from the bottom menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć219

SETUP Menu

2. Press the Source button in the side menu and set it to Internal. The clock
icon shown below will be displayed on the screen.

Since the clock frequency for CH2 depends on the clock frequency for CH1,
set the clock frequency for CH1 first.
3. Use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to set the internal clock
frequency with the Internal Clock item.
The clock frequency can be set in four digits between 10.00 Hz and
250.0 MHz.
To set the CH2 clock frequency:
4. Select Divider from the side menu. The divider icon shown below will be
displayed on the screen.

5. Turn the general purpose knob to set the frequency divider.

The clock frequency for CH2 is determined by setting the value for
frequency division of the CH1 clock. This frequency division setting can be
selected from the multiples of 2 from 1 (20) to 16,777,216 (224). The CH2
clock frequency, after frequency division, is expressed with the four digits
under the frequency division value. Depending on the value of the CH1
clock frequency, it may not be possible to set a large frequency division
ratio. For example, if the CH1 clock frequency is 10 Hz, then the only
frequency division ratio that can be set is 1.
When the CH2 waveform is changed by pressing Waveform Sequence, the
frequency division value is always reset to 1 to give CH2 the same clock
frequency as CH1. If you change the clock frequency for CH1, the frequency
division ratio stays the same and the clock frequency for CH2 changes.


 AWG2021 User Manual

 SETUP Menu

To set the Source to External:

6. Press the Source button in the side menu and select External. The clock
icon shown below will be displayed on the screen.

The CH1 and CH2 clocks are controlled with the external clock input from the
CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel. The external clock frequency that can
be input to the connector is up to 250 MHz.

CH1 Waveform Operations

CH1 Operation is used to operate the CH1 waveform and the waveform from
CH2, or the CH1 waveform and a waveform input from an external source. It
then outputs the result from the CH1 output connector. Two types of operation
— addition (Add) or multiplication (AM) — can be performed for the CH1
waveform and CH2 waveform or external signal.
To set the desired operation process for the CH1 waveform:
1. Select CH1 Operation from the bottom menu.
2. Select the desired process from the side menu. The following choices are
available:

Standard Type Option 02


 

   

  

The following is a more detailed description of each process:

Normal Waveforms are output separately from each channel.
AM CH1 output is the CH1 waveform with the amplitude
modulated (multiplied) by the waveform output from CH2.
See Figure 3 -156.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć221

SETUP Menu

 "  ! ! "
 ! !
!      

 !  
  



 ! !
   

 !  
 "   







Figure 3 Ć156: Multiplying CH1 Waveform by CH2 Waveform

This multiplier has a bandwidth of 30 MHz for the carrier (signal) and a
bandwidth of 4 MHz for the modulation signal. The waveform output from CH1
is the result of the following calculation.
CH1out = CH1 setting value × (CH2 setting value + CH2 offset)
A CH2 signal of 5 V (full scale) gives 100% modulation. When the CH2 signal
is minus, the CH1 signal is inverted.
The multiplied value of CH2 is expressed as a % and is displayed at the bottom
right of the CRT screen (see next example).

# 
 


. When multiplication results in an output that exceeds 5 Vp-p, the signal
may be distorted.

Add The CH1 waveform is added to the waveform output from

CH2. See Figure 3 -157.

3 Ć222 AWG2021 User Manual

 SETUP Menu

 "  ! ! "

     


  
 

 

 !  

 !  

 "





 ! !
   

 !  
 

Figure 3 Ć157: Adding CH1 Waveform and CH2 Waveform

The adder has a 30 MHz bandwidth.

The actual value is (1@5 the CH2 setting) + the CH1 setting. The added value of
CH2 is 1@5 the setting and is displayed at the bottom right of the CRT screen (see
example below).

# W
 W


. When addition results in an output that exceeds 5 Vp-p, the signal may be
distorted.

External AM The CH1 waveform output is amplitude modulated by the

external signal input from the rear panel CH1 AM IN
connector. See Figure 3 -158.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć223

SETUP Menu

 "
 ! ! "

 ! !
!      

 !  
  



#  "



Î
ÎÎ
# 



Figure 3 Ć158: Multiplying CH1 Waveform by an External Waveform

Table 3-14 shows the amplitudes for the output signals relative to the external
modulation signals.

Table 3Ć14: Output Signal Amplitude Relative to External Modulation Signal

External Modulation Signal Output Signal

    "!
    "!
  

100% amplitude modulation is possible with ±1 V input.


. When the external modulation signal is overmodulated 1 V or more, the

output will exceed 5 Vp-p and the signal may be distorted.

The maximum signal that can be input to the CH1 AM IN connector is ±5 V: the
input impedance is 10 kW.

3 Ć224 AWG2021 User Manual

 SETUP Menu

Setting Filter
The filters selections are: 50, 20, 5, 1 MHz and Through (no filter).
To set Filter, perform these steps:
1. Select Filter from the bottom menu. The filter icon will be highlighted on
the screen.

2. Select the channel from the side menu.

3. Turn the general purpose knob to select the desired filter.

Setting Amplitude and Offset

Use Amplitude and Offset to set the output amplitude and offset for the vertical
axis 12-bit full scale voltage. These values are terminated with 50 W.
Figure 3 -159 shows the display when the amplitude is set to 5 V and the offset
is set to 1 V.

Max

Min

Figure 3 Ć159: Setting Amplitude and Offset

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć225

SETUP Menu

Setting the amplitude and offset determines Max and Min values shown to the
left of the waveform. In the example shown in Figure 3 -159, the Max and Min
values are as follows:

 
W
 

W

Setting Amplitude 1. Select Amplitude from the bottom menu. The amplitude icon will be
highlighted on the screen.

2. Select the channel from the side menu.

3. Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the amplitude. The
output amplitude can be set to any value between 0.05 V and 5 V in
minimum increments of 1 mV.


. The amplitude set gives the top and bottom voltage values for the
waveform editor full-scale, not the peak-to-peak value of the waveform.

Setting Offset 1. Select Offset from the bottom menu. The offset icon will be highlighted on
the screen.

2. Select the channel from the side menu.

3. Use the numeric keys or the general purpose knob to set the desired offset.
The offset may be set to any value between –2.5 V and +2.5 V in minimum
increments of 5 mV.

Linking the CH1 Waveform When Option 02 is installed, it is possible to link the amplitude and offset of
and Amplitude or Offset CH1 with the corresponding values for CH2. When such linkages are set,
changes to CH1 values will also be applied to the CH2.
Use the following procedure to link CH2 amplitude to CH1 amplitude. In such
cases, CH1 and CH2 have their own files one for each.

3 Ć226 AWG2021 User Manual

 SETUP Menu

1. Select Amplitude from the bottom menu.

2. Select CH2 from the side menu.
3. Press the Track key in the side menu and select CH1. The linkage setting
will appear below the CH2 amplitude icon.

4. Select CH1 from the side menu.

5. Turn the general purpose knob to change the CH1 amplitude. Check to make
sure that the CH2 amplitude has changed accordingly.
The same procedure can be used to link the offset values for other channels
to the CH1 waveform. In such cases, the linkage setting will be displayed
below the CH2 offset icon.

AWG2021 User Manual 


SETUP Menu


 AWG2021 User Manual

MODE Menu

General Description
Press the MODE button in the MENU column to display the MODE menu. The
MODE menu is used to set the operating mode of the waveform output with the
conditions set in the SETUP menu.
This menu enables you to perform the following functions:

Setting waveform or sequence waveform output trigger mode

Waveform Advance and Autostep functions that display the waveform
sequence with the trigger

Determine the timing with which the sync signals are generated
The trigger or gate signal can be generated with external signals from the
TRIGGER INPUT connector or by pressing the front panel MANUAL button.
When the instrument receives the trigger or gate signal, the “Waiting for
Trigger” display in the status area of the CRT display changes to “Running”
and the waveform or sequence is output. When output stops, the status area
display returns to the original “Waiting for Trigger”.
The screen displays a contents list for each channel. This list shows the
waveform/sequence file selected with the SETUP menu and the contents of the
file. The display is almost the same for all operating modes.
The explanations that follow are for an instrument with the Option 02, CH2
output. An instrument without the Option 02 has only the CH1 display.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć229

MODE Menu

MODE Menu Structure

Figure 3 -160 shows the configuration of the MODE menu.

MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu Select Item

Cont
Positive
Slope
Negative
Level
Triggered 50 W
Impedance
1 MW
STOP
Positive
Polarity
Negative
Level
Gated 50 W
Impedance
1 MW
STOP
Positive
Slope
Negative
Level
50 W
MODE Burst Impedance
1 MW
Burst Count
STOP
Positive
Slope
Negative

Level
Waveform
Advance 50 W
Impedance
1 MW
STOP
Positive
Slope
Negative

Level
50 W
Autostep Impedance
1 MW
Select Autostep
File

STOP
Start
Sync
End

Figure 3 Ć160: MODE Menu Structure

3 Ć230 AWG2021 User Manual

 MODE Menu

Menu Functions
The following table describes the function of each of the menu items and gives
the number of the page on which you can find a more detailed explanation of that
item.

Table 3Ć15: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Cont Setting the operatiang mode 3 Ć233
Triggered 3 Ć233
Gated 3 Ć234
Burst 3 Ć235
Waveform Advance 3 Ć236
Autostep 3 Ć238
Slope Setting trigger parameters for an external 3 Ć241
trigger (gate)
Polarity 3 Ć241
Level 3 Ć241
Impedance 3 Ć241
Select Autostep File Selecting autostep files 3 Ć239
STOP Stopping waveform output 3 Ć233
Sync Setting sync signal 3 Ć242

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć231

MODE Menu

MODE Menu Display

Figure 3 -161 shows the general display for the MODE menu.

4 5

Figure 3 Ć161: MODE Menu CRT Display

(1) Channel Display Shows the channel for the waveform/sequence file names and
lists.
(2) Waveform/Sequence The name of the waveform or sequence file being output is
shown for each channel. This waveform or sequence file is
selected with the SETUP menu Waveform Sequence item.
For Autostep mode, the name of the waveform or sequence file
for the current output step of the steps programmed with the
autostep editor is shown for each channel.
(3) List The contents of the waveform or sequence files described in
(2), above, are displayed for each channel. In Waveform
Advance mode, the name of the file being output is displayed
in the list inverted.

3 Ć232 AWG2021 User Manual

 MODE Menu

(4) Operating Mode Status       MODE   

     Cont Triggered Gated
Burst Waveform Advance  Autostep
(5) Trigger Status           


Stopped       
   
    SETUP 
Waiting for Trigger       
   
    SETUP       
    
Running           
   

Setting the Operating Mode

Select the operating (output) mode – either: Cont, Triggered, Gated and Burst
trigger mode, Waveform Advance mode, or Autostep mode – by pressing the
corresponding button in the bottom menu.


. The operating mode set with the MODE menu has no effect on the
function waveform generation (FG) operating mode.

In the operating mode excluding Cont, if the side menu STOP item is selected
during waveform output, the output is stopped and the system returns to the start
of the waveform or sequence.
Here is how each operating mode works.

Cont Mode As soon as Cont mode is selected, continuous output of the specified waveform
or sequence waveform begins. No side menu is displayed while Cont is selected.

Triggered Mode In Triggered mode, the specified waveform or sequence waveform is output
once for each trigger received. The trigger signal depends on the trigger source.
It can be generated from the external trigger signal applied to the TRIGGER
INPUT connector or by pressing the front panel MANUAL button. During
waveform output, if the MANUAL button is pressed or another external trigger
signal is generated, such a trigger has no effect.
When Triggered is selected, the following items will be displayed in the side
menu:
Slope
Level

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć233

MODE Menu

Impedance
STOP
The Slope, Level and Impedance items are used to set the trigger conditions for
the external trigger signal.
Figure 3 -162 shows the output waveform for an external trigger signal.

 
   

  

Figure 3 Ć162: Output Waveform for External Trigger Signal in Triggered Mode

Gated Mode Use Gated mode to control waveform or sequence output with a gate signal. The
gate signal depends on the gate source. It can be generated from the external gate
signal applied to the TRIGGER INPUT connector or while the front panel
MANUAL button is pressed.
While the front panel MANUAL button is pressed, the specified waveform or
sequence is output. When you let the MANUAL button go, the waveform output
stops. When you press the MANUAL button again, the waveform or sequence
output resumes from the level where it left off. While you are pressing the
MANUAL button, if you press any other button, the instrument goes back to the
mode before the MANUAL button was pressed.
The specified waveform or sequence waveform is output while a valid external
gate signal is being received through the TRIGGER INPUT connector. After
output stops, at the next external gate signal, the waveform or sequence resumes
from the waveform level where it left off.
When Gated is selected, the following items will be displayed in the side menu:
Polarity
Level

3 Ć234 AWG2021 User Manual

 MODE Menu

Impedance
STOP
The Polarity, Level and Impedance items are used to set the gate conditions for
the external gate signal.
Figure 3 -163 shows the output waveform for an external gate signal.

 
  

  

Figure 3 Ć163: Output Waveform for External Gate Signal in Gated Mode

Burst Mode Use Burst mode to output the specified waveform or sequence for the burst
count when a trigger is generated, then stop output. The trigger signal depends
on the trigger source. It can be generated from the external trigger signal applied
to the TRIGGER INPUT connector or by pressing the front panel MANUAL
button.
During waveform output, if the MANUAL button is pressed or another external
trigger signal is generated, this trigger has no effect.
When Burst is selected, the following items will be displayed in the side menu:
Polarity
Level
Impedance
Burst Count
STOP
The Slope, Level and Impedance items are used to set the trigger conditions for
the external trigger signal.
Figure 3 -164 shows the output waveform for an external trigger signal.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć235

MODE Menu

   

 


  

 


Figure 3 Ć164: Output Waveform for External Trigger Signal in Burst Mode

Setting Burst Count. Burst Count sets the number of repetitions of the waveform
or sequence that are output with the trigger signal. This count can be from 1 to
65 535.

Waveform Advance Mode Use Waveform Advance mode to output a series of specified waveforms, in
order, with a new trigger initiating the advance to output the next waveform.
Thus, in this mode, the repetition count defined for each waveform in the
sequence file (defined with the sequence editor) is ignored. Each waveform is
output continuously until the next trigger is received. When the last waveform
defined is reached, this mode returns to the first waveform again.


. Waveforms are output in line with the output parameters designated in the
SETUP menu for that sequence file.

When Waveform Advance is selected, the following items will be displayed in

the side menu:
Slope
Level
Impedance
STOP
The Slope, Level and Impedance items are used to set the trigger conditions for
the external trigger signal.
When this instrument goes into Waveform Advance mode, it waits for a trigger
to be generated. This trigger can be generated from the external trigger signal

3 Ć236 AWG2021 User Manual

 MODE Menu

applied to the TRIGGER INPUT connector or by pressing the front panel

MANUAL button.
In this mode, the first waveform is output over and over again for each channel
when a trigger signal is received. When the next trigger signal is received, output
of the first waveform stops after the end point of that waveform and then the
second waveform is output in the same manner. The next waveform is not started
at the moment a trigger is received, but rather at the completion of the previous
waveform.
In this way, waveforms are output for each channel one by one in sequence each
time a trigger signal is received. When a trigger signal is received while output
of the last waveform is in progress, the output stops at the end point of that
waveform and then the process begins again from output of the first waveform.
Each channel operates independently according to the number of waveform
points.
Table 3–15 and Figure 3 -165 show the output waveform for an external trigger
signal.

Table 3Ć16: Sequence File

File Name No. of Repetitions Output Conditions Waveform


   
  




 




 

 





Figure 3 Ć165: Output Waveform for External Trigger Signal in Waveform Advance
Mode

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć237

MODE Menu

In Waveform Advance mode not only sequence files, but also waveform files
can be used. In this case when the trigger is received, the file’s waveform is
output continuously.
When the sub sequences in a sequence file are output, they are expanded
individually in the waveform memory. In Waveform Advance mode, they may
not operate as intended. To avoid this, the function (Expand SEQ into WFM
item on the initial EDIT menu) is used to expand the sequence file into a
waveform file. See page 3 -12. Expanding a sub sequence into a waveform file
and registering it into the sequence file makes Waveform Advance mode easier
to use.

Autostep Mode Use Autostep mode to start an Autostep file created with the EDIT menu
Autostep editor. An Autostep file stores a program that specifies a waveform or
sequence file (including output parameters) for each channel for each step.
Autostep mode resembles Waveform Advance mode in that each time a trigger
is received, the display advances one waveform. However, in this mode the
output parameters for each waveform change as well. The operating mode for
each step is triggered. The waveform or sequence for the step is output once,
then output stops. Just as in other operating modes, the Autostep mode trigger
signal can be generated from the external trigger signal or by pressing the front
panel MANUAL button.


. During Autostep mode, changes to the output parameters with the
SETUP menu have no effect.

When Autostep is selected, the following items will be displayed in the side
menu:
Slop
Level
Impedance
Select Autostep File
STOP
The Slope, Level and Impedance items are used to set the trigger conditions for
the external trigger signal.
During waveform output, if STOP is selected from the side menu, the waveform
output is stopped immediately and the system returns to the start of the Step:1
waveform or sequence.
When a trigger signal is received, the Step:1 waveform for each channel is
output once; when the next trigger signal is received, the Step:2 waveform is
output (once). When the next trigger signal is received while waveform output is

3 Ć238 AWG2021 User Manual

 MODE Menu

in progress, output stops after the end point of that waveform and then the
waveform for the next step is output.
Figure 3 -166 shows the output waveform for an external trigger signal.

Table 3Ć17: Autostep File

Step File Name Output Conditions Waveform

  

   
  

  

   
  

  

   
  

! 




   

 
     

Figure 3 Ć166: Output Waveform for External Trigger Signal in Autostep Mode

Starting an Autostep Program.

1. Select Autostep from the bottom menu.
2. Choose Select Autostep File from the side menu. When this item is
selected, the list of autostep files created with the autostep editor is
displayed. See Figure 3 -167.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć239

MODE Menu

Figure 3 Ć167: Autostep File List

3. Use the general purpose knob to select the file to start from the displayed list
of autostep files.
4. After selecting the file, to enter the selection, select O.K. from the sub-
menu. To cancel the file selection, select Cancel from the sub-menu. When
you select O.K., the autostep program starts.

3 Ć240 AWG2021 User Manual

 MODE Menu

Setting Trigger Parameters for an External Trigger (Gate)

The external trigger (gate) signal is input from the TRIGGER INPUT connector
on the front panel. The maximum input voltage is ±10 V into a 1 MW input
impedance, and the maximum input voltage is 5 VRMS into a 50 W input
impedance.
Use the Slope or Polarity, and Level items in the side menu of the MODE menu
to set trigger (gate) parameters for an external trigger (gate) signal.

Slope. This menu item sets the slope for the external trigger signal. Press the
Slope button in the side menu and select either Positive or Negative. When
Positive is selected, the output is triggered at the rising edge of the external
trigger signal; when Negative is selected, the output is triggered at the
falling edge of the external trigger signal.

Polarity (Gated mode). This menu item sets the polarity for the gate that
outputs the waveform or sequence with an external gate signal. Press the
Polarity button in the side menu and select either Positive or Negative.
When Positive is selected, the waveform or sequence is output while the
level of the gate signal is higher than the gate level set with the side menu
Level item. When Negative is selected, the waveform or sequence is output
while the level of the gate signal is lower than the set gate level.

Level. This item sets the trigger (gate) level for an external trigger (gate)
signal. Press the Level button in the side menu, then set the level with the
numeric keys or the general purpose knob. The trigger (gate) level can be set
in the range –5.0 V to 5.0 V in steps of 0.1 V.
Figure 3 -168 shows the slope (polarity) and level controls.

   



 



      

Figure 3 Ć168: Slope and Level Controls

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć241

MODE Menu

Impedance. This menu item sets the external trigger (gate) source input
impedance to either 50 W or 1 MW. Press the Impedance button in the side
menu to select this item.

Setting Sync Signal

Use the Sync menu item to select the timing with which the sync signal is
generated to either the Start or End of the waveform or sequence. Each time the
Sync button is pressed, the selection toggles between Start and End. This
setting is the same for CH1 and CH2.
The sync signals have a pulse width of 100 ns and a level of 1.2 V with a 50 W
terminator. These signals are output from the front panel CH1 SYNC output
connector and the rear panel CH2 SYNC OUT connector (Option 02).

Start. In each operating mode, the sync signal is generated when the trigger
or gate signal is generated. However, In Cont mode, the sync signal can not
be set to Start.

End. In each operating mode, the sync signal is generated at the end of the
waveform or sequence waveform. In Burst mode, the sync signal is
generated at the end of the burst count.


. When the Sync setting is switched from Start to End, the sync output is
generated.

3 Ć242 AWG2021 User Manual

LOAD/SAVE Menu

General Description
Press the LOAD/SAVE button in the MENU column to display the LOAD or
SAVE menu. Press the Load or Save button in the bottom menu to display the
desired menu.
Use the LOAD menu to load files into internal (random access) memory from
the instrument’s internal non-volatile RAM memory (NVRam), from a floppy
disk (Disk), or from another instrument through the GPIB interface.


. In this section, the internal non-volatile memory and the floppy disks are
referred to as mass memory.

The SAVE menu saves files from internal memory of the instrument to mass
memory.


. When a sequence file is loaded or saved with the LOAD/SAVE menu, the
waveforms and sequence files used in that sequence file are also loaded or
saved.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć243

LOAD/SAVE Menu

Memory Capacity
When you exit from the EDIT menu, the files you created with the editors are
saved into the AWG2021 internal memory (RAM). Up to 400 files (depending
on size) can be saved in the internal memory.


. The data in this instrument’s internal memory is lost when the power is
switched off. Therefore, you must save any necessary data to mass memory.

Like internal memory, the AWG2021 internal non-volatile memory (NVRam)

can hold up to 400 files. The NVRam has 512 Kbytes, almost all of which is
used for saving files. The contents of this memory are retained even when the
power is switched off.
The capacity of a floppy disk depends on its format. Disks can use directory
hierarchies and files can be stored in each of the directories. The extension for a
directory is .DIR. For further information on creating directories, see the
explanation in “Using the Disk Menu” in Section 4E, “UTILITY Menu.”
Figure 3 -169 shows the relationship between loading and saving, and the
different types of memory.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 
!


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 

   

ÎÎÎÎÎ


!

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ
 
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
  

Figure 3 Ć169: Relationship Between Memory and Execution of Load/Save

3 Ć244 AWG2021 User Manual

 LOAD/SAVE Menu

LOAD/SAVE Menu Structure

Figure 3 -170 shows the configuration of the LOAD/SAVE menu.

MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu Bottom Menu Side Menu

Load
Load Load All
Change Directory
Disk Save
Save All
Save
Change Directory
Save as ASCII *1

Load
Load
Device Load All
NVRam
Save
Save
Save All

Load
LOAD/SAVE GPIB Load Load Without
Preamble
Select Source
Address
from Disk
Auto Load from NVRam
Off

*1 This item is displayed when an equation file (.EQU) has been selected in the list of files contained in the
instrument's internal memory.

Figure 3 Ć170: LOAD/SAVE Menu Structure

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć245

LOAD/SAVE Menu

Menu Functions
The following table describes the function of each menu item and gives the page
number where you can find a more detailed explanation of that item.

Table 3Ć18: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

"    " 
%
     $   
%
  $
" "     $   
%
$

 #"    $ 
%
!   !   
%

3 Ć246 AWG2021 User Manual

 LOAD/SAVE Menu

LOAD Menu Display

Figure 3 -171 shows the general display for the LOAD menu. A description for
each callout follows.

Figure 3 Ć171: LOAD Menu CRT Screen Display

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć247

LOAD/SAVE Menu

(1) Internal memory file list This is a list of the files currently loaded into internal memory.
The list shows the file names, the file types, file sizes (in
bytes), the date and time the file was created, and a comment.
The space remaining in internal memory, into which files can
be loaded, is displayed in the upper rightĆhand corner of the
list.
For the LOAD menu, when a file is loaded into internal
memory from mass memory or from another instrument
through the GPIB interface, that file is added to this list.
For the SAVE menu, you can select files to save from this list
to mass memory.
(2) Mass memory file list This list is displayed when mass memory has been selected for
Device. It contains all files that have been saved to mass
memory. The file data is the same as in (1), above.
For the LOAD menu, you can select files to load from this list
to the AWG2021 internal memory.
For the SAVE menu, when a file is saved from internal memory
of the instrument to mass memory, the saved file is added to
this list.
(3) GPIB file list This list is displayed when GPIB has been selected for Device.
It shows all other instruments connected to this instrument
through the GPIB interface. Waveform data can be sent to the
internal memory of this instrument from the instruments shown
in this list. When waveform files are loaded in this manner, a
name appears in the Loaded as" column.

3 Ć248 AWG2021 User Manual

 LOAD/SAVE Menu

Selecting the Device

Select Device to select the source from which files are loaded into the AWG2021
internal memory and the destination to which files are saved from internal
memory. You may select Disk, NVRam or GPIB.
1. Select Device from the bottom menu.
2. Select Disk, NVRam or GPIB from the side menu.
The following items are listed in the side menu:
Disk A floppy disk. Files are saved to or loaded from a floppy
disk inserted into the floppy disk drive on the right side of
the instrument.
NVRam The instrument’s internal non-volatile RAM.
GPIB The GPIB interface. Used to transfer waveform data directly
from another instrument to this instrument through a GPIB
cable.
To transfer waveform data through the GPIB interface, the remote port must be
set to GPIB and the GPIB operating mode must be set to Waveform Transfer.
If this is not done, the following message will appear when you select the GPIB
item:

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
          

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 
     

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
         

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
        

Selecting O.K. in the sub-menu at this point will cause these items to be set to
the above items automatically.
Table 3-19 shows a list of instruments for which direct transfer of waveform data
to this instrument is supported.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć249

LOAD/SAVE Menu

Table 3Ć19: Supported Instruments

Manufacturer Model
Tektronix TDS Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope
TDS300 Series, TDS400 Series, TDS500 [A] Series, TDS600 [A]
Series
2400 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope
2430 [A], 2432, 2440
2200 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope
2212, 2221A, 2224, 2232
11K Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope
11201 [A], 11401, 11402 [A], 11403 [A]
DSA Series Digitizing Analyzer
DSA601 [A], DSA602 [A]
RTD720 Waveform Digitizer
9500 Series First Data Cache
9503, 9504 (Use together with RTD710 [A])
Sony Tektronix RTD710 Series Waveform Digitizer
RTD710[A]
AWG2000 Series Arbitrary Waveform Generator
AWG2005, AWG2020, AWG2021, AWG2040
AFG2020 Function Waveform Generator
Hewlett Packard 54600 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope
HP54501A, HP54502A, HP54503A, HP54504A, HP54510A
54500 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope
HP54600A, HP54601A, HP54602A
LeCroy 94x0 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope
9410, 9414, 9420, 9424, 9430, 9450
Yokogawa Electric DL1000 Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope
DL1100, DL1200 [E]

3 Ć250 AWG2021 User Manual

 LOAD/SAVE Menu

Loading Files from Mass Memory into Internal Memory

If Disk or NVRam has been selected for Device, the LOAD menu appears when
the Load item in the bottom menu is selected. See Figure 3 -172. The internal
memory file list is displayed on the upper screen and the list of files saved onto
mass memory is displayed on the lower screen.

Figure 3 Ć172: LOAD Menu

To load files into internal memory from mass memory, perform these steps:
1. Select Device from the bottom menu.
2. Select Disk or NVRam from the side menu.
When the Device is Disk, the Change Directory item is displayed on the
side menu. When this item is selected, the current directory can be changed.
This item is the same as the Change Directory item on the UTILITY menu.
See the explanation in “Using the Disk Menu” in Section 4E, “UTILITY
Menu.”
There is no directory hierarchy for the NVRam.
3. Select Load from the bottom menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć251

LOAD/SAVE Menu

4. Use the general purpose knob to select files to load into internal memory
from the mass memory file list.
5. Select Load from the side menu. The selected file is loaded into internal
memory.
When Load All is selected from the side menu, all the files in the specified
mass memory (for a disk, the current directory) are loaded into internal
memory.


. When Load or Load All is executed, and there is already a file in internal
memory with the same name as a file to be loaded, the system displays a
message asking you whether or not to overwrite the file now in internal memory
with the one being loaded. Answer O.K. or Cancel.


 AWG2021 User Manual

 LOAD/SAVE Menu

Saving Files from Internal Memory to Mass Memory

If Disk or NVram has been selected for Device, the SAVE menu appears when
the Save item is selected from the bottom menu. See Figure 3 -173. As for the
LOAD menu, the internal memory file list is displayed on the upper screen.
From this list you select the file to be saved to mass memory.

Figure 3 Ć173: SAVE Menu

To save files into mass memory from internal memory, perform these steps:
1. Select Device from the bottom menu.
2. Select Disk or NVRam from the side menu.
When the Device is Disk, Change Directory is displayed on the side menu
and the current directory can be changed.
3. Select Save from the bottom menu.
4. Use the general purpose knob to select the file to be saved to mass memory
from the internal memory file list.
5. Select Save from the side menu. The selected file is saved to the specified
mass memory (for a disk, the current directory).

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć253

LOAD/SAVE Menu

When Save All is selected from the side menu, all the files in the internal
memory are saved to the specified mass memory.


. When Save or Save All is executed, and there is already a file in the mass
memory with the same name as a file to be saved, the system asks you if you
want to replace the file now in mass memory with the one to be saved. Answer
either O.K. or Cancel.

Saving Data in Text The Save as ASCII item appears in the side menu when an equation file (.EQU)
Format has been selected from the list of files in internal memory and Disk has been
selected for Device. Use this item to save the (binary format) data in the equation
file in MS-DOS text format. Files saved in this manner are denoted by the
extension .EQA after the file name. See page 3 -259 for further information on
.EQA files.
The following items are written to the data of files saved in text format:

File Data Description

# COMMENT: <comment> The comment written to the selected equation file
(.EQU), if any
# WAVEFORM POINTS = The setting for number of waveform points (Waveform
<point count> Points)
Calculation formula

When comments and waveform point sizes are written to .EQA files as noted
above, these are reflected in the equation files (.EQU) created when the .EQA
files are loaded into this instrument.

3 Ć254 AWG2021 User Manual

 LOAD/SAVE Menu

Transferring Waveform Data Directly

When GPIB has been selected for Device, waveform data can be transferred
directly to the instrument from supported digital storage oscilloscopes, etc.
through the GPIB interface. See Table 3-19 for a list of supported instruments.

Loading Waveform Data To load a waveform file directly from one of the instruments for which direct
transfer of waveform data is supported:
1. Using a GPIB cable, connect this instrument to the instrument from which
waveform data is to be transferred, as shown in Figure 3 -174.

  
 

  



 


Figure 3 Ć174: Connecting Instruments

2. Create the waveform to be transferred on the source instrument.

3. Select Device from the bottom menu.
4. Select GPIB from the side menu.
A message will be displayed when Remote Port [UTILITY (MENU)

Misc (bottom menu)
Config... (side menu)
Remote Port (sub-menu)]
is set to RS232C or when GPIB is set to anything other than Waveform
Transfer. Pressing O.K. in response to this message will cause these settings
to be automatically changed to GPIB and Waveform Transfer, respectively,
and the instrument will be ready for direct waveform transfer through the
GPIB interface.
5. Select Load from the bottom menu.
6. Using the general purpose knob, select the channel and the name of the
instrument from which the data will be loaded from the “Name” column in
the GPIB Source list at the bottom of the screen. When waveform data is
loaded into the internal memory of the AWG2021, a waveform file will be

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć255

LOAD/SAVE Menu

created with the name shown in the “Loaded as” column. Figure 3 -175
shows the GPIB Source list.

Figure 3 Ć175: GPIB Source List

7. Choose Select Source Address from the side menu and, using the general
purpose knob, select the GPIB address for the instrument from which data is
to be loaded.
8. Select Load from the side menu.
Data transfer will begin and the transferred file will be added to the list of
files stored in internal memory at the top of the screen, under the name
shown in the “Loaded as” column.
Data transfers can include not only waveform data but output settings such
as clock frequency and amplitude as well. When the clock frequency and
amplitude exceed the allowable setting range in the SETUP menu, these
values will be replaced with the nearest allowable value (in other words, the
maximum or minimum value).
When Load Without Preamble from the side menu is selected, waveform
data is loaded by itself, i.e. without output settings. In such cases, the output
parameters are set to their default values.

Selecting Instruments The following procedure is used to select digital storage oscilloscopes made by
Made by Other other manufacturers. The procedure up to Step 5 is the same as that for “Loading
Manufacturers waveform data”, above.
1. Using the general purpose knob, select Others... from the GPIB Source list.
2. Press the Load button in the side menu. A list of models will appear.

3 Ć256 AWG2021 User Manual

 LOAD/SAVE Menu

Figure 3 Ć176: List of Supported Models Made by Other Manufacturers


. Contact a Tektronix sales office in the event that waveform transfer is not
possible from an instrument made by another manufacturer, due to an upgrade
or other change.

3. Using the general purpose knob, select the instrument in the list from which
data will be loaded.
4. Choose Select Source Address from the side menu and then use the general
purpose knob to select the GPIB address for the instrument from which files
will be loaded.
5. Select Load from the side menu. Data transfer will be performed and the
waveform file will be added to the list of files stored in internal memory at
the top of the screen, under the name shown in the “Loaded as” column.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć257

LOAD/SAVE Menu

Auto Loading
Use the side menu of the Auto Load to automatically load files from the mass
memory into the internal memory when the instrument is switched on.
1. Select Auto Load from the bottom menu.
2. Select an item from the side menu.
From Disk When the instrument is switched on, files are loaded
automatically from the floppy disk to the internal
memory. In this case, all the files in the AWG2021
directory are loaded. If there is no AWG2021
directory, no auto load is carried out. This directory
can be created with Disk on the UTILITY menu.
For details, see the explanation in “Using the Disk
Menu” in Section 4E “UTILITY Menu.”
From NVRam When the instrument is switched on, all the files in
the non-volatile memory are loaded automatically
into the internal memory.
Off Switches off auto loading.
When from Disk or from NVRam is selected from the side menu, go to the
next procedure.
3. Switch the AWG2021 power off, then on again. Double check that files are
automatically loaded from mass memory to internal memory the way you
selected from the side menu.

3 Ć258 AWG2021 User Manual

 LOAD/SAVE Menu

Supported Floppy Disk Files

Table 3-20 shows a list of file name extensions denoting the type of disk files
that can be loaded to the internal memory of the AWG2021.

Table 3Ć20: Supported Floppy Disk Files

Extension Description Result of Load Operation

.ISF Waveform data files saved in ISF .ISF, .WVN, .WFB ,.WFM ,.WAV and
format (Instrument Specific Format) .WDT files are automatically conĆ
using the waveform save function in verted into .WFM files in the
the S34TDS1 Data Manager softĆ AWG2021 instrument's internal
ware. format and then stored in internal
memory When this is done,
memory. done except
.WVN Waveform data files saved using the
for the .WFM file, the name of the
waveform save function in the
file is retained as is, only the extenĆ
S37UT01 Utility software.
sion changed to .WFM. In the .WFM
.WFB Waveform data files saved in binary file, file name and extension are as it
format on a DSA600A series instruĆ is.
ment.
.WFM Waveform data files created in a
TDS series instrument
.WAV Waveform data files created in the
LeCroy EASYWAVE software.
.WDT Waveform element files created in a
Yokogawa Electric AG series arbiĆ
trary waveform generator.
.EQA Equation files in MSĆDOS text format .EQA files are automatically conĆ
created in a PC editor, etc. verted into .EQU files in the
AWG2021 instrument's internal
format and then stored in internal
memory. When this is done, the
name of the file is retained as is,
only the extension changed to .EQU.
When the following items are written
to the .EQA file, these items are
reflected in the .EQU file.
# COMMENT: <comment>
# WAVEFORM POINTS =
<point count>

All of these files are displayed in the Catalog menu screens for Disk in the
UTILITY menu and Device Disk in the LOAD/SAVE menu, the same as files
with other extensions. The extension for each file is shown in the Type column.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć259

LOAD/SAVE Menu


. As with other files on the instrument, the Rename, Delete, Delete All,
Lock and other operations can be performed for these files, and they are also
subject to the Load All and Auto Load operations in the LOAD menu.

If unexpected file formats or file contents are encountered when loading .ISF,
.WVN, .WFB, .WFM, .WAV, .WDT or .EQA files, an error usually results and
“Invalid file format” or a similar message is displayed.

3 Ć260 AWG2021 User Manual

UTILITY Menu

General Description
Press the MENU column UTILITY button to display the UTILITY menu. The
bottom menu contains the Disk, NVRam, GPIB, RS232C, Date Time, Misc,
and Diag/Cal items. Use these items to do the following:
Disk Floppy disk format
Operating files saved onto disks
Disk directory creation and current directory change
NVRam Operating files saved onto internal non-volatile memory
(NVRam)
GPIB Setting GPIB Configuration. See Programmer manual for
details.
RS232C Setting RS-232-C parameters. See Programmer manual for
details.
Date Time Setting the Date and Time
Misc Setting the Display Brightness
Setting the Order of Files
Date/Time Display
Factory Setting
Deleting Data From Memory
Remote Port Settings
Settings for Hard Copy Output
System and GPIB/RS-232-C Status
I/O Event Reporting. See Programmer Manual for details.
Diag/Cal Diagnostics and Calibration

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć261

UTILITY Menu

UTILITY Menu Structure

Figure 3 -177 shows the configuration of the UTILITY menu.

MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu SubĆMenu

Rename
Delete
Delete All
Disk Lock
Change Directory
Make Directory
Format...

Rename
Delete
NVRam
Delete All
Lock

Talk/Listen Address
Waveform Transfer
GPIB
Talk Only
Off Bus
Baudrate
Data Bits
RS232C Parity
Stop Bits
Flagging
UTILITY
Year
Month
Date Time Day
Hour
Minute
Brightness
Display... Catalog Order
Date Time

Reset to Factory
Config... Secure Erase Memory
Remote Port
Misc
Format
Hardcopy...
Port
System
Status...
I/O

Diagnostics
Diag/Cal Calibrations
Interactive Test

Figure 3 Ć177: UTILITY Menu Structure

3 Ć262 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

Menu Functions
The following table describes the function of each of the menu items and gives
the number of the page on which you can find a more detailed explanation of that
item.

Table 3Ć21: Menu Functions

Menu Function Page

Disk Using the disk menu 3 Ć264
Rename Renaming a file 3 Ć8, 3 Ć272
Delete Deleting a file 3 Ć10, 3 Ć272
Delete All Deleting all files 3 Ć10, 3 Ć272
Lock Locking and unlocking a file 3 Ć11, 3 Ć272
Change Directory Changing directories 3 Ć268
Make Directory Creating directories 3 Ć268
Format... Floppy disk format 3 Ć265
NVRam Internal nonĆvolatile memory 3 Ć273
GPIB GPIB 3 Ć274
Talk/Listen Address Setting the GPIB configuration 3 Ć275
Waveform Transfer
Talk Only
Off Bus
RS232C RSĆ232ĆC 3 Ć276
Baudrate Setting the baud rate 3 Ć277
Data Bits Setting the number of data bits
Parity Setting the parity
Stop Bits Setting the number of stop bits
Flagging Setting flags
Date Time Setting the date and time 3 Ć278
Misc Other settings and displays 3 Ć279
Display... Setting the display 3 Ć279
Brightness Setting the display brightness 3 Ć280
Catalog Order Setting the order of files 3 Ć280
Date Time Date/Time display 3 Ć283

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć263

UTILITY Menu

Table 3Ć21: Menu Functions (Cont.)

Menu Function Page

Config... Configuration 3 Ć284
Reset to Factory Factory settings 3 Ć284
Secure Erase Memory Deleting data from memory 3 Ć285
Remote Port Remote port settings 3 Ć285
Hardcopy... Settings for hard copy output 3 Ć286
Format Selecting the format 3 Ć286
Port Selecting the port 3 Ć287
Status... Status display 3 Ć288
System System and GPIB/RSĆ232ĆC status 3 Ć288
I/O I/O event reporting 3 Ć289
Diag/Cal Diagnostics and calibrations 3 Ć290
Diagnostics Diagnostics 3 Ć290
Calibrations Calibrations 3 Ć292
Interactive Test Pattern display (For instrument 3 Ć293
adjustment)

Disk and Nonvolatile Memory

Save the files this instrument creates onto internal non-volatile memory and/or
3.5-inch floppy disks.

Using the Disk Menu This item can format disks, make directories on disks, change the current
directory, edit files saved to disk, etc.
Insert the 3.5-inch floppy disk into this instrument’s floppy disk drive, then
select Disk from the bottom menu. The files saved in the root directory and
AWG2021 directory are read out and displayed on the CRT screen. When Disk is
selected in the bottom menu, the following items will appear in the side menu:
Rename
Delete
Delete All
Lock
Change Directory
Make Directory
Format...

3 Ć264 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

The side menu is made up of 2 pages. Select More to display the second page of
the side menu.

Floppy Disk Format. This instrument can format 2DD (double density) and 2HD
(high density) disks in three different MS-DOS formats: IBM-PC format, NEC
PC9800 series format, and Toshiba J3100 series format. Formatted disks are
automatically labeled “AWG2021”.
New floppy disks must be formatted before they can be used. Figure 3 -178
shows the sub-menu displayed after formatting the disk.

Figure 3 Ć178: Format... SubĆMenu Display

Formatting disks. To format floppy disks, perform these steps:

1. Select Disk from the bottom menu.
2. Insert the 3.5-inch floppy disk to be formatted into the disk drive on the right
side panel of this instrument.


Formatting a disk destroys any data on that disk! Before formatting a
disk, make sure it contains no data you might ever need.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć265

UTILITY Menu

3. Select Format... from the second page of the side menu (More 2 of 2).
4. The currently selected format will appear in the Type item in the sub-menu.
Select the correct format with the general purpose knob. The following
formats can be selected for Type:
IBM-PC 2HD
PC9800 2HD
J3100 2HD
IBM-PC 2DD
PC9800 2DD
When floppy disks written by this instrument are used in a personal computer,
select the correct format type as indicated by Table 3-22.

Table 3Ć22: MSĆDOS Formats for 3.5Ćinch Disks

Format Type IBMĆPC PC9800 J3100



    

     
     
      

       
1 : Format normally used on personal computer (format selected with AWG2021).
2 : Not regular format, but can be read and written.
3 : Can not be read or written.


. The IBM-PC and J3100 2DD formats are the same. Thus, use the
IBM-PC 2DD format for J3100 2DD disks.

5. After selecting the format, select Execute from the sub-menu. This starts the
disk formatting. During formatting, a message to that effect, “Formatting
disk...” is displayed on the screen.


. A disk with its write prevent tab in the write-protected position cannot be
formatted. Slide the tab to the write-enable position, then try again. See the
discussion below of write prevention.

When formatting is complete, the message on the screen will disappear and
an empty file list will appear with the format type and available disk space
shown in the upper right-hand corner.

3 Ć266 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

6. Select Go Back from the sub-menu. The system returns from the Format...
current sub-menu to the previous side menu.
7. Pressing the eject button on the right side of the disk drive ejects the floppy
disk.

Handling Floppy Disks. 3.5I floppy disks are easy to store and use. However, to
prevent them from being damaged and to ensure the integrity of the data stored
on them, you should be careful of the following:
H Do not place disks near a strong magnetic field or near a ferromagnetic
substance that may cause them to be magnetized, as this will corrupt the data
stored on the disk and result in errors.
H Do not expose disks to direct sunlight or high temperatures for long periods
of time. Also, avoid storing them in places subject to extreme cold or high
humidity. When bringing disks into a room from outside, do not use them
immediately; let them become acclimated to the environment before use.
H Do not touch the recording medium on the surface of the disk. Fingerprints
on the surface of the disk may cause the heads to skip, resulting in errors.
H When storing disks for long periods of time, be sure to place them in their
protective cases.
H Be sure to place labels in the proper location on the disks.
H Do not press the eject button on the disk drive to eject the floppy disk while
the indicator light is lit. This may cause the data stored on the disk to
become corrupted, resulting in errors.

Protecting Disks From Accidental Erasure. There is a write protect tab on the
underside of the floppy disk. To lock the disk, press this tab down toward the
edge of the disk to expose the little hole underneath, as shown in Figure 3 -179.
Locking the disk will prevent it from being written to or erased. To unlock the
disk and enable it to be written to or erased, move the tab back toward the center
of the disk so it covers the hole.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć267

UTILITY Menu

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
   

ÎÎ   


Figure 3 Ć179: Write Protect Tab on a Floppy Disk

Creating and Changing Directories. When there are many files, it becomes
difficult to manage them. Placing all files of the same type into separate
directories makes it easier to manage the files.
In addition to files, directories can also contain sub-directories. With directories,
hierarchical structures can be constructed with successive directories. Directories
are distinguished by their names. The original directory that contains all the files
and directories is called the root directory and the directories within it are called
sub-directories.
This instrument can make directories to manage files the same as with MS-DOS.
Directories are created with the Make Directory side menu item. The suffix
“.DIR” is attached to created directories.
To operate on a certain file within a given sub-directory, it is necessary to move
to that sub-directory. Thus, use the Change Directory side menu item to move
to the desired sub-directory. The next directory is now the object of any future
operations and is called the current directory. The LOAD/SAVE menu can be
used to change directories too.
The setting of the LOAD/SAVE menu and Auto Load determine the directory at
power on. When the Auto Load item is set to Disk, the AWG2021 sub-directory
is selected automatically . (In this case, this AWG2021 sub-directory must exist.)
If Auto Load is Off, the current directory is the root directory.

3 Ć268 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu


. A file hierarchy with multiple layers can be created on the disk using up
to 54 characters including the \ character. The shorter the directory name, the
deeper the levels that you can create. When the directory display becomes too
large for the display area window, the initial section is omitted.

Example: Creating a Directory. For example, to create a sub-directory called

AWG2021, such as root directory: AWG2021 (DIR) – perform the following
steps.

     



If the AWG2021 sub-directory has been created ahead of time, the files under the
AWG2021 directory are automatically loaded into internal memory by the
LOAD/SAVE menu Auto Load setting, when power is switched on.
The following procedure assumes that the current directory is the root directory.
If the current directory is not the root directory, use Change Directory to change
the current directory to the root directory. (See the Step 5 and the following
steps.)
1. Select Disk from the bottom menu.
A list of the files and directories in the root directory of the inserted floppy
disk is displayed on the screen. See Figure 3 -180. Catalog:Disk \ on the
CRT screen shows that the current directory is the root directory.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć269

UTILITY Menu

Figure 3 Ć180: File and Directory Display in the Root Directory

2. Select More 1 of 2, then Make Directory from the side menu. The menu for
naming the directory is displayed.
3. Use the general purpose knob to input a directory name of AWG2021. See
Figure 3 -181. The method for inputting the directory name is the same as
the method for inputting a file name in the waveform editor. See “Naming a
File” in the discussion of the waveform editor.

3 Ć270 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

Figure 3 Ć181: Directory Name Input

4. After you have input the directory name, select O.K. from the sub-menu.
The AWG2021 directory is created in the floppy disk.

Example: Changing a Directory.

5. Select Change Directory from the side menu.
6. Use the general purpose knob to select the AWG2021 sub-directory you just
created from the directory list. See Figure 3 -182.

Figure 3 Ć182: Directory Displayed When Change Directory is Selected

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć271

UTILITY Menu

7. Select O.K. from the sub-menu. The current directory changes to the
AWG2021 directory you just made and the directory display becomes
Catalog:Disk\AWG2021\. At this time, the AWG2021 directory is empty.
See Figure 3 -183.

Figure 3 Ć183: File List for a Newly Created Directory

This completes the move of the current directory to the AWG2021 sub-direc-
tory. Files and new directories can be created in this directory. Next, here is
how to return the current directory to the root directory.
8. Again, select Change Directory from the side menu. Only “..” is displayed
in the directory list. Select O.K. from the sub-menu.
Selecting “..” from the directory list moves the current directory to the
directory above it. In this case, it is the root directory, so the system is back
where it started.

Operating Files Saved to Disk. The side menu has Rename, Delete, and Delete
All for to use on files. These items are the same as in the EDIT menu. See Page
3 -8 to 3 -10. These functions can rename and delete files. Directories can also be
deleted by selecting the Delete item. However, this is only possible when there
are no files and directories at levels below the directory to be deleted.

3 Ć272 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

Locking and Unlocking a File. This menu item locks a file. When a file is locked,
the file can neither be changed nor erased. It locks and unlocks a file the same as
the Lock item in the EDIT menu. See Page 3 -11.

Internal NonĆvolatile Files saved to the internal non-volatile memory can be manipulated with this
Memory bottom menu. When NVRam is selected from the bottom menu, the Rename,
Delete, Delete All, and Lock side menu items are displayed. These functions can
rename, delete, and lock files, the same as those in the EDIT menu. See Page
3 -8 to 3 -11.
Figure 3 -184 shows the menu displayed when NVRam is selected from the
bottom menu.

Figure 3 Ć184: Menu Displayed When NVRam is Selected

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć273

UTILITY Menu

Remote Interface
The instrument’s rear panel has two remote control interface ports: IEEE STD
488 (GPIB) and RS-232-C. (Note: There is no RS-232-C port when Option 04
has been installed.) A computer can be used to control the instrument remotely
through these interfaces.
The port is selected using the Remote Port item [UTILITY menu
Misc
(bottom menu)
Config... (side menu)
Remote Port.

GPIB These are simple descriptions of the GPIB connection and GPIB configuration
setting. For further details, see the Programmer Manual.

GPIB Connection. The cable from the GPIB controller (computer) is connected to
the IEEE STD 488 connector on this instrument’s rear panel.

Setting GPIB Configuration. Devices on the GPIB bus must be configured

compatibly to communicate.
Select GPIB from the bottom menu to set the GPIB configuration. See
Figure 3 -185. Use the side menu items to set the GPIB configuration and the
address of this instrument.

3 Ć274 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

Figure 3 Ć185: Menu Displayed When GPIB is Selected

The instrument can be set to one of four operating modes: talk/listen, waveform
transfer, talk only, or off-bus. However, you should be aware that talk only and
waveform transfer modes are not compliant with IEEE 488.2-1987.
Talk/Listen Select talk/listen mode from the side menu to
communicate with the controller via the GPIB.
When the Talk/Listen Address item is selected, the
operating mode for this instrument and other devices
is set to talk/listen or the general purpose knob and
the numeric keys set the GPIB address for this
instrument. The GPIB address setting range is 0–30.
Other devices on the bus cannot use the address
number allocated to this instrument.
Waveform Transfer Select Waveform Transfer mode from the side
menu to download waveform data. In this mode,
waveform data does not go through the controller; it
is downloaded directly to the internal memory of the
instrument from a digital storage oscilloscope or
other instrument. See Table 3-19 in Section 4D
LOAD/SAVE menu for a list of supported instru-
ments.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć275

UTILITY Menu

Actual waveform transfer is performed using the

LOAD/SAVE menu. See Page 3 -255.
Talk Only Select Talk Only from the side menu to output a
hard copy of the waveform data. When the Port
setting is GPIB [UTILITY menu
Misc (bottom
menu)
Hardcopy... (side menu)
Port
(sub-menu)], pressing the HARDCOPY button on
the front panel causes a hard copy of the waveform
to be output.
Off Bus Select Off Bus from the side menu to disconnect the
AWG2021 from the GPIB bus.

RSĆ232ĆC Use the RS-232-C interface on the rear panel to allow remote control by a host
computer. These are simple descriptions of the RS-232-C connection and
RS-232-C parameter setting. For further details, see the AWG2000 series
Programmer Manual.

RSĆ232ĆC Connection. To select the RS-232-C port, select RS232C for Remote
Port [UTILITY menu
Misc (bottom menu)
Config... (side menu)

Remote Port (sub-menu)].
A cable is connected between the computer and this instrument’s RS-232-C
connector. The AWG2021 must be configured as the data communications
equipment (DCE) and the host computer must be configured as the data terminal
equipment (DTE).

Setting the RSĆ232ĆC Parameters. The RS-232-C parameters for both devices
must match to allow communication between this instrument and the host
computer.
Before communicating with the connected computer, the RS-232-C parameters
are set with the menu in Figure 3 -186. Press the side button for the desired
parameter and set it with the general purpose knob.

3 Ć276 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

Figure 3 Ć186: Menu Displayed When RS232C is Selected

Baudrate Sets the transmission rate. The transmission rate of

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 can be
selected with the general purpose knob. Set this
parameter to the same value as set on the computer.
Parity Sets the error detection method. The general purpose
knob is used to select parity of None, Odd, or
Even. Set this parameter to match the connected
computer’s parity.
Data Bits Selects 7 or 8 data bits. Set this parameter to match
the connected computer’s data bits.
Stop Bits Selects 1 or 2 stop bits. Set this parameter to match
the connected computer’s stop bits.
Flagging Selects None, Soft, or Hard. This item is used to
announce that the input buffer is full. Until the
transmission allowed instruction is issued, the other
device stops the data transfer.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć277

UTILITY Menu

Date and Time

When Date Time is selected from the bottom menu, a clock will appear on the
screen, allowing you to set the date and time. The side menu will display items
for Year, Month, Day, Hour and Minute. Pressing one of these items in the
side menu will make it possible to set that clock parameter using the general
purpose knob.
The set date and time are recorded as the time stamp when a file is created.
Figure 3 -187 shows the menu displayed when Date Time is selected.

Figure 3 Ć187: Menu Displayed When Date Time is Selected

Setting the Date and Time 1. Select Date Time from the bottom menu.
2. Select Year from the side menu. Use the general purpose knob or the
numeric keys to set the year.
3. In the same way, select the Month, Day, and Hour and set the month, day,
and hour.
4. Select Minute from the side menu. Each time the minute is set with the
general purpose knob, the second is reset to 00. When the time is set, the

3 Ć278 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

minute is set at the same time the second is reset to 0. (The second is also
reset to 00 when the hour is set with Hour.)
The date and time can be permanently displayed on the screen if desired. See
“Date/Time Display” on Page 3 -283.

Other Settings and Displays

Use Misc from the bottom menu to set or display the following:

Display...
Brightness Setting the Display Brightness
Catalog Order Setting the Order of Files
Date Time Date/Time Display

Config...
Reset to Factory Factory Settings
Secure Erase Memory Deleting Data From Memory
Remote Port Remote Port Settings

Hardcopy...
Format Selecting the Hard Copy Output Format
Port Selecting the Hard Copy Output Port

Status...
System System and GPIB/RS-232-C Status
I/O I/O Event Reporting

Setting the Display The following diagram shows the menu configuration for Display....






    





 


We will discuss the Brightness, Catalog Order and Date Time items in the
sub-menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć279

UTILITY Menu

Setting the Display Brightness. The AWG2021 screen has three levels of
brightness. These levels are set with the Brightness menu item.
To set the screen brightness:
1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.
2. Select Display... from the side menu.
3. Select Brightness from the sub-menu.
4. Use the numeric keys or general purpose knob to input the appropriate
display brightness. The display brightness can be adjusted in steps of 1% in
the range 0 – 100%. The default display brightness is 70%.

Figure 3 Ć188: Setting the Display Brightness

Setting the Order of Files. Use this item to set the order in which files are
displayed in the catalog. You can display files sorted by file name, date and time
or file type (extension). Figure 3 -189 shows the screen when Catalog Order
has been chosen from the sub-menu.

3 Ć280 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

Figure 3 Ć189: Menu Displayed when Catalog Order is Selected

The files in the catalog are displayed in the initial EDIT menu, LOAD/SAVE
and UTILITY menus. Changing the file order in a catalog will change the order
in all menus. Figure 3 -190 shows the list of files as shown in the initial EDIT
menu.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć281

UTILITY Menu

Figure 3 Ć190: Catalog Files

Files in a catalog can be displayed by the following sorting conditions:

Name1: Name
Files are displayed by file name (Name) in ASCII code order.

Name2: Name-Reverse
Files are displayed by file name (Name) in reverse ASCII code order.

Time1: Time
Files are displayed by creation date (Date & Time), from newest to oldest.

Time2: Time-Reverse
Files are displayed by creation date (Date & Time), from oldest to newest.

Type1: Type
Files are displayed by extension (Type) in alphabetical order.

Type2: Type Name-Reverse
Files are displayed by extension (Type) in alphabetical order and, within
each file type, by name (Name) in reverse ASCII code order.

Type3: Type Time
Files are displayed by extension (Type) in alphabetical order and, within
each file type, by creation date (Date & Time) from newest to oldest.

Type4: Type Time-Reverse
Files are displayed by extension (Type) in alphabetical order and, within
each file type, by creation date (Date & Time) from oldest to newest.

3 Ć282 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

To change the order in which files are displayed to Type4:

1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.
2. Select Display... from the side menu.
3. Select Catalog Order from the sub-menu.
4. Use the general purpose knob to select Type4.
5. Press the EDIT button in the MENU column. Check to make sure that the
files are sorted in the order you have selected.
Figure 3 -191 shows the files displayed in Type4 format, with files sorted by
extension (Type) in alphabetical order and within each file type by creation
date (Date & Time), from oldest to newest.

Figure 3 Ć191: Catalog With Files Displayed in Type4 Format

Date/Time Display. Use this item to display the date and time.
1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.
2. Select Display... from the side menu.
3. Press Date Time in the sub-menu and select On. The current date and time
will be displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the screen, as shown in
Figure 3 -192.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć283

UTILITY Menu

  "

Figure 3 Ć192: Date/Time Display

Configuration The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Config... item.

 
 "

  !  "


  


In this section, we will discuss the Reset to Factory, Secure Erase Memory,
and Remote Port items in the sub-menu.

Factory Settings. Select Reset to Factory to reset this instrument’s settings to the
factory values.
1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.
2. Select Config... from the side menu.
3. Select Reset to Factory from the sub-menu.
4. The next message is displayed asking if it is OK to reset this instrument.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
   " ! 

Answer Cancel or O.K. When you select O.K., the instrument is reset to its
factory settings and the SETUP menu is displayed. Resetting the instrument to
factory default settings will not affect the data stored in the internal memory and
the non-volatile RAM (NVRam). The factory settings are listed in Appendix F.

Deleting Data From Memory. Use this item to delete the data stored in the internal
memory and the non-volatile RAM (NVRam). This will also cause all values

3 Ć284 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

with the exception of Date Time (date and time) to be restored to their default
settings. Default settings consist of the factory settings and the following items:
Remote Port GPIB
GPIB Operating Mode Talk/Listen
GPIB Address 1
RS-232-C Parameters
Baudrate 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flagging None


Once deleted, data cannot be restored.

1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.

2. Select Config... from the side menu.
3. Select Secure Erase Memory from the sub-menu.
4. The following message will appear, asking you to confirm that you really
want to delete the data from memory:

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
    

       


ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Answer Cancel or O.K. If you select O.K., all data will be deleted from
memory and settings will be restored to factory defaults, and then the SETUP
menu will appear.

Remote Port Settings. The instrument’s rear panel has two remote control
interface ports: IEEE STD 488 (GPIB) and RS-232-C. (Note: There is no
RS-232-C port when Option 03 or Option 04 has been installed.) Select the
desired port, depending on which interface you will be using.
1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.
2. Select Config... from the side menu.
3. Press the Remote Port button in the sub-menu and select either GPIB or
RS232C. The remote interface port that you have selected will be displayed
on the left side of the status line at the top of the screen.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć285

UTILITY Menu

Settings for Hard Copy When you output a hard copy, you can choose to either save the data displayed
Output on the screen on a floppy disk as a file, or output the data through the IEEE
STD 488 (GPIB) or RS-232-C interface.
When you select Hardcopy... from the side menu, you can select the format for
the hard copy and the output port. The following diagram shows the menu
configuration for the Hardcopy... menu item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
BMP

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Epson
EPS Mono

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Format
Thinkjet

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Misc Hardcopy... TIFF

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Disk
GPIB

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Port
RS232C

Selecting the Format. Use this item to select the output format for the hard copy.
You may select any one of five formats: BMP, Epson, EPS Mono, Thinkjet or
TIFF.

Figure 3 Ć193: Format Selection Menu

Table 3-23 shows the extension for each format and gives a brief description of
that format.

Table 3Ć23: Format Extensions

Format Extension Explanation

BMP BPM A format for a Windows black & white image file
Epson ESC A format for output to a 9Ćpin or 24Ćpin dot matrix printer
in ESC/P graphic mode.
EPS Mono EPS Encapsulated Postscript format for black & white image
files.

3 Ć286 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

Table 3Ć23: Format Extensions (Cont.)

Format Extension Explanation

        

  

   

Selecting the Port. Use this item to select the port from which the hard copy will
be output. Three choices are available: Disk, GPIB and RS232C.

Figure 3 Ć194: Port Selection Menu

In this example, you will print a hard copy of the SETUP menu in TIFF format
from the Disk port.
1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.
2. Select Hardcopy... from the side menu.
3. Select Format from the sub-menu.
4. Use the general purpose knob to select TIFF format.
5. Select Port from the sub-menu.
6. Use the general purpose knob to select Disc.
7. Select Go Back from the sub-menu.
8. Insert a formatted disk into the disk drive of the instrument.
9. Display the SETUP menu on the screen.
10. Press the HARDCOPY button on the front panel. A hard copy of the screen
will be printed. The following message will appear in the message area:
Hardcopy in progress.
If you want to stop printing the hard copy in mid-process, press the
HARDCOPY button again.
When the hard copy has been printed, the following message will appear:
Saved in SETUP000.TIF.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć287

UTILITY Menu

This means that the hard copy has been saved to the floppy disk in TIFF
format under the file name SETUP000.
File names and extensions will be assigned automatically based on the menu and
the format of the hard copy.

File Name Extension

SETUP 000 TIF

Name of screen Numbering

menu being printed

The file name is given the name of the screen menu being printed, as shown
below.

Menu File Name

SETUP SETUP
MODE MODE_
EDIT EDIT_
LOAD/SAVE LOAD_
UTILITY UTIL_
F.G FG___

Numbers will range from 0 to 999 for each menu.

Status Display The following diagram shows the menu configuration for the Status... item.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Misc

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Status...
System
I/O

System and GPIB/RSĆ232ĆC Status. Select System to display system and

GPIB/RS-232-C status window. The system status comprises the instrument
name, firmware version number, and installation data for each board.
The GPIB status is the address, and configuration. Status items other than the
address and configuration are set by the remote controller.

3 Ć288 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

The GPIB/RS-232-C status display consists of the following items: PSC,

Header, Verbose, Data and Debug.
In addition, the cumulative power-on time (Up Time) is displayed.
1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.
2. Select Status... from the side menu.
3. Select System from the sub-menu. System and GPIB/RS-232-C status data
will be displayed, as shown in Figure 3 -195.

Figure 3 Ć195: Menu Displayed When System is Selected

I/O Event Reporting. Use this item to display event reporting for the GPIB or
RS-232-C interface. See the programmer manual for more information on event
reporting.
1. Select Misc from the bottom menu.
2. Select Status... from the side menu.
3. Select I/O from the sub-menu. Event reporting will be displayed, as shown
in Figure 3 -196.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć289

UTILITY Menu

Figure 3 Ć196: I/O Event Reporting

Diagnostics and Use this item to run the diagnostics function or to calibrate the instrument.
Calibrations
Diagnostics. This instrument is equipped with diagnostics functions to compre-
hensively test itself. This makes it possible to check whether the instrument is
operating correctly. A series of tests are automatically carried out when the
instrument is started. These same diagnostics tests can also be initiated by
selecting the Diagnostics item. These diagnostics are helpful when repairing this
instrument. When the Diagnostics item is selected, the list of diagnostics items
shown in Figure 3 -197 will appear.

3 Ć290 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

Figure 3 Ć197: Diagnostics List

At the top of the diagnostics menu are three columns giving the status of the
diagnostic tests. The meaning of these three columns is as follows.
Diagnostics This column gives the name of the diagnostic test item. The
diagnostics items are executed individually or all together.
FPP is valid if Option 09 is installed. Setup CH2 and
Waveform Memory CH2 are valid if Option 02 is installed.
Result This column gives the results of each test item. If no error is
found in a test item, Pass is displayed. If an error is found,
Fail is displayed. If Option 02 or Option 09 is not installed,
the corresponding diagnostic items are not displayed and
only “–––” is displayed in their place.


. The waveform outputs obtained with an instrument that has not passed all
its tests are not reliable.

Code This column indicates an error code for the item where the
error was detected.


. If an error occurs, contact our representative closest to you.

1. Select Diag/Cal from the bottom menu.

2. Select Diagnostics from the side menu.
3. Turn the general purpose knob to select the desired diagnostic item. To
execute all the tests one after another, select All.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć291

UTILITY Menu

4. Select Execute from the side menu. The selected diagnostics items are
executed.
If the test finishes without a problem, Pass is displayed on the Result
column. If an error occurs, Fail is displayed. If the instrument fails a test, an
error code is displayed in the Code column.

Calibrations. This instrument is equipped with the system to calibrate itself. This
enables the AWG2021 to operate with greater precision. A series of calibrations
is carried out by selecting the Calibrations item.


. The AWG2021 must complete its warm up (about 20 minutes) and
stabilize in a 20_ C to 30_ C environment before calibration. When the
instrument is powered off while the calibrations is executed, the calibration data
in the memory may be loss.

When the Calibrations item is selected, the list of calibration items shown in
Figure 3 -198 will appear.

Figure 3 Ć198: Calibration List

The calibration menu is divided into three columns: Calibrations, Result, and
Code.
The calibration items are executed individually or all together.
Setup CH2 is valid when Option 02 is installed. The Result and Code columns
are the same as for the diagnostics menu.
1. Select Diag/Cal from the bottom menu.

3 Ć292 AWG2021 User Manual

 UTILITY Menu

2. Select Calibrations from the side menu.

3. Turn the general purpose knob to select the desired calibration. To execute
all the calibrations one after another, select All.
4. Select Execute from the side menu. The selected calibration item is carried
out.
If the calibration finishes without a problem, Pass is displayed on the Result
column. If an error occurs, Fail is displayed. If the instrument fails a
calibration, an error code is displayed in the Code column.


. If an error occurs, contact our representative closest to you.

Pattern Display (For Instrument Adjustment). This item is used when adjusting the
instrument. As it is not used for operation, a description is omitted here.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć293

UTILITY Menu

3 Ć294 AWG2021 User Manual

Function Waveform Generator Mode

General Description
Press the front panel F.G button to switch from arbitrary waveform generation
mode into function waveform generation (FG) mode. Select the desired
waveform with the bottom button. Then set the output parameters with the side
button. Hereafter, function waveform generator mode will be referred to as FG
mode.


. FG mode is an independent of the MENU column arbitrary waveform

generation mode menus. Therefore, the output parameters set with the SETUP
menu and the operation mode set with the MODE menu have no effect in FG
mode.

The following waveforms may be selected from the bottom menu:

Sine wave
Triangle wave
Square wave
Ramp wave
Pulse wave
The following output parameters for these waveforms may be set from the side
menu:
Frequency
Amplitude
Offset
Polarity
Duty (pulse wave only)
When a sine wave is selected, a 20 MHz cut-off filter is inserted. Table 3-24
shows the relationship between the frequency, the data point count, and the
marker signal width.

Table 3Ć24: Number of Data Points for Frequencies and Marker Signal
Width

Frequency Data Points Marker Signal Width

        
        
    
  

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć295

Function Waveform Generator Mode

The descriptions in this section are for an instrument with Option 02, CH2
output installed. Instruments without Option 02 have only the CH1 display.

Function Generator Menu Structure

Figure 3 -199 shows the configuration of the menus in FG mode:

MENU Button Bottom Menu Side Menu Select Item

CH1
Channel
CH2 *1

Frequency
Amplitude
Sine Offset
Normal
Polarity
Invert

Frequency
Amplitude
Triangle Offset
Normal
Polarity
Invert


Frequency
Amplitude
Square Offset
Normal
Polarity
Invert

Frequency
Amplitude
Ramp Offset
Normal
Polarity
Invert

Frequency
Amplitude
Offset
Pulse
Normal
Polarity
Invert
Duty

*1 Available when Option 02 has been installed.

Figure 3 Ć199: FG Mode Menu Structure

3 Ć296 AWG2021 User Manual

 Function Waveform Generator Mode

Function Generator Menu Display

Figure 3 -200 shows the general display for the FG mode menu. A description
for each callout follows.

Figure 3 Ć200: FG Mode Menu Display

(1) Channel waveform Displays the waveform set for that channel. When the channel
display area is enclosed by a box, it is possible to change the output
parameters for that waveform. The peak voltage for the
waveform is shown on the vertical axis to the left of the
waveform; this value is determined by the amplitude or the
offset setting. The horizontal axis (the dotted line in the center
of the waveform) indicates the zero line; changing the offset
will cause the zero line to move up or down.
(2) Waveform period Shows the period for the waveforms. This value is applied to all
waveforms.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć297

Function Waveform Generator Mode

Setting the Output Waveform

The following procedure is used to set the output waveform for a channel.

Selecting the Channel 1. Press the “Channel” button in the bottom menu and select the channel.
The “Channel” item is used to select the channel for which the waveform
and its output parameters will be set. The waveform for the selected channel
is displayed enclosed in a frame. If the instrument does not have the Option
02, only CH1 is displayed.

Selecting the Waveform 2. Press the bottom button corresponding to the desired type of waveform
(Sine, Triangle, Square, Ramp or Pulse).

Setting the Output 3. Select the output parameter item from the side menu and enter a value. For
Parameters details, see “Setting the Output Parameters for the Waveform” on the next
page.

Waveform Output 4. Press the On/Off button for the channel to which the waveform is to be
output. The selected waveform will be continuously output to that channel.


. In FG mode, the operation mode is always Cont, meaning that waveforms
are output continuously.

Setting the Output Parameters for the Waveform

The output parameter items are the same for each waveform. However, Pulse has
one extra side menu item, Duty.


. Frequency item is common for all channels. Amplitude, Offset and
Polarity items are set separately for each channel.

The following sections will focus on each of the items in the side menu for each
waveform type.

Setting the Frequency The frequency is set with a 4-digit number from 10.00 Hz to 2.500 MHz using
the numeric keys or the general purpose knob. Waveform periods(Period) are
displayed at the bottom of the screen.

3 Ć298 AWG2021 User Manual

 Function Waveform Generator Mode

Setting the Amplitude The amplitude can be set in steps of 1 mV within the range 0.050 V – 5.000 V
(P-P value). using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob. Figure 3 -201
shows a sine waveform whose amplitude has been set to 5V.

Figure 3 Ć201: Setting the Amplitude

Setting the Offset The offset for each waveform can be set in steps of 5 mV within the range
±2.5 V using the numeric keys or the general purpose knob. Figure 3 -202 shows
the waveform used in Figure 3 -201 after an offset of 1 V has been applied. The
dotted line in the figure indicates the zero line.

Figure 3 Ć202: Setting the Offset

Setting the Polarity This menu item sets the output waveform polarity. Each time the Polarity button
in the side menu is pressed, the polarity toggles between Normal and Invert and
the polarity of the displayed waveform is reversed. See Figure 3 -203. The figure
below at left shows a sine wave whose polarity has been set to “Normal,” the
figure on the right shows a sine wave whose polarity has been set to “Invert.”

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć299

Function Waveform Generator Mode

Figure 3 Ć203: Waveform Polarity

Setting the Duty Duty is added for the Pulse side menu. It allows you to set the duty cycle for
pulse waveforms. The duty is set to 0–100% in steps of 1%. Duty is set using
the numeric keys or the general purpose knob. When the duty is set to 0% or
100%, the wave will be DC. Figure 3 -204 shows a pulse waveform whose duty
value has been set to 30%.

Figure 3 Ć204: Setting the Duty Value for a Pulse Wave

External Output
The external output signals for FG mode are sync signals and marker signals.

Sync Signal The sync signal is generated at the end point for the waveform data. In the
frequency slower than 250 kHz, the sync signal is generated for every one cycle
waveform. In the frequency faster than 250 kHz, the sync signal is generated for
every two cycle waveforms. This is because the sync signal is generated for
every 200 data points, and 100 data points for the one cycle waveform is not a
multiple of 8 as explained at the Data Length in Section 3.

3 Ć300 AWG2021 User Manual

 Function Waveform Generator Mode

The sync signal is a 1.5 V signal into 50 W with a pulse width of 100 ns. These
signals are output from the front panel CH1 SYNC connector and the rear panel
CH2 SYNC OUT connector (for Option 02).

Marker Signal The marker signal is generated at the start point for the waveform data. It is a
2.5 V signal into 50 W, whose pulse width varies with the frequency of the
output signal (see Table 3-24, earlier in this section). These signals are output
from the front panel CH1 MARKER1 output connector and the rear panel CH1
MARKER2 OUT connector. When Option 02, the CH2 option, is installed, the
marker signals are output from the rear panel CH2 MARKER1 OUT and CH2
MARKER2 OUT connectors.

AWG2021 User Manual 3 Ć301

Function Waveform Generator Mode


 AWG2021 User Manual

Appendix A: Options and Accessories

This chapter describes the options, and standard and optional accessories
available for the AWG2021.

Options
The following options are available.
Option 02 (2-Channel Output)
Option 03 (ECL Digital Data Output)
Option 04 (TTL Digital Data Output)
Option 09 (FPP Board + FFT Editor/Convolution)
Option 1R (Rack Mount)
Option 1S (With WaveWriter S3FT400)
Option 95 (Certificate With Calibration Data)
Option B1 (With Service Manual)
Each of these options will be discussed in detail on the following pages.

Option 02 (2ĆChannel This option adds second channel. This results in a 2-channel display for SETUP,
Output) MODE and FG menus. Also, two additional connectors are added on the rear
panel (CH2 MARKER1 OUT and CH2 MARKER2 OUT). See “Rear Panel”
in Section 2 “Overview.”

Option 03 (ECL Digital Option 03 provides the following signals at the rear–panel output connector.
Data Output)

. An AWG2021 cannot be equipped with Option 03, Option 04 and Option
09 together. Select either Option 03, Option 04 or Option 09.

Data Output. The data (D0–D11) fed to theAWG2021 internal D/A converter is
buffered and delivered to the output connector. At the same time that the analog
waveform is output, the digital output can be obtained. The output is differential
ECL output.

AWG2021 User Manual AĆ1

Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Clock Output. The same clock that is fed to the AWG2021 internal D/A converter
is buffered like the data and delivered to the output connector. The clock output
is differential ECL output.
Figure A-1 is a block diagram of the digital data output option.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ



ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 
!
 


ÎÎÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ



ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎ  

ÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎ   

ÎÎÎÎÎ
  

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ  

ÎÎÎÎÎ 



 

Figure AĆ1: Block Diagram

AĆ2 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Output Connector Configuration. Figure A-2 shows the shape and pin number
location of the output connector, and Table A-1 shows the output signal for each
pin.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ


Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 

Figure AĆ2: Output Connector

Table AĆ1: Output Signal

Pin Number Signal Pin Number Signal

      
       
       
       

      
       
       
       

    
  
  


      
       
       
Pins 4, 33, 34, 37, 67, and 68 are not connected.
Pins that are not mentioned are connected to chassis ground.
~ = active low signal

Operation. Operation is the same as for the basic instrument. When a waveform
is not being output, the waveform’s initial data may be output to the connector.
At this time, no clock is generated.
When starting the waveform output, the clock is generated and the data is
updated.

AWG2021 User Manual AĆ3

Appendix A: Options and Accessories


. When loading a new waveform into waveform memory, resetting the
waveform memory, or during the hold off, excess output can be generated in the
data clock (see Figure A-3).


       
   
  
   

 



 

Figure AĆ3: Generation of Excess Output

AĆ4 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Output Circuit and Output Waveform. The ECL buffer (10E116) output is
connected directly to the output connector. When used, these signals must be
terminated to –2 V with a 50 W resistor at the receiving side (user side). If this
termination resistor is missing, the signals do not appear at the output connector.
The same is true for the clock output (see Figure A-4).


ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ


ÎÎ
 
 ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ





 

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
 


 ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î 

Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
 


ÎÎÎÎÎ






Figure AĆ4: Output Circuit

The data output signal skew is held to 1 ns max. The rise and fall time depend on
the buffer ICs, but neither is greater than 1 ns (see Figure A-5). Neither of these
specifications includes cables; it is specified at the output connector.

AWG2021 User Manual AĆ5

Appendix A: Options and Accessories

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Raise Time Fall Time

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Rise Time / Fall Time :

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
measure the time for the
waveform to go from 10%
to 90% of its peak value ;

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Clock
must be ≤ than 1ns.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Level High : -0.735V  -1.02V

Data
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Level Low: -1.6V  -1.95V

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Skew : Measure at 50% level of the waveform;
must be ≤ than 1ns.

Figure AĆ5: Output Waveform

If a cable is used, these waveforms have transmission distortion. It is necessary

to latch the data with a clock before using the waveform in actual circuits at the
cable receiving side (user side) and to reproduce the waveform. Delay the clock
with the delay line in order to reproduce the data reliably (see Figure A-6).

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Data 12
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
12
ÎÎÎÎ 12

ÎÎÎÎ
Buffer Latch

Delay Line
ÎÎÎÎ
Clock ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Buffer
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ 4 ns

Figure AĆ6: Data Latching

AĆ6 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Cable Application Example. The cable connecting the AWG2021 and the user
circuit is extremely critical for reliable operation at the maximum clock
frequency.


. Use a coaxial cable with a characteristic impedance of 50 W for all DATA
and CLOCK lines.
Keep cables as short as possible.Lengths under 1 meter are desirable.
To minimize signal reflection, carefully process the ends of the cables. Make the
section stripped of its outer covering as short as possible and connect the
external covering of the cable to the ground for the signals corresponding to
each connector. Figure A-7 is the strip length of the coaxial cable.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ      

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
 W  

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ  

Figure AĆ7: Coaxial Cable End Processing

A 1–meter long digital data cable (part number 012–1408–00) is supplied with
this option as a standard accessory. Figure A-8 shows an example of an optional
accessory cable and a receiving connector.

     
  
 

    

Figure AĆ8: Cable Examples

AWG2021 User Manual AĆ7

Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Digital Data Latch Example. Figure A-9 shows an example of an external circuit
for latching the digital data.

DELAY LINE 10E151

RESISTOR: 50 ohm 4 ns
CAPACITOR: 0.1 mF 10E116 MR
CLOCK
CLK DB0ĆDB11
*CLOCK
-2 V
Q0
D0
Q0
Q1
D1
Q1
-2 V
Q2
10E116 D2
D0 Q2
Q3
*D0 D3
Q3
Q4
D4
Q4
Q5
D5
-2 V Q5

10E151
MR
-2 V
CLK

Q0
D0
Q0
Q1
D1
Q1
Q2
D2
Q2
Q3
D3
Q3
Q4
D4
Q4
D11 10E116
Q5
D5
Q5
*D11

-2 V
-2 V

Figure AĆ9: Waveform Reproduction Circuit Example

AĆ8 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix A: Options and Accessories


. Tektronix cannot be responsible for the infringement of any third-party

industrial proprietary rights, copyrights, or other rights arising from the use of
these circuits.


. The ECB is a multi-layer board. One layer is used as ground, the other as
the power supply. The printed circuit pattern uses 50 W micro–strip lines and the
data lines are wired to the same length so that their delay times will be the same.
Except for the connectors, the parts are all SMD (surface–mounted device) to
connect at the minimum distance.
In laying out the runs, the fact that the signals are high frequency was taken into
account when leading lines around, etc. For example, the latch IC is right next
to the connector to shorten the run from the connector to the IC input. 50 W
termination resistors are connected to the IC pins. The 50 W resistor return is
connected through capacitance to the ground for the connector pin input signals.

Option 04 (Digital Data The AWG2021 arbitrary waveform generator with Option 04 installed can
Output) provide the following signals at the rear panel output connector. For the layout of
DIGITAL DATA OUT connectors on the rear panel, see “Rear Panel” in
Section 2 “Overview.”


. An AWG2021 cannot be equipped with Option 03, Option 04 and Option
09 together. Select either Option 03, Option 04 or Option 09.

Data Output. The data (D0–D11) fed to the internal D/A converter is buffered and
connected to the output connector. At the same time that the analog waveform is
output, the digital output can be obtained. Output will be at the TTL level.

Clock Output. The same clock that is fed to the internal D/A converter is buffered
in the same way as the data and connected to the connector. As in the case of
data output, clock output will be at the TTL level.
Figure A-10 is a block diagram of the digital data output Option 04.

AWG2021 User Manual AĆ9

Appendix A: Options and Accessories

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
12 Bits

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Waveform Data 12
D/A

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Memory

Clock

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Buffer

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
12

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Latch
12
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Data
D0D11
12

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Clock

Option 04
ÎÎÎÎÎ CLOCK
Output
Connector

Figure AĆ10: Block Diagram

Output Connector Configuration. Figure A-11 is the shape and pin number
location of the output connector, and Table A-2 is the output signal for each pin.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
2

ÎÎÎ
Î
26 2 26

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1 25 1 25

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CH1 DIGITAL DATA OUT CH2 DIGITAL DATA OUT

Figure AĆ11: The Shape of the Output Connector

Table AĆ2: Connector Pin Assignments

Pin Number Signal Pin Number Signal

1 D0 (LSB) 15 D7
3 D1 17 D8
5 D2 19 D9
7 D3 21 D10

AĆ10 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Table AĆ2: Connector Pin Assignments (Cont.)

Pin Number Signal Pin Number Signal

9 D4 23 D11 (MSB)
11 D5 25 Clock
13 D6

Pins other than those mentioned are connected to ground. The pin assignments
are identical for both CH1 and CH2.

Operation. Operation is the same as for the basic instrument. When a
waveform is not being output, the waveform’s initial data may be output to
the connector. At this time, no clock is generated.
When starting the waveform output, the clock is generated and the data is
updated.


. When loading a new waveform into waveform memory, resetting the
waveform memory, or during the hold off, excess output can be generated in the
data clock (see Figure A-12).

Load, reset, holdĆoff period:

Excess output can occur in
these periods.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Trigger
Signal ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Waveform ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure AĆ12: Generation of Excess Output

AWG2021 User Manual AĆ11

Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Output Circuit and Output Waveform. Figure A-13 shows a diagram of the
output circuit. After passing through an output resistance of 50 W, the buffer
output proceeds to the output connectors. The AWG2021 can be used
without terminating the receiving (user) side with a resistance of 50 W, but
when waveform distortion is great the 50 W termination is required.

ÎÎ
 W

ÎÎ



  W 

 W
ÎÎ


ÎÎ
  W 

Figure AĆ13: Output Circuit

The skew of the data output is held to ±2 ns between same channel, and is
held to ±4 ns between CH1 and CH2. See Figure A-14. This figure shows
the specifications for the waveform at the output connector when a cable is
not being used.

AĆ12 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix A: Options and Accessories

50% level
Clock
of the Clock

Skew:
within ±4 ns
Level High:2 V or greater
(into a 50 W termination)
Middle point
Data of the Data

Level Low:0.8 V or less

(into a 50 W termination)

Figure AĆ14: Output Waveform

If a cable is used, these waveforms have transmission distortion. It is

necessary to latch the data with a clock before using the waveform in actual
circuits at the cable receiving side (user side) and to reproduce the waveform.
Delay the clock with the delay line in order to reproduce the data reliably
(see Figure A-15).

12
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ 12
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ 12
Data
ÎÎÎÎ
Buffer

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Latch

ÎÎÎÎ Delay Line ÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Clock
ÎÎÎÎ
Buffer

ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
0  10 ns

Figure AĆ15: Data Latching

AWG2021 User Manual AĆ13

Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Cable Application Example. The cable connecting the AWG2021 and the user
circuit is extremely critical for reliable operation at the maximum clock
frequency.


. Use a coaxial cable with a characteristic impedance of 50 W for all DATA
and CLOCK lines.
Keep cables as short as possible.Lengths under 1-meter are desirable.

The AWG2021 for Option 04 comes with two digital data out cables as a
standard accessory. The cable is 1-meter long and is illustrated in Figure A-16.
The part number for the cable is 174-3192-00.

  
    
 

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
   

Figure AĆ16: Digital Data Out Cable

AĆ14 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Waveform Regeneration. In some cases, even a cable that has been carefully made
will create transmission distortion. Figure A-17 shows a concrete example of a
circuit used to regenerate the waveform.




  Î ÎÎÎ Î
Î ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
50 W     ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ



ÎÎÎÎÎ


Î Î ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ


50 W


ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ


ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
 


 W
ÎÎÎÎ
Figure AĆ17: Waveform Reproduction Circuit Example


. Tektronix cannot be responsible for the infringement of any third-party

industrial proprietary rights, copyrights, or other rights arising from the use of
these circuits.


. The ECB is a multi-layer board. One layer is used as ground and the
other as the power supply. The data lines are wired to the same length so that
their delay times will be the same.

AWG2021 User Manual AĆ15

Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Option 09 (FFT Editor and This option provides increased internal calculation speed and two additional
Convolution Process) editors: an FFT editor and a convolution editor. See Section 3 for more informa-
tion on the FFT and convolution waveform editors.

Option 1R (Rack Mount) The AWG2021 is shipped mounted in a 19-inch wide rack. In this configuration,
the floppy disk drive is accessed from the front panel. To change an AWG2021
into a rackmounted version, contact Tektronix for information.
For further information regarding the rack–mount adapter, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the rack–mount kit.

Option 1S (WaveWriter WaveWriter is an application program used to create waveforms for advanced
S3FT400) signal generating and processing instruments. Many Tektronix instruments, such
as arbitrary waveform generators and oscilloscopes with the “save-on-delta”
feature, are enhanced by this program. WaveWriter helps users configure
waveforms with a minimum of effort.
With the WaveWriter package, you can create new waveforms or edit waveforms
acquired from various instrument sources. WaveWriter gives you interactive
control of the waveform generating process.WaveWriter operates within the
Microsoft WindowsTM environment.

Option 95 (Certificate With A test result report will be provided with the AWG2005 when this option is
Calibration Data) specified.

Option B1 (service manual)

Power Cord Options

The following power cords are available with this instrument.

Table AĆ3: Power Cord Options

Option Description Part Number

A1 Europe, 220V/6A 161Ć0104Ć06
A2 United Kingdom, 240V/6A 161Ć0104Ć07
A3 Australia, 240V/6A 161Ć0104Ć05
A4 North America, 240V/6A 161Ć0104Ć08
A5 Switzerland, 220V/6A 161Ć0167Ć00

AĆ16 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix A: Options and Accessories

Accessories

Standard Accessories The AWG2021 includes the following standard accessories:

Standard Accessory Part Number

Manuals
User Manual 070Ć9097Ć50
Programmer Manual 070Ć8657ĆXX
Floppy disk
Sample Waveform Library Disk, 3.5Ćinch 063Ć2169ĆXX
Sample program, 3.5Ćinch 063Ć1708ĆXX
Performance Check / Adjustment Disk, 3.5Ćinch 063Ć2171ĆXX
Power cord 125V/6A 161Ć0230Ć01
Certificate of Calibration
ECL Digital Data Out Cable (Option 03) 012Ć1408ĆXX
TTL Digital Data Out Cable (Option 04) 174Ć3192ĆXX

Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are recommended for use with the instru-
ment.

Optional Accessory Part Number

Service Manual 070Ć9098Ć50
Front Cover 200Ć3232ĆXX
Accessory Pouch 016Ć1159ĆXX
Fuse 6A Fast (UL198G/3AG) 159Ć0239ĆXX
Fuse cap 200Ć2264ĆXX
Fuse 5A (T) (IEC127) 159Ć0210ĆXX
Fuse cap 200Ć2265ĆXX
GPIB Cable 012Ć0991ĆXX
ECL Digital Data Out Cable 012Ć1408ĆXX
50 W BNC Cable 012Ć1342ĆXX
50 W BNC Cable, double shielded 012Ć1256ĆXX
SMA (Ma) - BNC (Fe) Adapter 015Ć0554ĆXX
50 W BNC Terminator 011Ć0049ĆXX
Terminal Board (Option 03) 671Ć2957ĆXX

AWG2021 User Manual AĆ17

Appendix A: Options and Accessories


 AWG2021 User Manual

Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

The performance characteristics on the AWG2021 can be divided into three

categories:

Nominal Traits. General characteristics are described not by equipment
performance and limits but by such things as memory capacity.

Warranted Characteristics. Warranted characteristics are described in terms of
quantifiable performance limits which are guaranteed.

Typical Characteristics. Typical characteristics are described in terms of
typical or average performance for the AWG2021. The characteristics
described herein are not absolutely guaranteed.
Items marked with ** are tested in the Performance Verification (Appendix C)

Nominal Traits
This section will describe general characteristics of the AWG2021. These can be
divided into two main categories: electrical characteristics and mechanical
characteristics.

Table BĆ1: Electrical Characteristics

Characteristics Description
Operating Modes
Continuous Generates the waveform continuously.
Triggered Output quiescent until triggered by an external, GPIB or manual trigger; then
generates a waveform or sequence only one time.
Gated Same as triggered mode except periods are output for the duration of the gated
signal.
Burst Output quiescent until triggered by an external, GPIB or manual trigger; then
generates a waveform or sequence predefined count.
Waveform Advance Continuously generates the waveform in the predefined (edited) sequence and
the next trigger advances the waveform.
Autostep Outputs the first waveform in the predefined Autostep File once. The next
trigger advances to output the next waveform once and so on, for each
successive trigger.

AWG2021 User Manual BĆ1

Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ1: Electrical Characteristics (Cont.)

Characteristics Description
Arbitrary Waveforms
Waveform Memory
Memory Length
Waveform 256K × 12 bits
Marker1 256K × 1 bit
Marker2 256K × 1 bit
Waveform 64 to 256K in multiple of 8 data points
Sequence Memory 8K, 32 bits/word
Scan Counter 1 to 64 K (16 bits)
Burst Counter 1 to 64 K (16 bits)
Clock Generator
Frequency Range 10 Hz to 250 MHz
Display 4 digits
Resolution 0.1%  0.01%
Reference Oscillator
Type TCXO
Nominal Frequency 12.8 MHz
Filter
Characteristics Bessel
Main Output
Amplitude Except multiply(
) and add(
) operation
Range 0.05 to 5 VpĆp into 50 W
The amplitude range expands about 2 times (10 VpĆp) into open circuit. Its
actual value is two times the displayed value.
±10 V ≥ (The absolute peak Amplitude + Offset)
Resolution 1 mV
Offset
Range ±2.5 V into 50 W
The offset range expands about 2 times (-5 V  +5 V) into open circuit. Its
actual value is two times the displayed value.
±10 V ≥ (The absolute peak Amplitude + Offset)
-100 mA  +100 mA into 50 W (current source output)
Resolution 5 mV
Impedance 50 W

BĆ2 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ1: Electrical Characteristics (Cont.)

Characteristics Description
Auxiliary Output
SYNC When in F.G mode and the frequency is above 250 kHz, the Sync pulse occurs
one time per two waveforms.
Amplitude >1.2 V into 50 W, >2.4 V into open circuit
Impedance 50 W
MARKER1
Amplitude 2.5 V (+5%, -10%) into 50 W, 5 V (+5%, -10%) into open circuit
Impedance 50 W
Period Jitter Refer to Table B-1-1 (measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1)
Cycle to Cycle Jitter Refer to Table B-1-2 (measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1)
MARKER2
Amplitude 2.5 V (+5%, -10%) into 50 W, 5 V (+5%, -10%) into open circuit
Impedance 50 W
CLOCK
Amplitude 1 V into 50 W
Impedance 50 W
Period Jitter Refer to Table B-1-3 (measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1)
Cycle to Cycle Jitter Refer to Table B-1-4 (measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1)
ECL DIGITAL DATA OUT (Option 03)
Level ECL compatible
Output Signals Same wires to DAC
Data (D0  D11)
Clock
TTL DIGITAL DATA OUT (Option 04)
Output Signals
CH1 Data (D0  D11), Clock
CH2 (Option 02) Data (D0  D11), Clock
Amplitude >2 V into 50 W
Impedance 50 W
Connector 26-pin header
Auxiliary Input
Trigger
Threshold Level -5 V to 5V
Resolution 0.1 V
Impedance 1 MW with 30 pF (max) or 50 W

AWG2021 User Manual BĆ3

Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ1: Electrical Characteristics (Cont.)

Characteristics Description
AM
Range 2 VpĆp (-1V  1V) for 100% modulation
Impedance 10 kW
Clock
Impedance 50 W
Function Generator
Waveform Shape Sine, Triangle, Square, Ramp, Pulse
Output Parameter All of these values with the exception of frequency can be set independently for
each channel. Frequency settings apply to each channel.
Frequency 1.000 Hz to 2.500 MHz
Amplitude Can be set between 50 mV and 5 V in 1 mV increments
Offset Can be set between ±2.5 V in 5 mV increments
Polarity Normal, Invert
Duty 0% to 100% Pulse only. Can be set in 1% increments
Operating Mode Continuous mode
Auxiliary Output
Marker Signal 2.5 V into 50 W, generated at the starting point of the waveform. The pulse
width will vary depending on the frequency.
Display
CRT
Display Area 132mm(5.2 inches) horizontally by 99mm( 3.9 inches) vertically
Resolution 640 (H) ± 480 (V) pixels
AC Power Source
AC Line Power
Fuse Rating 6A fast blow, 250 V, UL198G(3AG) or 5 A (T), 250 V, IEC127
Battery
Type Li3 V, 650 mAH

Table B-1-1 Period Jitter (CH1 Marker 1 Out)

Clock=250MS/s Clock=100MS/s
StdDev Pk-Pk StdDev Pk-Pk
11.0 ps 60.0 ps 10.5 ps 50.0 ps

BĆ4 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table B-1-2 Cycle to Cycle Jitter (CH1 Marker 1 Out)

Clock=250MS/s Clock=100MS/s
StdDev Pk-Pk StdDev Pk-Pk
20.0 ps 110.0 ps 20.0 ps 90.0 ps

Table B-1-3 Period Jitter (Clock Out)

Clock=250MS/s Clock=100MS/s
StdDev Pk-Pk StdDev Pk-Pk
11.0 ps 60.0 ps 10.5 ps 50.0 ps

Table B-1-4 Cycle to Cycle Jitter (Clock Out)

Clock=250MS/s Clock=100MS/s
StdDev Pk-Pk StdDev Pk-Pk
20.0 ps 110.0 ps 20.0 ps 90.0 ps

Table BĆ2: Mechanical Characteristics

Characteristics Description
Net Weight
Standard 9.7 kg
Size
Height 163mm (6.4 inches) with feet
Width 363mm (14.3 inches) with handle
Length 490mm (19.3 inches) with front cover
564mm (22.2 inches) with handle extended

AWG2021 User Manual BĆ5

Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Warranted Characteristics
This section will describe the warranted characteristics of the AWG2021. These
can be divided into two main categories: electrical characteristics and environ-
mental characteristics.

Performance Conditions The electrical characteristics are valid under the following conditions:
1. The instrument must have been calibrated at an ambient temperature between
+20_ C to +30_ C.
2. The instrument must be in an environment whose limits are described in
Environmental Characteristics.
3. All tolerance limits apply after a 20 minute warm up and an execution of the
self calibration.
4. The instrument is operating at an ambient temperature between +10_ C to
+40_ C, unless otherwise noted.
Items marked with ** are tested in the Performance Verification (Appendix C)

Table BĆ3: Electrical Characteristics

Characteristics Description
Clock Generator
** Accuracy
** +15_ C to +30_ C 0.005%
+10_ C to +40_ C 0.01%
Skew between CH1 and CH2 When Option 02 (second channel) installed within 4 ns
Filter
Cutoff frequency -3 dB point
1 MHz within 20%
5 MHz within 20%
20 MHz within 20%
50 MHz within 20%
Main Output
** Amplitude
DC Accuracy
0.05 V  0.5 V ±(0.5% of Amplitude + 5 mV)
No Offset, at 1 MHz clock
** 0.501 V  5 V ±(1% of Amplitude + 25 mV)
No Offset, at 1 MHz clock

BĆ6 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ3: Electrical Characteristics (Cont.)

Characteristics Description
** Offset Waveform is 0 VDC and Amplitude range is 0.05 V
** Accuracy ±(1% of Offset + 5 mV)
Cross talk between Channels Option 02, Sine (512 points), 250 MHz Clock, Amplitude 5 V, No Offset, No
Filter
<-70 dBc
Noise Floor Waveform is 0 VDC (7FF), Norm, No Filter, No Offset, at 250 MHz Clock
0.1 V <-140 dBm/Hz (at 10 MHz)
1.0 V <-130 dBm/Hz (at 10 MHz)
5.0 V <-120 dBm/Hz (at 10 MHz)
** Pulse Response
15_ C  30_ C
Flatness within <3% (After 20 ns from rise/fall edges)
Aberration ±(7% of amplitude + 10 mV)
10_ C  40_ C
** Rise/Fall Time <4.2 ns
** Flatness within <5% (After 20 ns from rise/fall edges)
** Aberration ±(9% of amplitude + 10 mV)
Sine Wave Characteristics F.G mode, 100 kHz to 2.5 MHz, No Offset
Flatness within 4%
Amplitude 1 V, 100 kHz reference
T.H.D. Including up to 4th Harmonics
1V <-50 dBc
0.5 V <-66 dBc
Spurious Excluding Clock frequency
1V <-66 dBc
0.5 V <-66 dBc
Auxiliary Output
** SYNC
** Amplitude >1.2 V into 50 W, >2.4 V into open circuit
Duration 100 ns ± 20%
Sync to Signal delay within 15 ns

AWG2021 User Manual BĆ7

Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ3: Electrical Characteristics (Cont.)

Characteristics Description
** MARKER1
** Amplitude 2.5 V (+5%, -10%) into 50 W, 5 V (+5%, -10%) into open circuit
Rise/Fall time < 8 ns
Marker to Signal delay within 15 ns
** MARKER2
** Amplitude 2.5 V (+5%, -10%) into 50 W, 5 V (+5%, -10%) into open circuit
Rise/Fall time < 8 ns
Marker to Signal delay within 15 ns
** CLOCK
** Amplitude 1 V ±0.3 V into 50 W
ECL DIGITAL DATA OUT (Option 03)
Skew between Data within 1 ns
Clock to Data delay within 2 ns
** TTL DIGITAL DATA OUT (Option 04)
** Amplitude >2 V into 50 W
Output Data rate 100 MB/s minimum
Clock to Data delay (see Figure BĆ1) within ±4 ns
Middle point of the Data

Data

Within ±4 ns

50%
Clock

Figure BĆ1: Timing for the Data and Clock Signals

BĆ8 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ3: Electrical Characteristics (Cont.)

Characteristics Description
Auxiliary Input
** TRIGGER
** Accuracy ±(5% of Level + 0.1 V)
Pulse Width 15 ns minimum
Input Swing 0.2 VpĆp minimum
Maximum Input Volts 10 VpĆp when 1 MW selected
5 VRMS when 50 W selected
Trigger to Signal delay
Internal Clock 100 ns maximum
External Clock 100 ns maximum + 0.5 Clock + 1 Clock maximum
Trigger Holdoff 1 ms maximum (Excluding Autostep mode)
AM
Amplitude Accuracy within 5%
Maximum Input Volts ±5 V
** CLOCK
** Threshold Level 0.5 V
Input Swing 0.8 VpĆp minimum
Pulse Width 2 ns minimum
Maximum Input Volts ±2 V
Frequency Range 250 MHz maximum
AM and ADD
AM (Multiply) When Option 02 (second channel) installed
Output within 5%
CH2 Signal 5V 100%
0V 0%
-5 V -100%
Frequency Response DC to 30 MHz (-3 dB)
** External AM
** Sensitivity 2 VpĆp (±5%) signal causes 100% modulation.
Ext Signal ă1 V 100% modulation
ă0 V 50% modulation
-1 V 0% modulation
Frequency Response
CH1 DC to 30 MHz (-3 dB)
External Signal DC to 4 MHz (-3 dB)

AWG2021 User Manual BĆ9

Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ3: Electrical Characteristics (Cont.)

Characteristics Description
** Add When Option 02 (second channel) installed
** Output within 5%
CH1 + CH2 (value indicated at the lower right box in SETUP menu)
Output can not exceed 5 VpĆp.
Frequency Response DC to 30 MHz (-3 dB)
Voltage
AC Power Source
Rating Voltage 100 VAC to 240VAC
Continuous range, CAT II
Range
90 VAC to 250 VAC 48 Hz to 63 Hz
90 VAC to 127 VAC 48 Hz to 440 Hz
Maximum Power Consumption 300 W
Maximum Current 4A
Grounding Impedance The impedance for the chassis ground and power plug ground pins is 0.1 W at
30 A.
Primary Circuit Dielectric Voltage withstand Test 1500 VRMS, 50 Hz for 15 seconds, without breakdown.

Table BĆ4: Environmental Characteristics

Characteristics Description
Temperature
Operating +10_ C to +40_ C
Non operating -20_ C to +60_ C
Relative Humidity
Operating 20% to 80% (No condensation)
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 29.4_ C
Non operating 5% to 90% (No condensation)
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 40.0_ C
Altitude
Operating To 4.5 km (15000 ft).
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1_ C each 300 m above 1.5 km.
Non operating To 15 km (50000 ft).

BĆ10 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ4: Environmental Characteristics (Cont.)

Characteristics Description
Dynamics
Vibration
Operation 0.33 mmpĆp, 10 to 55 Hz, 15 minutes
Shock
Non operating 294 m/s2 (30 G), halfĆsine, 11 ms duration.
Installation Requirements
Power Consumption (Fully Loaded) 300 watts max. Maximum line current is 4 ARMS at 50 Hz, 90 V line.
Surge Current 30 A peak for < 5 line cycles, after product has been off for at least 30 s.
Cooling Clearance
Top Clearance 76mm (3 inches)
Side Clearance 152mm (6 inches)
Rear Clearance 76mm (3 inches)

AWG2021 User Manual BĆ11

Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Typical Characteristics
This section will describe the typical characteristics for the AWG2021. These
values represent typical or average performance and are not absolutely guaran-
teed.

Table BĆ5: Electrical Characteristics

Characteristics Description
Delay
1 MHz 390 ns
5 MHz 78 ns
20 MHz 18 ns
50 MHz 11 ns
Auxiliary Output
TTL DIGITAL DATA OUT Option 04
Skew between Data Connect a digital data output cable (P/N 174Ć3192Ć00) between DIGITAL DATA
OUT connector and DUT's header pins with 50 W termination.
Same Channel 2 ns
Between CH1 and CH2 4 ns (When Option 02 installed)
Power Supply
Battery
Back Up Time 4 years

BĆ12 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ6: Certifications and compliances

Category Standards or description

EC Declaration of Conformity - Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility. Compliance was
EMC demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European
Communities:
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:
EN 55011 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions
EN 50081Ć1 Emissions:
EN60555-2 AC Power Line Harmonic Emissions
EN 50082Ć1 Immunity:
IEC801-2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
IEC801-3 RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity
IEC801-4 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity

Australian/New Zealand Complies with EMC provision of Radio-communications Act per the following standard:
declaration of Conformity Ć EMC
AS/NZS 2064.1/2 Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment: 1992
EC Declaration of Conformity - Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the
Low Voltage European Communities:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC
EN 61010Ć1/A1:1992 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control and laboratory use.
Approvals Complies with the following safety standards:
UL3111-1, First Edition Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment.
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.1010.1Ć92 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control and laboratory use.
Installation Category Description Terminals on this product may have different installation (over-voltage) category designations. The
installation categories are:
Category Examples of products in this category
CAT III DistributionĆlevel mains (usually permanently connected). Equipment at this
level is typically in a fixed industrial location.
CAT II LocalĆlevel mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level includes appliances,
portable tools, and similar products. Equipment is usually cordĆconnected.
CAT I Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment.
Pollution Degree A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product.
Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external.
Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated.
Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Occasionally a
temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be
expected. This location is a typical office/home environment.
Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of
service.

AWG2021 User Manual BĆ13

Appendix B: Performance Characteristics

Table BĆ6: Certifications and compliances (cont.)

Category Standards or description

Conditions of Approval Safety Certifications/Compliances are made for the following conditions:

Altitude (maximum operation): 2000 meters

IEC Characteristics Equipment type:

Test and Measuring

Installation Category II (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex J)
Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 61010-1)
Safety Class I (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex H)

BĆ14 AWG2021 User Manual

Appendix C: Performance Verification

Before Verification
This section describes the verification procedures, tells you when to use the
procedures, and gives conventions used in their structure. The procedures are:

Self Tests

Performance Tests

Preparation These procedures verify the AWG2021 Arbitrary Waveform Generator function-
ality. Which procedure to perform depends on your goal:

To quickly confirm that the AWG2021 functions correctly and was adjusted
properly, do the procedures under Self Tests, which begin on page C-2.
Advantages: These procedures are short, require no external equipment, and
perform extensive functional and accuracy testing. Use them to quickly
determine if the AWG2021 is suitable for use, like when it is first received.

For a more extensive confirmation of performance, do the Performance
Tests, beginning on page C-5 after doing the Self Tests.
Advantages: These procedures involve direct checking of warranted
specifications. They require more time and suitable test equipment. (See
Equipment Required on page C-6.
Before starting any of these procedures, read Section 2 of this manual. These
instructions describe the AWG2021 front-panel controls and menu system.

Conventions Throughout the procedures in this section, the following conventions apply:

Each test procedure uses the following general format:

Title of Test

Equipment Required

Prerequisites

Procedure

Each procedure consists of as many steps, substeps, and subparts as required
to do the test. Steps, substeps, and subparts are sequenced as follows:
1. First Step

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ1

Appendix C: Performance Verification

a. First Substep

First Subpart

Second Subpart
b. Second Substep
2. Second Step

Instructions for menu selection follow this format: FRONT PANEL
BUTTON
Main Menu Button
Side Menu Button. For example, “Press
UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Reset to Factory
O.K.”

Where instructed to use a front-panel button, key, or knob, or select from the
MENU column, or from a bottom or side menu, the name of the item
appears in boldface type: “push MODE,” or “select Burst in the bottom
menu.”

Self Tests
This section describes how to use AWG2021 internal self-test routines. No
equipment is required to do these procedures. The self tests include these
internal routines:

Diagnostics
This self-test procedure uses internal routines to verify that the AWG2021
functions, and passes the internal circuit tests.

Calibration
The second procedure checks the AWG2021 internal calibration constants
and changes them if needed.

Diagnostics The internal diagnostic routines check AWG2021 characteristics such as

amplitude, offset, trigger level, clock, filters, X5 output amplifier, and attenua-
tion.
The AWG2021 automatically performs the internal diagnostics at power-on; you
can also run the internal diagnostics using the menu selections described in this
procedure. The difference between these two methods of initiating the diagnos-
tics is that the menu method does more detailed memory checking than the
power-on method.

CĆ2 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

Equipment 
Required
Prerequisites    
        
   

1. Verify that internal diagnostics pass: Do the following substeps to verify

passing internal diagnostics.
a. Display the diagnostics menu and select all tests: Push
UTILITY
Diag/Cal
Diagnostics xxxx
All.
The list on the left shows the tests available for diagnostics. In addition
to selecting all of the tests shown for diagnostics, you can select only the
test you want to run using the general purpose knob. In Figure C-1, the
symbol (*) to the left of Diagnostics column indicates the tests selected.

Figure CĆ1: Diagnostics Menu

b. Run the diagnostics: Select Execute from the side menu. This executes
all the AWG2021 diagnostics automatically.
c. Wait: The internal diagnostics do an extensive verification of AWG2021
functions. While it progresses, the screen displays the busy icon. When
finished, the resulting status appears on the screen.
d. Confirm that no failures are found: Verify that no failures are found and
reported on-screen. If the diagnostics displays Fail as the result of any
test, contact your nearest representative.
2. Return to regular service: Push a button (other than UTILITY) in the MENU
column to exit the diagnostic menu.

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ3

Appendix C: Performance Verification

Calibration The AWG2021 includes internal calibration routines that check electrical
characteristics such as amplitude, offset, trigger level, clock, filters, X5 output
amplifier and attenuation, and adjust internal calibration constants as necessary.

Equipment Required 

Prerequisites    
       
    

1. Verify that internal adjustments pass: Do the following substeps to verify

passing of internal adjustments.
a. Display the calibrations menu and select all tests: Push
UTILITY
Diag/Cal
Calibrations xxxx
All. See the menu in
Figure C-2.

Figure CĆ2: Calibrations Menu

b. Run the calibrations routine: Select Execute from the side menu. This
executes the AWG2021 calibrations routine automatically.
c. Wait: The internal calibration does an exhaustive verification of proper
AWG2021 function. While it progresses, the busy icon appears on
screen. When finished, the resulting status will appear on the screen.
d. Confirm that no failures are found: Verify that no failures are found and
reported on-screen. If the calibration displays Fail as the result, contact
our nearest representative.
2. Return to regular service: Push any button (other than UTILITY) in the
MENU column to exit the diagnostic menu.

CĆ4 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification


. The interactive tests on the Diag/Cal menu are for manufacturing use at
the factory.

Performance Tests
This section contains a series of procedures for checking that the AWG2021
Arbitrary Waveform Generator performs as warranted.
The procedures are arranged in ten logical groupings, presented in the following
order:

Operating Mode Checks

Arithmetic Operation Checks

Clock Frequency and Amplitude Checks

Gain and Offset Accuracy Checks

Pulse Response Check

SYNC Out and MARKER Out Amplitude Checks

External Trigger Level Accuracy Check

External CLOCK IN Check

ECL Digital Data Out Check (Option 03)

TTL Digital Data Out Check (Option 04)
These procedures extend the confidence level provided by the internal diagnostic
and calibration routines described on page C-2.

Prerequisites These tests comprise an extensive, valid confirmation of performance and

functionality when the following requirements are met:

You must have performed and passed the calibration procedure described in
Self Tests, the previous subsection.


. For operation to specified accuracy, allow the AWG2021 to warm up at

least 20 minutes before doing the performance tests.

Load all the files from the Performance Check/Adjustment disk

(063-2171-XX) that comes with this manual into AWG2021 internal

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ5

Appendix C: Performance Verification

memory. For instructions on loading files, see Loading Sample Waveforms

on page 2 -28 in section 2.

Related Information Read Preparation and Conventions on page C-1. Also, if you are not familiar
with operating the AWG2021, read in section 2 before doing any of these
procedures.

Equipment Required The following equipment is required to check the performance of the AWG2021.

Table CĆ1: Test Equipment

Item Minimum Requirements Example Purpose

Precision termination Impedance: 50ĂW, 0.1% Tektronix Part 011Ć0129ĆXX Signal termination.
Connectors: BNC
Adapter Connectors: BNC femaleĆtoĆdual Tektronix Part 103Ć0090ĆXX Signal interconnection.
banana
Adapter Connectors: SMA maleĆtoĆBNC Tektronix Part 015Ć0554ĆXX Signal interconnection.
female
BNC dual input (TEE) adapter Connectors: BNC Tektronix Part 103Ć0030ĆXX Signal interconnection.
BNC cable (4 required) Impedance 50ĂW Tektronix Part 012Ć0057ĆXX Signal interconnection.
Connectors: BNC
Length: 43 inches
Termination board (Option 03) Must use example equipment Tektronix Part 671Ć2957ĆXX Used to check ECL digital
data output.
ECL Digital Data Out Cable Must use example equipment Tektronix Part 012Ć1408ĆXX Used to check ECL digital
(Option 03) (Standard accessory for data output.
Option 03)
Test leads (Option 03) Must use example equipment Tektronix Part 012Ć1381ĆXX Used to check ECL digital
data output.
TTL Digital Data Out Cable Must use example equipment Tektronix Part 174Ć3192ĆXX Used to check TTL digital
(Option 04) (Standard accessory for data output.
Option 04)
2 × 13 header (Option 04) Must use example equipment Tektronix Part 131Ć3847ĆXX Used to check TTL digital
data output.
Probe, 10X (Option 04) 10X probe Tektronix Part P6139A Used to check TTL digital
data output.
Test oscilloscope Bandwidth: >250ĂMHz Tektronix TDS500 Series Checks output signals. Used
Digitizing Oscilloscope or in many procedures.
2400 Series Digitizing OscilloĆ
scope
Frequency counter Frequency range: 10ĂHz to 250ĂMHz Tektronix DC 5010 ProgramĆ Used to check clock frequenĆ
mable Universal Counter/TimĆ cy.
er*

CĆ6 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

Table CĆ1: Test Equipment (Cont.)

Item Minimum Requirements Example Purpose

Digital multimeter DC volts range: 0.05ĂV to 5ĂV Fluke 8842A Used throughout the checks
Accuracy:
0.1% to measure voltage.
Function generator Output voltage: -5ĂV to 5ĂV Tektronix FG 5010 ProgramĆ Used to input the trigger
mable Function Generator* signal.
Power supply (Option 03) Output voltage: -2ĂV Tektronix PS 5010 ProgramĆ Used to check ECL digital
mable Power Supply* data output.
Performance Check/AdjustĆ Must use example listed Tektronix Part 063Ć2171ĆXX Used throughout the checks
ment disk to provide waveform files.
* Requires a TM 5000 Series Power Module Mainframe.

Performance Check/ Table C-2 lists the waveform files on the Performance Check/Adjustment disk
Adjustment Files (063-2171-XX) that are used in these performance tests, the AWG2021
front-panel settings that each file sets up, and the performance test that uses each
file.


. The files on the Performance Check/Adjustment disk are locked (the files
names are displayed with *), so the data in these files cannot be changed unless
the lock is opened. The file data includes not only waveform data, but also
output parameters.
When you select a file with the Waveform Sequence item, the AWG2021 output
parameters change to those specified in the file, and the waveform output
reflects waveform data in the file. After selecting a file, do not change an output
parameter with the SETUP menu unless a procedure instructs you to do so.
During the procedures, if you are unsure that the AWG2021 settings still match
the file’s settings, select the waveform again using the Waveform Sequence item
on the SETUP menu.
HF_LF.WFM file on the Performance Check/Adjustment disk is used to adjust
the AWG2021 externally. On adjustment, see the AWG2021 Service Manual.

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ7

Appendix C: Performance Verification

Table CĆ2: File List for Performance Check/Adjustment Disk

EDIT Menu SETUP Menu

Wfm Wfm
No.
1
File Name
MODE.WFM
ÎÎÎ
Shape

ÎÎÎ
Point
1000
Clock
1 MHz
Operation
Normal
Filter
Through
Amp
1V
Offset
0V
Usage
Cont, TrigĆ

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
gered, Burst ,
Gated Mode

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
2 MODE_ADV.SEQ 1200 100ĂMHz Normal Through 1ĂV 0ĂV Waveform
ąADVĆ1.WFM 1000 Advance Mode
ąADVĆ2.WFM 200
3 MODE_AST.AST 1000 250ĂkHz Normal Through 3ĂV 0ĂV Autostep Mode
Step: 1 ASTĆ1.WFM

Step: 2 ASTĆ2.WFM 200 150ĂkHz Normal Through 1.5ĂV 0ĂV

Step: 3 ASTĆ3.WFM
ÎÎÎ 200 25ĂkHz Normal Through 0.5ĂV 0ĂV

4 OPE.AST
ÎÎÎ 1000 1ĂMHz external AM Through 5ĂV 0ĂV External AM
Step: 1 Operation
EXT_AM.WFM (CH1)
Step: 2 1000 1ĂMHz AM Through 5ĂV 0ĂV Internal AM
AMĆ1.WFM (CH1) Operation

AMĆ2.WFM (CH2) 1000 1ĂMHz ĊĊ Through 5ĂV 2.5ĂV

Step: 3 1000 1ĂMHz AM Through 5ĂV 0ĂV

AMĆ1.WFM (CH1)

AMĆ3.WFM (CH2) 1000 1ĂMHz ĊĊ Through 5V -2.5 V

Step: 4 1000 1 MHz add Through 5V 0V Internal Add

ADD.WFM (CH1) Operation

ADD.WFM (CH2) 1000 1 MHz ĊĊ Through 5V 0V

5 CLK_FREQ.WFM ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ 1000 250 MHz Normal Through 1V 0V Clock

ÎÎÎ
Frequency
Accuracy
6 CLK_AMPL.WFM
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
1000 1 MHz Normal Through 1V 0V Clock
Amplitude

CĆ8 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

Table CĆ2: File List for Performance Check/Adjustment Disk (Cont.)

EDIT Menu SETUP Menu

Wfm Wfm
No. File Name Shape Point Clock Operation Filter Amp Offset Usage
7 GAIN_OFF.AST 1000 1 MHz Normal Through 0.5 V 0V Gain
Step: 1 GAINĆ1.WFM Accuracy

Step: 2 GAINĆ2.WFM 1000 1 MHz Normal Through 0.5 V 0V

Step: 3 GAINĆ3.WFM 1000 1 MHz Normal Through 5.0 V 0V

Step: 4 GAINĆ4.WFM 1000 1 MHz Normal Through 5.0 V 0V

Step: 5 1000 1 MHz Normal Through 0.05 V 2.5 V Offset

OFFSETĆ1.WFM Accuracy

Step: 6 1000 1 MHz Normal Through 0.05 V 0V

OFFSETĆ2.WFM

Step: 7 1000 1 MHz Normal Through 0.05 V -2.5 V

OFFSETĆ3.WFM

8 PULSE.WFM 64 250 MHz ĊĊ Through 0.5 V 0V Pulse

Response

9 SYNC_MKR.WFM 200 1 MHz ĊĊ Through 1V 0V SYNC Out and

MARKER OUT
Amplitude

ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
10 TRG_IN.WFM 1000 100 MHz ĊĊ Through 1V 0V External Trigger
Level Accuracy

11 EXT_CLK.WFM ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
1000 External
Clock
ĊĊ Through 1V 0V External Clock
In

12 DIGI_OUT.WFM 4096 1 MHz Normal Through 1V 0V ECL and TTL

DIGITAL DATA
OUT Check
(Option 03 and
04)

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ9

Appendix C: Performance Verification

Operating Mode Checks

These procedures check operation of the Cont, Triggered, Burst, Gated,
Waveform Advance, and Autostep modes.

Check Cont Mode Electrical  

    " #
Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required  "W !    
Prerequisites          


#

1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output connector
through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input connector on the
oscilloscope (see Figure C-3).

 
AWG2021 TDS 540

Figure CĆ3: Cont Mode Initial Test Hookup

b. Set the oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div.
CH1 input impedance: . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ms/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

CĆ10 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

2. Set the AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Select the file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files
and highlight the MODE.WFM file.

Push ENTER to select the file. This button is located to the
lower-right of the numeric keypad.
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED
above the CH1 output connector is on.
4. Check cont mode: Check that the amplitude of the sine wave displayed on
the oscilloscope is 5 vertical divisions and that 5 cycles of the waveform are
displayed.
5. If Option 02 is installed (Option 02 adds the CH2 output channel): Repeat
this procedure, connecting the oscilloscope to the AWG2021 CH2 output
connector, pushing Waveform Sequence to select the waveform for CH2,
and turning on the CH2 output.
6. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.

Check Triggered Mode Electrical      $ %
Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required " $W #   !     

Prerequisites      !     
%

1. Install the test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output connector
through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input connector on the
oscilloscope.
b. Hook up the function generator:

Connect the AWG2021 TRIGGER INPUT connector through a
coaxial cable to the function generator output connector (see
Figure C-4).

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ11

Appendix C: Performance Verification

  

FG 5010

   
AWG2021 TDS 540

Figure CĆ4: Triggered Mode Initial Test Hookup

c. Set the oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div.
CH1 input impedance: . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ms/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Norm

d. Set the function generator controls:

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameter
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4V
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off

CĆ12 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

2. Set AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Modify the AWG2021 default settings:

Push MODE
Triggered
Slope to select Positive slope.

Select Level from the side menu and turn the general purpose knob
to select a 1 V trigger level.

Select Impedance from the side menu to select 50 W impedance.
c. Select the file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Highlight the MODE.WFM file using the general purpose knob.

Push ENTER to select the file.
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED
above the CH1 output connector is on.
4. Check triggered mode with manual triggering: Push the AWG2021
MANUAL TRIGGER button and check that when the button is pushed, the
oscilloscope displays a one-cycle sine wave.
5. Check triggered mode with external triggering:
a. Enable function generator output: Turn on the function generator output.
b. Check triggering: Check that for each trigger supplied by the function
generator, the oscilloscope displays a one-cycle sine wave.
6. End procedure: Turn off the function generator output, and disconnect the
function generator and oscilloscope.

AWG2021 User Manual 


Appendix C: Performance Verification

Check Burst Mode Electrical     " #

Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required  "W !    
Prerequisites         
#

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output connector
through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input connector on the
oscilloscope (see Figure C-5).

 
AWG2021 TDS 540

Figure CĆ5: Burst Mode Initial Test Hookup

b. Set the oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div.
CH1 input impedance: . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ms/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Norm

2. Set AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Modify the AWG2021 default settings: Push MODE
Burst
Burst
Count and turn the general purpose knob to a burst count of 3.

CĆ14 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

c. Select the file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MODE.WFM file.

Push ENTER to select the file.
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED
above the CH1 output connector is on.
4. Check burst count: Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button and
check that when the button is pushed, the oscilloscope displays three cycles
of sine wave.
5. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.

Check Gated Mode Electrical       # $
Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required  #W "    W    
!      
Prerequisites      !     
$

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output connector
through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input connector on the
oscilloscope.
b. Hook up the function generator: Connect the function generator output
to both the AWG2021 TRIGGER INPUT and the oscilloscope CH2
input through a coaxial cable, precision termination, and a dual input
coupler (see Figure C-6).

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ15

Appendix C: Performance Verification

   
AWG2021 TDS 540

  

FG 5010

Figure CĆ6: Gated Mode Initial Test Hookup

c. Set oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1, CH2
CH1, CH2 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1, CH2 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 V/div.
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
CH2 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chop
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ms/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH2
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

d. Set function generator controls:

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameter
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 V
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off

CĆ16 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

2. Set the AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Modify the AWG2021 default settings:

Push MODE
Gated
Polarity to highlight Positive.

Select Impedance from the side menu to highlight 1 MW.
c. Select the file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Highlight the MODE.WFM file, using the general purpose knob.

Push ENTER to select the file.
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED
above the CH1 output connector is on.
4. Check gated mode with manual trigger: Push and hold the AWG2021
MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that the oscilloscope continuously
displays a sine wave while the MANUAL TRIGGER button is pushed.
5. Check gated mode with gate signal:
a. Apply gate signal: Turn function generator output on.
b. Check gated mode with positive gate signal: Check that the oscilloscope
displays a sinewave when the gate signal is high.

AWG2021 User Manual 


Appendix C: Performance Verification

   


   
 

Figure CĆ7: Waveform Output Signal with Positive Gate Signal

c. Change the AWG2021 trigger polarity to negative: Push MODE
Po-

larity to change the polarity to Negative.
d. Check gated mode with a negative gate signal: Check the oscilloscope
displays a sinewave when the gate signal is low.

   



   
 

Figure CĆ8: Waveform Output Signal with Negative Gate Signal

6. End procedure: Turn the function generator output off and disconnect the
function generator.

CĆ18 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

Check Waveform Advance Electrical    " "  $ %
Mode Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required  $W #    
Prerequisites      !     
%

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output
connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input connector
on the oscilloscope (see Figure C-9).

 
AWG2021 TDS 540

Figure CĆ9: Waveform Advance Mode Initial Test Hookup

b. Set oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div.
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ms/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

2. Set the AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Set AWG2021 controls:

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ19

Appendix C: Performance Verification

Push MODE
Waveform Advance
Slope to highlight Positive.

Select Level from the side menu, and turn the general purpose knob
to select a 1.0 V level.

Select Impedance from the side menu to highlight 50 W.
c. Select waveform file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Highlight the MODE_ADV.SEQ file using the general purpose
knob.

Push ENTER to select the file.
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED
above the CH1 output connector is on.
4. Check waveform advance: Repeatedly push the AWG2021 MANUAL
TRIGGER button, and check that the oscilloscope displays a continuous
sine wave that switches between two frequencies at each manual trigger.
5. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.

Check Autostep Mode Electrical      # $

Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required ! #W "    
Prerequisites         
$

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up the oscilloscope:

Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output through a coaxial cable to the
oscilloscope CH1 vertical input.

Connect the AWG2021 CH1 SYNC Out output through a coaxial
cable to the oscilloscope CH1 vertical input (see Figure C-10).

CĆ20 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification


 

AWG2021 TDS 540

Figure CĆ10: Autostep Mode Initial Test Hookup

b. Set the oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 V/div.
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ms/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal

2. Set the AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Modify AWG2021 default settings:

Push MODE
Autostep
Slope to highlight Positive.

Select Level from the side menu, and turn the general purpose knob
to select 1 V.

Select Select Autostep File from the side menu to choose from the
file list for CH1.

Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the MODE_AST.AST
file.

Push ENTER.

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ21

Appendix C: Performance Verification

Select Start within the Sync frame at the bottom menu.

3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: If the LED above the CH1 output
connector is not on, push the CH1 button.
4. Check autostep mode: Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button,
and check that the oscilloscope momentarily displays one sine wave cycle
with a different frequency and amplitude each time you push and release the
button.
5. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.

Arithmetic Operation Checks

These procedures check operation of external AM. For an AWG2021 with
Option 02, they check internal AM and internal Add arithmetic functions.


. The arithmetic operation checks are structured as a continuous series of

tests. After Check External AM Operation, each test uses the control settings
from the last test and uses the next step in the sequence file.

Check External AM Electrical External amplitude modulation, pageĂBĆ9.

Operation Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required Two 50ĂW coaxial cables, a 50 W terminator, a function
generator, and a digital multimeter (DMM).
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5.

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up DMM: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output through a coaxial
cable, the 50 W terminator, and BNC-to-dual banana connector to the
DMM INPUT connector.
b. Hook up function generator: Connect the AWG2021 rear-panel AM IN
input through a coaxial cable to the function generator output (see
Figure C-11).

CĆ22 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

   

FG 5010



AWG2021


8842A

Figure CĆ11: External AM Operation Initial Test Hookup

c. Set DMM controls:

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDC
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front

d. Set function generator controls:

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameter
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0V
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1V
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off

2. Set the AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Modify AWG2021 default settings:

Push MODE
Autostep.
c. Select waveform file:

Select Select Autostep File from the side menu to choose a
waveform file for CH1.

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ23

Appendix C: Performance Verification

Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the OPE.AST file.

Push ENTER.
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: If the LED above the CH1 output
connector is not on, push the CH1 button.
4. Enable the function generator output: Turn on the function generator output.
5. Check external AM operation:

Check that the step number displayed on the AWG2021 MODE menu is
Step 1 (see Figure C-12). If it is not, push MANUAL TRIGGER to step
though the sequence file steps until Step: 1 is displayed.


  

Figure CĆ12: MODE Menu Autostep Setting

Check that the DMM reading is in the range from 2.375 to 2.625 V
(100% modulation).

Set the function generator offset value to 0 V. Check that the DMM
reading is in the range from 1.125 to 1.375 V (50% modulation).

CĆ24 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

Set the function generator offset value to –1 V. Check that the DMM
voltage reading is in the range from –0.125 to 0.125 V (0% modulation).
6. End procedure: Keep the test connections and instrument settings for the
next check.

AWG2021 User Manual 


Appendix C: Performance Verification

Check Internal AM Electrical Arithmetic Operation, Amplitude Modulation, on pageĂBĆ9.

Operation (Option 02 only) Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required Two 50ĂW coaxial cables, a function generator, and a digital
multimeter (DMM).
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5. It
also requires Option 02 (CH2 output channel) in the AWG2021.

1. Use test hookup and control settings from previous check.

2. Check internal AM operation:
a. Check Autostep Step 2:

Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that
the step changes to Step 2 on the MODE menu.

Check that the DMM reading is in the range from 2.375 VDC to
2.625 VDC.
b. Check Autostep Step 3:

Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that
the Autostep changes to Step: 3 on the MODE menu.

Check that the DMM reading is in the range from –2.625 V to
–2.375 V.
3. End procedure: Retain the test hookup and settings for the next check.

Check Internal Add Electrical Arithmetic Operation, Add, on pageĂBĆ9.

Operation (Option 02 only) Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required Two 50ĂW coaxial cables, a function generator, and a digital
multimeter (DMM).
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5. It
also requires Option 02 (CH2 output channel) in the AWG2021.

1. Use test hookup and control settings from previous check.

2. Check internal Add operation:
a. Check Autostep Step 4:

Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that
the step changes to Step 4 on the MODE menu.

Check that the DMM reading is in the range from 2.85 V to 3.15 V.

CĆ26 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

3. End procedure:
a. Disable function generator output: Turn the function generator output
off.
b. Remove equipment: Disconnect connections to the test equipment.

Clock Frequency and Amplitude Checks

These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG2021 clock frequency and the
waveform output amplitude.

Check Clock Frequency Electrical Clock Generator, Accuracy, on pageĂBĆ6.

Accuracy Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required A 50ĂW coaxial cable, an SMAĆBNC adapter, and a frequency
counter.
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5.

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up frequency counter: Connect the AWG2021 rear panel CLOCK
OUT connector to the frequency counter input through a coaxial cable
and an SMA-BNC adapter (see Figure C-13).

Frequency Counter
DC 5010

AWG2021
AWG2021

Figure CĆ13: Clock Frequency Accuracy Initial Test Hookup

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ27

Appendix C: Performance Verification

b. Set frequency counter controls:

CHANNEL A
Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative
Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X5
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
FREQ A

2. Set AWG2021 controls and select the waveform:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Select the waveform file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Turn the general purpose knob to select the CLK_FREQ.WFM file.

Push ENTER.
3. Check clock frequency accuracy:
a. Check clock frequency accuracy at current clock frequency setting:
Check that the frequency counter reading falls between 249.9875 MHz
and 250.0125 MHz.
b. Check clock frequency accuracy for different clock frequency settings:

Select Clock from the bottom of the SETUP menu.

Turn the general purpose knob (or press the numeric and units keys,
and push ENTER) to select the first clock frequency listed in Table
C-3.

Check that the frequency counter reading is within the frequency
range listed in the table for the clock frequency setting.

Repeat this step for each clock frequency and frequency range listed
in Table C-3.


 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

Table CĆ3: Clock Frequency Accuracy

Clock Frequency Frequency Range

150 MHz 149.9925ĂMHz - 150.0075ĂMHz
1 MHz 0.99995ĂMHz – 1.00005ĂMHz
1 kHz 0.99995ĂkHz - 1.00005ĂkHz
10 Hz 9.9995ĂHz - 10.0005ĂHz

4. End procedure: Disconnect the frequency counter.

Check Clock Amplitude Electrical Auxiliary Outputs, Clock, Amplitude, on pageĂBĆ8.

Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required A 50ĂW coaxial cable, an SMAĆBNC adapter, and an
oscilloscope.
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5.

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 rear-panel CLOCK OUT
connector through a coaxial cable and SMA-BNC adapter to the
oscilloscope CH1 vertical input (see Figure C-14).

Oscilloscope
TDS 540

AWG2021
AWG2021

Figure CĆ14: Clock Amplitude Initial Test Hookup

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ29

Appendix C: Performance Verification

b. Set oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 mV/div.
Input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ns/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

2. Set the AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Select the waveform file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Turn the general purpose knob to select the CLK_AMPL.WFM
file.

Push ENTER.
3. Check clock amplitude accuracy: Check that the pulse displayed on the
oscilloscope has an amplitude of 0.7 Vp-p to 1.3 Vp-p.
4. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.


AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

Gain and Offset Accuracy Checks

These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG2021 gain and offset.


. The gain and offset accuracy checks are structured as a continuous test.
After Check Gain Accuracy, the next test uses the control settings from the last
test and uses the next step in the sequence file.

Check Gain Accuracy Electrical Main Output, Amplitude, Accuracy, on pageĂBĆ6.

Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required A 50ĂW coaxial cable, a BNCĆtoĆdual banana adapter, and a
digital multimeter (DMM).
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5.

1. Install test hookup and set controls:

a. Hook up DMM: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output through a 50 W
coaxial cable, a 50 W terminator and a dual banana connector to the
DMM INPUT connector (see Figure C-15).

AWG2021
AWG2021

DMM
8842A

Figure CĆ15: Gain Accuracy Initial Test Hookup

b. Set DMM controls:

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDC
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front

2. Set the AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ31

Appendix C: Performance Verification

b. Select the AWG2021 waveform file:

Push MODE
Autostep
Select Autostep File to choose a
sequence file for CH1.

Turn the general purpose knob to select the GAIN_OFF.AST file.

Push ENTER.
3. Check gain accuracy:

Check that the displayed step is Step 1 on the MODE menu. If it is not,
select the side menu STOP button to return to Step 1.

Note the DMM reading as “A” for this value.

Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that the
displayed step is Step 2.

Note the DMM reading as “B” for this value.

Do the following calculation.
A–B

Check that the calculated value is in the range from 0.4925 V to
0.5075 V.

Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that the
displayed step is Step 3.

Note the DMM reading as “C” for this value.

Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that the
displayed step is Step 4.

Record the DMM reading as “D” for this value.

Do the following calculation.
C–D

Check that the calculated value is in the range from 4.925 V to 5.075 V.
4. End procedure: Retain the test hookup and control settings.


AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

Check Offset Accuracy Electrical Main Output, Offset, Accuracy, on pageĂBĆ6.

Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required A 50ĂW coaxial cable, 50ĂW termination, BNCĆtoĆdual banana
adapter, and a digital multimeter (DMM).
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5.

1. Use the test hookup and test equipment settings from previous check,
however, add a 50 W termination at the DMM input.
2. Check offset accuracy:

Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that the
displayed step is Step 5.

Check that the DMM voltage reading is in the range from 2.470 V to
2.530 V.

Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that the
displayed step is Step 6.

Check that the DMM voltage reading is in the range from –0.005 V to
0.005 V.

Push the AWG2021 MANUAL TRIGGER button, and check that the
displayed step is Step 7.

Check that the DMM voltage reading is in the range from –2.470 V to
–2.530 V.
3. Check Option 02: If the AWG2021 has Option 02, repeat the Gain Accuracy
and Offset Accuracy Checks for the AWG2021 channel 2 (CH2).
4. End procedure: Disconnect the DMM.

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ33

Appendix C: Performance Verification

Pulse Response Check

This procedure checks the pulse response characteristics of the AWG2021 output
waveforms at amplitudes of 0.5 and 1 V.

Electrical Main Outputs, Pulse Response, on pageĂBĆ7.

Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required A 50ĂW coaxial cable and an oscilloscope.
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5.

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output
connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input connector
on the oscilloscope (see Figure C-16).

AWG2021 Oscilloscope
AWG2021 TDS 540

Figure CĆ16: Pulse Response Initial Test Hookup

b. Set oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 V/div.
Input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ns/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

CĆ34 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

2. Set the AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Select waveform file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Turn the general purpose knob to select the PULSE.WFM file.

Push ENTER.
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED
above the CH1 output connector is on.
4. Check pulse response at 0.5 V amplitude:
a. Check rise time: Check that the rise time of the waveform displayed on
the oscilloscope from the 10% point to the 90% point is 4.2 ns or less.
b. Check aberrations: Check that the aberrations of the displayed
waveform is within 0.45 div.
c. Check flatness: Check that the flatness of the displayed waveform is
within 0.15 div. after 20 ns from the rising edge.
d. Change the oscilloscope controls:
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ns/div.
Trigger
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative

e. Check fall time: Check that the fall time of the displayed waveform from
the 10% point to the 90% point is 4.2 ns or less.
5. Check pulse response at 1 V amplitude:
a. Change the oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div.
Trigger
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive

b. Change the AWG2021 controls:

Push SETUP
Ampl to change the amplitude for CH1.

AWG2021 User Manual 


Appendix C: Performance Verification

Press the numeric key 1, and press the units key V to select an
amplitude of 1 V.
c. Repeat substeps 4a through e, checking to the follow limits:
Rise time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 ns, maximum
Aberrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4 div., maximum
Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.15 div., maximum
Fall time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 ns, maximum

6. Check pulse response for CH2 (Option 02): If the AWG2021 has a second
channel, repeat this Pulse Response Check procedure using the AWG2021
CH2 output and selecting the waveform and setting controls for CH2.
7. End procedure: Remove the connections.

SYNC Out and MARKER Out Amplitude Checks

These procedures check the amplitude of the SYNC Out and MARKER Out
signals.

Electrical $%!& $#$#" & !!  !!  #$ 

Characteristic Checked '
(
Equipment Required 'W %    ""
Prerequisites   #" # !! $"#" "#   (

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up the oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 SYNC Out
connector through the coaxial cable to the CH1 vertical input connector
on the oscilloscope (see Figure C-17).

 ""
AWG2021 TDS 540

Figure CĆ17: Initial Test Hookup

CĆ36 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

b. Set oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 mV/div.
CH1 Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ns/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

2. Set the AWG2021 controls and select the waveform file:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Select waveform file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the SYNC_MRK.WFM
file.

Push ENTER.
3. Check front-panel SYNC Out and MARKER Out amplitude:
a. Check SYNC Out pulse amplitude: Check that the pulse amplitude of the
waveform displayed on the oscilloscope is 1.2 Vp-p or greater.
b. Check CH1 MARKER 1 Out pulse amplitude:

Move the coaxial cable from the AWG2021 CH1 SYNC Out
connector to the CH1 MARKER 1 connector.

Change the oscilloscope sweep to 5 ms/div.

Check that the pulse amplitude of the displayed waveform is from
2.250 Vp-p to 2.625 Vp-p.

AWG2021 User Manual 


Appendix C: Performance Verification

4. Check rear-panel CH1 MARKER Out 2 pulse amplitude:

a. Check CH1 MARKER 2 OUT pulse amplitude:

Remove the coaxial cable from the AWG2021 front-panel CH1
MARKER 1 connector and connect it through the SMA-BNC
adapter to the rear-panel CH1 MARKER 2 OUT connector.

Check that the pulse amplitude of the displayed waveform is from
2.250 Vp-p to 2.625 Vp-p.
5. Check Option 02: If the AWG2021 has a second channel, repeat this entire
test, selecting the AWG2021 waveform and setting controls for CH2 and
checking:

Rear-panel CH2 SYNC Out pulse amplitude

Rear-panel CH2 MARKER 1 pulse amplitude

Rear-panel CH2 MARKER 2 pulse amplitude
6. End procedure: Disconnect the oscilloscope.

External Trigger Level Accuracy Check

This procedure checks the external trigger level accuracy of the AWG2021.

Electrical Auxiliary Inputs, Trigger, Accuracy, on pageĂBĆ9.

Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required Two 50ĂW coaxial cables, a function generator, and an
oscilloscope.
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5.

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output through a
coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH1 vertical input.
b. Hook up function generator: Connect the AWG2021 TRIGGER INPUT
through a coaxial cable to the function generator output (see Fig-
ure C-18).

CĆ38 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

  

FG 5010

   
AWG2021 TDS 540

Figure CĆ18: External Trigger Level Accuracy Initial Test Hookup

c. Set oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div.
CH1 Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ms/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

d. Set function generator controls:

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameter
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0V
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6 V
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ39

Appendix C: Performance Verification

2. Select the AWG2021 waveform file and set AWG2021 controls:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Modify AWG2021 default settings:

Push MODE
Gated
Polarity to highlight Positive.

Select Level from the side menu, and turn the general purpose knob
to select 1 V. (You can also use the numeric and units keys to select
1 V; then push ENTER.)

Select Impedance from the side menu to highlight 1 MW.
c. Select waveform file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the TRG_IN.WFM file.

Push ENTER.
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED
above the CH1 output connector is on.
4. Check external trigger high level:
a. Adjust oscilloscope controls: Press and hold the AWG2021 MANUAL
TRIGGER button and adjust the oscilloscope vertical and horizontal
position to display the waveform from the AWG2021. Release the
MANUAL TRIGGER button.
b. Enable function generator output: Turn on the function generator output.
c. Check external trigger level accuracy:

Gradually increment the function generator offset level until a
waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope.

Check that the function generator offset level is from 0.85 to 1.15 V,
when the waveform is first displayed.
5. Check external trigger low level:
a. Change the function generator controls:
Parameter
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.6 V


AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

b. Change the AWG2021 controls:

Push MODE
Polarity to highlight Negative.

Select Level from the side menu, and turn the general purpose knob
to select –1 V. (You can also use the numeric and units keys to select
–1 V; then push ENTER.)
c. Check external trigger level accuracy:

Gradually decrement the function generator offset level until a
waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope.

Check that that the function generator offset level is from –1.15 V to
–0.85 V, when the waveform is first displayed.
6. End procedure: Turn off the function generator output and disconnect the
function generator.

External CLOCK IN Check

This procedure checks the AWG2021 response to an external CLOCK IN signal.

Electrical #& ' #"!   ! $  (

)
Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required % (W & !  #"  "   
!!
Prerequisites   "! "   #!"! !"   )

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up oscilloscope: Connect the AWG2021 CH1 output through a
coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH1 vertical input.
b. Hook up function generator: Connect the AWG2021 rear-panel CLOCK
IN through a coaxial cable and SMA-BNC adapter to the function
generator output (see Figure C-19).

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ41

Appendix C: Performance Verification

  

FG 5010

   
AWG2021 TDS 540

Figure CĆ19: External CLOCK IN Initial Test Hookup

c. Set oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 V/div.
Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ms/div.
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

d. Set function generator controls:

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameter
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 V
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6 V
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off

CĆ42 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

2. Select the AWG2021 waveform file and set AWG2021 controls:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Select waveform file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the EXT_CLK.WFM
file.

Push ENTER.
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED
above the CH1 output connector is on.
4. Check the external CLOCK IN threshold level:
a. Enable function generator output: Turn on function generator output.
b. Check the level: Check that the waveform displayed on the oscilloscope
has an amplitude of 5 divisions and a stable display of 5 cycles.
5. Turn off equipment output and disconnect test hookup:
a. Disable function generator output: Turn off function generator output.
b. Remove connections: Disconnect all connections to the AWG2021.

ECL Digital Data Out Check (Option 03)

This procedure checks the AWG2021 ECL digital data output at the rear panel.
This check requires that the AWG2021 has Option 03 installed.

Electrical Auxiliary Outputs, ECL Digital Data Out, Level, on pageĂBĆ8.

Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required Test leads, ECL digital data out cable, power supply,
termination board, and oscilloscope.
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5.

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ43

Appendix C: Performance Verification

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up termination board: Connect the AWG2021 rear ECL digital
data output through a digital data output cable to the termination board
(see Figure C-20).
b. Hook up power supply: Connect the power supply output through the
test leads to the GND TP100 and –2VD TP120 terminals on the
termination board.
c. Hook up oscilloscope:

Connect the oscilloscope probe to the CH1 vertical input.

Connect the probe ground-clip to the GND TP200 terminal on the
termination board.





     

!  "

GND

–2V

 

Figure CĆ20: ECL Digital Data Out Initial Test Hookup

d. Set oscilloscope controls:

Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 V/div.
Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW

CĆ44 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust as needed
Trigger
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

e. Set power supply controls:

Parameter
Supply select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. Select the AWG2021 waveform file, and set AWG2021 controls:

a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Select waveform file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1.

Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the DIGI_OUT.WFM
file.

Push ENTER to select the file.
c. Set AWG2021 controls:

Push MODE
Cont
3. Turn on the AWG2021 CH1 output: Push the CH1 button so that the LED
above the CH1 output connector is on.
4. Check the digital data output signals:
a. Enable power supply output: Turn on power supply output.
b. Check the signal levels:

Contact the oscilloscope probe to the pins on J200 and J210 (see
Figure C-21). Check that the oscilloscope display shows these
signals:
Data signals D0–D11, D0–D11 are differential ECL output.
Clock signals CLK and CLK are differential ECL output.
All other pins are ground.

AWG2021 User Manual 


Appendix C: Performance Verification

J150
TP100
GND

J200
GND TP210

CLK
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
TP120
–2VD

J210

TP200
GND
CLK
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11

Figure CĆ21: Output Pins on the Termination Board

5. Turn off equipment output and disconnect test hookup:

a. Disable power supply output: Turn off power supply output.
b. Remove connections: Disconnect all connections to the AWG2021.

CĆ46 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

TTL DIGITAL DATA OUT Check (Option 04)

This procedure checks the AWG2021 TTL DIGITAL DATA OUT at the rear
panel.


. This check requires that the AWG2021 has Option 04 installed.

Electrical Auxiliary Output, TTL DIGITAL DATA OUT, Level, on pageĂBĆ8.

Characteristic Checked
Equipment Required TTL Digital data out cable, 2 X13 header, probe and
oscilloscope.
Prerequisites The AWG2021 meets the prerequisites listed on page CĆ5.

1. Install test hookup and set test equipment controls:

a. Hook up termination board: Connect a digital data output cable to the
AWG2021 rear-pane CH1 DIGITAL DATA OUT output (see Fig-
ure C-22).

AWG 2021 Rear Panel Oscilloscope

2 × 13 Header

TTL Digital Data

Out Cable

Figure CĆ22: TTL Digital Data Out Initial Test Hookup

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ47

Appendix C: Performance Verification

b. Hook up oscilloscope:

Connect the oscilloscope probe to the CH1 vertical input.

Connect the probe ground-clip to the GND pin of 2 × 13 header.
c. Set oscilloscope controls:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V/div.
Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust as needed
Trigger
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto

2. Create the AWG2021 waveform file, select waveform file, and set AWG2021
controls:
a. Initialize AWG2021 controls: Push UTILITY
Misc
Config...
Re-
set to Factory
O.K.
b. Select waveform file:

Push SETUP
Waveform Sequence, if necessary, to select a
waveform file for CH1. If Option 02 is installed (Option 02 adds the
CH2 output channel), Waveform Sequence toggles between the
CH1 files (upper list) and the CH2 files (lower list).

Turn the general purpose knob to highlight the DIGI_OUT.WFM
file.

Push ENTER to select the file.
c. Set AWG2021 controls:

Push MODE
Cont
3. Check the CH1 digital data output signals:
a. Check the signal levels:

Contact the oscilloscope probe to the pins on 2 × 13 header (see
Figure C-23). Check that the oscilloscope display shows these
signals:
Data signals D0-D11 and CLK (Clock) are TTL level output.
All other pins are ground.


 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix C: Performance Verification

×  












       

Figure CĆ23: Output Pins on the TTL Digital Data Out Cable

4. If Option 02 is installed, check the CH2 digital data output signals:

a. Change connection: Change the connection for the TTL digital data out
cable from CH1 DIGITAL DATA OUT connector to CH2 DIGITAL
DATA OUT connector.
b. Repeat the step2 and 3 to check the CH2 digital data output signals.
5. Turn off equipment output and disconnect test hookup:
a. Disable power supply output: Turn off power supply output.
b. Remove connections: Disconnect all connections to the AWG2021.

AWG2021 User Manual CĆ49

Appendix C: Performance Verification

Floating Point Processor Check (Option 09)

This procedure checks the AWG2021 floating point processor. This check
requires that the AWG2021 has Option 09 installed.

Equipment Required

Prerequisites           

1. Check that floating point processor test in internal diagnostics passes:

a. Run the AWG2021 internal diagnostics: Push the AWG2021 ON/STBY
switch two times so that the AWG2021 runs the power-on diagnostics.
b. Check the FPP test results: When the AWG2021 finishes the FPP test,
check that the test result is Pass.
This completes the performance tests for the AWG2021.

CĆ50 AWG2021 User Manual

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Introduction
The files and directories listed below are included in the route directory of the
Sample Waveform Library Disk that comes with the instrument. All files are
locked; this is indicated by an asterisk (*) before the file name.

Representative Waveform There are 16 of these waveform files. If a waveform file (with the extender
Files .WFM) has the same name as an equation file (with the extender .EQU), the
waveform file was derived by compiling that equation file.

Waveform Name File Name Page

1. Gaussian Pulse GAUSS_P.EQU DĆ3
GAUSS_P.WFM
2. Lorentz Pulse LORENTZ.EQU DĆ5
LORENTZ.WFM
3. Sampling Function SIN(X)/X Pulse SINC.EQU DĆ6
SINC.WFM
4. Squared Sine Pulse SQU_SIN.EQU DĆ7
SQU_SIN.WFM
5. Double Exponential Pulse D_EXP.EQU DĆ8
D_EXP.WFM
6. Nyquist Pulse NYQUIST.EQU DĆ9
NYQUIST.WFM
7. Linear Frequency Sweep LIN_SWP.EQU DĆ10
LIN_SWP.WFM
8. Log Frequency Sweep LOG_SWP.EQU DĆ11
LOG_SWP.WFM
9. Amplitude Modulation AM.EQU DĆ12
AM.WFM
10. Frequency Modulation FM.EQU DĆ13
FM.WFM
11. Damped Sine Wave DMP_SIN.EQU DĆ14
DMP_SIN.WFM
12. Pulse Width Modulation PWM.WFM DĆ15
13. PseudoĆRandom Pulse PRBS_15.WFM DĆ16
14. π/4 DQPSK I Axis Signal DQPSKI.WFM DĆ17
15. π/4 DQPSK Q Axis Signal DQPSKQ.WFM DĆ17

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ1

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Waveform Name File Name Page

16. Waveform for Magnetic Disk Readout MDSK_RD.WFM DĆ18
Signal
17. Waveform for Magnetic Disk Writing MDSK_WR.WFM DĆ19
Signal

NTSC DIrectory Contains video signals.

Waveform Name File Name

1. Color Bar (Composite) signal $CB1-2H.SEQ
2. Color Bar (Luminance) signal $CB1-(Y).SEQ
3. Color Bar (Chrominance) signal $CB1-(C).SEQ
4. Multiburst signal $M-BURST.SEQ
5. Modulated Ramp signal $RAMP.SEQ
6. Sweep signal (1  10 MHz) $SWEEP10.SEQ
7. SMPTE Color Bar signal $SMPTE.SEQ
8. IYQB signal $IYQB.SEQ
9. Reversed Blue Bar signal $RBLU.SEQ
10. Color Bar + Reversed Blue Bar + IYQB $MIX.SEQ
signal

DĆ2 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Description of Representative Waveform Files

Here we will describe the 17 representative waveform files. Some of the
waveform files were obtained by creating an equation file in the equation editor
and then compiling it to form a waveform file. Others were created in the
waveform editor. To output a waveform file, select the file in the SETUP menu.

Gaussian Pulse Made with the equation editor.

(GAUSS_P.WFM)

Figure DĆ1: Gaussian Pulse Formula and Waveform

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ3

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Constants k0 indicates the half width (W50) for the pulse; k1 indicates the peak location
of the pulse.
Description The waveform generated when the pulse width is taken to be tW50 and the
peak location is taken to be 0 can be expressed as

NJ
( )Ă +Ă Ă (2)Ă @Ă 2 ǒ Ǔ NjĂ SubstitutingĂ sĂ +Ă 2 Ǹ2Ă (2) Ă gives

50
2

50

ǒ Ǔ
( )Ă +Ă Ă Ă 2 , Ă andĂ takingĂ theĂ FourierĂ transformĂ gives
2s
2

ǒ Ǔ

(w)Ă +Ă Ǹ2p sĂ @Ă Ă Ă w s .Ă ThisĂ showsĂ thatĂ thisĂ signalĂ hasĂ a
2 2

2
Gaussian form in the frequency domain as well.
<Example> When tw50 is 1 ms, the bandwidth will be 31.2 kHz.
Settings Waveform points: 256
Clock frequency: 100 MHz
Output time: 2.56 ms

DĆ4 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Lorentz Pulse Made with the equation editor.

(LORENTZ.WFM)

Figure DĆ2: Lorentz Pulse Formula and Waveform

Constants k0 indicates the half width (W50) for the pulse; k1 indicates the peak location
of the pulse.
Description When the pulse width is taken to be tw50, the waveform can be expressed by
the following formula:

()Ă +Ă 1
ǒ Ǔ
2

1Ă )Ă 2Ă 
50

Settings Waveform points: 256

Clock frequency: 100 MHz
Output time: 2.56 ms

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ5

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Sampling Function Made with the equation editor.

SIN(X)/X Pulse
(SINC.WFM)

Figure DĆ3: Sampling Function SIN(X)/X Pulse Formula and Waveform

Constants k0 indicates the frequency of the sine wave; k1 indicates the peak location
of the pulse.
Description In general, this waveform is expressed by the following formula:
Ă (2p)

()Ă
Ă
2p
This is the impulse response for the ideal low pass filter for the frequency
bandwidth f. At least 326 periods are required in order to use a vertical
resolution of 12 bits.
Settings Waveform points: 4000
Clock frequency: 100 MHz
Output time: 40 ms

DĆ6 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Squared Sine Pulse Made with the equation editor.

(SQU_SIN.WFM)

Figure DĆ4: Squared Sine Pulse Formula and Waveform

Description The pulse width and peak location are set with range (). The value for x is
a value between 0 and 1 for range (a,b).
Settings Waveform points: 1000
Clock frequency: 100 MHz
Output time: 10 ms

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ7

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Double Exponential Pulse This is the rising and falling exponential function pulse. Made with the equation
(D_EXP.WFM) editor.

Figure DĆ5: Double Exponential Pulse Formula and Waveform

Constants    ! # !"   # "##" !"#%(  
# ! # $" " !% $" # & !$
 @  @
* 

 

Description " " # &%! &  ! #! " "! # # 

!$#  # # "##" ! !  "! ! # #
 τ  τ !"#%( # &%!   '!"" ( # &
!$

ǒ Ǔ ǒ Ǔ
* +*  *
t
 *
t
 

Settings %! #" 

 ! $(  )
$#$# #  m"

DĆ8 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Nyquist Pulse Made with the equation editor.

(NYQUIST.WFM)

Figure DĆ6: Nyquist Pulse Formula and Waveform

Constants k0 is the period of the digital data used in communication or recording.

k1 is the pulse peak location. k2 is the excess bandwidth factor, and is a
value between 0 to 1.
Description This is the impulse response of a wave shaping Nyquist filter. The shoulder
characteristics of this filter are referred to as "cosine rollĆoff" characteristics,
and the bandwidth used can be varied. This waveform can be expressed by
the following formula.
ǒpa


Ǔ ǒp
Ǔ
()Ă +Ă 2
@ p
1 ǒ2a


Ǔ

Here T is the data period and a is a value between 0 and 1. A wider band is
required for values closer to 1, where ripple is reduced and implementation
is easier.
Settings Waveform points: 1000
Clock frequency: 100 MHz
Output time: 10 ms

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ9

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Linear Frequency Sweep Made with the equation editor.

(LIN_SWP.WFM)

Figure DĆ7: Linear Frequency Sweep Formula and Waveform

Constants  " # "& !     ! # "#!#  
! $"
Description " &%!   '!"" !( ( # & !$

ȡ ȣ
 + ȧp  ) p ŕ   ) f ȧ


  
Ȣ

 Ȥ
!  " # "#!# ! $(  " #  ! $( * " # #
"   " # "& !
 ""$! ## # "" # & #" &%! " #!# # "&
! " "# #  " #  #! $#  # !!  #
%! ! $(
 ) 


Settings %! #"

 
 ! $(
 )
$#$# #
 "

DĆ10 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Log Frequency Sweep Made with the equation editor.

(LOG_SWP.WFM)

Figure DĆ8: Log Frequency Sweep Formula and Waveform

Constants  ! " !%         " !" "  
 #!
Description ! %$    & !!  ' ' " %  #
ȡ ȣ
 +
ȧp ŕ  ǒ  @
 Ǔ ) f ȧ

 
 
Ȣ 

 
Ȥ
   ! " !" "  #'  ! "   #' ) ! " "
!   ! " !%  
 !!#  "" " !! " % "! %$  ! " " " !%
  ! !" "  ! "  " #"  "    "
$   #'

ǒ  Ǔńǒ


Ǔ
  *

*

Settings $  "! 

  #'  (
#"#" "  !

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ11

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Amplitude Modulation Made with the equation editor.

(AM.WFM)

Figure DĆ9: Amplitude Modulation Formula and Waveform

Constants k0 is the frequency of the modulating signal, k1 is the carrier frequency, and
k2 is the modulation degree.
Description This example shows a double sideband (DSB) amplitude modulated
waveform with a modulation degree of 0.5. The modulating signal is a
cosine wave.
Settings Waveform points: 20000
Clock frequency: 100 MHz
Output time: 200 ms

DĆ12 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Frequency Modulation Made with the equation editor.

(FM.WFM)

Figure DĆ10: Frequency Modulation Formula and Waveform

Constant   ! "!  "&   !  "&   

! "& #!
Description   ! "&  !   $# !!  "  ! "!   $#
 "&    " !! !   ! $ ! $# 
!! !  "& ! ! "!    ! ! 
 !  "! %  # & 
Settings # !  
 "&  
'
"!"! !  m

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ13

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Damped Sine Wave Made with the equation editor.

(DMP_SIN.WFM)

Figure DĆ11: Damped Sine Wave Formula and Waveform

Constants k0 indicates the inductance (L), k1 indicates the capacitance (C), and k3
indicates the damping time constant.
Description This is an attenuated amplitude waveform with a resonance frequency of
1 MHz (L=2 mH, C=12.66 pF) and a damping time constant of 6 ms.
Settings Waveform points: 4000
Clock frequency: 100 MHz
Output time: 40 ms

DĆ14 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Pulse Width Modulation Made with the waveform editor.

(PWM.WFM)

Figure DĆ12: Pulse Width Modulation Waveform

Description  $# !  "  ! !   $#     
 $#     !  !$ $#   ! ! !

 $#
Settings # !  
 "%  &
"!"! !  m

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ15

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

PseudoĆRandom Pulse Made with the waveform editor.

(PRBS_15.WFM)

Figure DĆ13: PseudoĆRandom Pulse Waveform

Description An MĆseries pseudoĆrandom signal is created using the waveform editor's

timing display shift register generator function.
ąRegister length = 15
ąPoints/step = 1
ąThe encoding is NRZ.
When you output this waveform repeatly, you create the eight times
repetition waveforms with the sequence editor and expand its sequence file
into waveform file using the Expand SEQ into WFM function of the
waveform editor. Then you enable to output this waveform repeatly.
Settings Waveform points: 32767 (215-1)
Clock frequency: 100 MHz
Output time: 655.34 ms

DĆ16 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

π/4 DQPSK I Axis Signal The base band I-axis output for a digital cellular car telephone system is created
(DQPSKI.WFM) on the Tektronix digital signal processing work system (DSPW).

Bit rate 42 Kbps

Point number 32 Kwords
Clock frequency 21 kHz

Figure DĆ14: π/4 DQPSK I Axis Signal

π/4 DQPSK Q Axis Signal The base band Q-axis output for a digital cellular car telephone system is created
(DQPSKQ.WFM) on the Tektronix digital signal processing work system (DSPW).

Bit rate 42 Kbps

Point number 32 Kwords
Clock frequency 21 kHz

Figure DĆ15: π/4 DQPSK Q Axis Signal

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ17

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Waveform for Magnetic Made with the convolution waveform editor (Option 09).
Disk Readout Signal
(MDSK_RD.WFM)

Figure DĆ16: Waveform for Magnetic Disk Readout Signal

Description !# $" # &%! #!  # # %$# &%!
!# $#
" " # &%! ! ! "#! # &!## &# MDSK_WR.WFM
" "  &%! !# ""$  $"" $" GAUSS_P.WFM
&#  "'"# $" !""
Settings %! #"

 ! $'
  (
$#$# #
 m"

DĆ18 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Waveform for Magnetic Made with the waveform editor.

Disk Writing Signal
(MDSK_WR.WFM)

Figure DĆ17: Waveform for Magnetic Disk Readout Signal

Description Created a worstĆcase pattern with NRZI modulation using the bit set
function of the waveform editor timing display.
ą*WorstĆcase pattern (0101010110101010)
ąPattern length = 32
ąPoints/step = 8
ąThe encoding is NRZI
A signal with the same pattern is set for the MARKER1 as well.
Settings Waveform points: 512
Clock frequency: 100 MHz
Output time: 5.12 ms

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ19

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Video Signals in the NTSC NTSC color bar signals, NTSC Y-C separate signals and various kinds of NTSC
Directory signals are stored in the NTSC directory. These are NTSC video signals made up
of 1 – 4 color fields and 1050 lines (525 x 2). The clock frequency is 16 times
the sub-carrier frequency; a waveform is created on each line and the compiled
waveforms are assembled using the sequence editor.
The settings for the signals are described below.
Settings
Waveform points: 1H=3,640
Clock frequency: 57.27 MHz (3.579545 MHz × 16)
Output time: 33.37 ms
Waveform points: 3,822,000
Video signals are output by changing the directory to NTSC.DIR and then
selecting the following sequence files in the SETUP menu:
( 1) Color Bar (Composite) signal $CB1-2H.SEQ
( 2) Color Bar (Luminance) signal $CB1-(Y).SEQ
( 3) Color Bar (Chrominance) signal $CB1-(C).SEQ
( 4) Multiburst signal $M-BURST.SEQ
( 5) Modulated Ramp signal $RAMP.SEQ
( 6) Sweep signal (1  10 MHz) $SWEEP10.SEQ
( 7) SMPTE Color Bar signal $SMPTE.SEQ
( 8) IYQB signal $IYQB.SEQ
( 9) Reversed Blue Bar signal $RBLU.SEQ
(10) Color Bar + Reversed Blue Bar + IYQB signal $MIX.SEQ
Figure D-18 through Figure D-26 shows the NTSC composite video signal.

DĆ20 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Figure DĆ18: Color Bar (Composite) Signal ($CB1-2H.SEQ)

Figure D-19 shows the NTSC Y-C separate signal. Y (luminance signal) and C
(chroma signal) have been created separately, so if these are output separately to
channel 1 and channel 2 they will become Y-C separate signals; when these are
combined and output, they become a composite signal. A 50 W/75 W conversion
adaptor is required for 75 W output.

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ21

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Luminance Signal Chroma Signal

Figure DĆ19: NTSC YĆC separate signals

Figure DĆ20: Multiburst Signal ($M-BURST.SEQ)

DĆ22 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Figure DĆ21: Modulated Ramp Signal ($RAMP.SEQ)

Figure DĆ22: Sweep Signal ($SWEEP.SEQ)

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ23

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Figure DĆ23: SMPTE Color Bar Signal ($SMPTE.SEQ)

Figure DĆ24: IYQB Signal ($IYQB.SEQ)

DĆ24 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library

Figure DĆ25: Reversed Blue Bar signal ($RBLU.SEQ)

Figure D-26 shows that the Color Bar signal, IYQB signal and Reversed Blue
Bar signal are sequenced at the rate of 2:3:4 respectively.

Figure DĆ26: Color Bar + IYQB signal + Reversed Blue Bar ($MIX.SEQ)

AWG2021 User Manual DĆ25

Appendix D: Sample Waveform Library


 AWG2021 User Manual

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

Introduction
This summary shows the AWG2021 functional block diagrams, explains each
block, and gives some operating precautions which are of practical value in
understanding the fundamental operating concepts of the instrument.
For convenience, some functional block diagrams show the configuration with a
second channel installed (Option 02). For blocks in which CH1 and CH2 operate
the same, only CH1 is explained.

AWG2021 User Manual EĆ1

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

Block Diagram
Figure E-1 is a block diagram of the circuits from the clock oscillator to the
digital-to-analog converter (DAC). Figure E-2 shows the block diagram
continuing where Figure E-1 left off and goes until the output. The rest of this
summary explains the individual blocks.

MARKER1 OUT

MARKER2 OUT

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Waveform CH1

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Memory DAC DAC
External CLOCK IN Output

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
External CLOCK OUT
CH1 Sequence

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Clock Control
Divider

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Clock

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

Oscillator
Trigger
Controll

External
ÎÎÎ CH2
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Sequence

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
TRIGGER Clock Control
INPUT

ÎÎÎ
Divider

ÎÎÎÎÎ
SYNC
Signal

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Output
CH2

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Waveform
Memory DAC DAC

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Output

MARKER1 OUT

MARKER2 OUT

Figure EĆ1: Block Diagram (1)

EĆ2 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary


  "  "




ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î   Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ


Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ !  Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î


! !
! !
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î Î

"  ! # 

Î
  

Î
Î
"  "


 Î
Î
  ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
!  Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ


! !

Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î Î


! !





Figure EĆ2: Block Diagram (2)

AWG2021 User Manual EĆ3

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

Clock Oscillator The oscillator for internal clock use is normally a PLL (phase lock loop) type. It
uses a liquid crystal oscillator that provides a stable 12.8 MHz signal. The clock
oscillates from 250 MHz to 125 MHz. The minimum frequency resolution is 5
kHz and the frequency can be set with 4-digit precision.
Frequencies under 125 MHz can be obtained by changing the frequency division
of the clock divider. In this way, a clock frequency as low as 10 Hz is possible.
Figure E-3 shows the configuration of the clock oscillator.

Voltage
Phase Controlled
Detector Oscillator
(High)

Crystal
Oscillator
Clock Output
12.8 MHz
Voltage
Phase Controlled
Detector Oscillator
(Low)

Figure EĆ3: Clock Oscillator Configuration

Trigger Control This block controls the AWG2021 MODE menu operating (output) mode.
First, select the clock source. Normally, the clock oscillator output is used.


. The external clock input and output are used when more than 2 channels
must be synchronized with the clock. Also, the external clock input can be
connected to another oscillator, for example, a frequency sweep signal generator.

Clock Operations by Operation Mode. There are four output operation modes:

Cont Mode. The clock is sent to the clock divider regardless of the trigger.

Trggered and Burst Mode. When the (External or Manual) trigger is
generated, the clock is sent to the clock divider to obtain an output signal
synchronized with the trigger. If the sync signal is set to Start, a pulse of
about 100 ns width is output.

Gated Mode. While the gate signal is True, the clock is sent continuously to
the CH1 clock divider.

EĆ4 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

AWG2021 Parallel Operation. When more than two channel outputs are needed,
connect as shown below.

Simple parallel operation. The SYNC output of the master AWG2021 is
connected to the TRIGGER INPUT of the slave AWG2021. Figure E-4
shows a connection example.

  

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ



ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
 
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
 

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
   

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ



Î


Î
 

Figure EĆ4: Connection Example 1

When Sync in the MODE menu is set to Start, a pulse is output at the
SYNC output when the trigger is generated. This pulse is used as the trigger
for the slave AWG2021. In this case, if there is no external trigger source,
manual triggers may be used.


. Since the sync output is output when the waveform is actually output, it
lags somewhat behind the trigger signal.

External trigger or gate signals to two AWG2021 instruments. Figure E-5

shows the connection method for applying external trigger or gate signals
simultaneously to two AWG2021 instruments. Use BNC 50 W cables of the
same length to connect the trigger source to both AWG2021 instruments.

AWG2021 User Manual EĆ5

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

 

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ  ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î 

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
   

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î


 

Figure EĆ5: Connection Example 2

When there is only one trigger source output, connect to both AWG2021
instruments using the same minimum possible length 50 W cable and a T
adapter.
For Triggered or Burst mode, output synchronized with the trigger is
obtained by applying the external trigger at the same time to the AWG2021
instruments.
When continuous synchronized output is necessary, use Gated mode. SYNC
output is obtained from when the gate signal goes True until it goes False.
After the gate signal goes false, to output again, it is necessary to reset the
output with the side menu STOP item.

Output synchronized with the clock. Connect the clock output of the master
AWG2021 to the clock input of the slave AWG2021 with a 50 W cable and
set the slave’s clock source to External.
Figure E-6 shows a connection example.

EĆ6 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary


 

 
  

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ   ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ  

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
 

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ 

ÎÎ
 

Figure EĆ6: Connection Example 3


. Since a 1-meter 50 W cable gives a delay of about 5 ns, make the cable
connecting the clock output and clock input as short as possible. Also, make the
cables connecting the trigger input to both the master and the slave the same
length.

If the clock delay due to the cable is a problem, use another clock source and
connect a cable from the clock source to the both AWG2021 clock inputs.
Make the cables the same length.

AWG2021 User Manual EĆ7

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

Trigger Input, SYNC Output, and Waveform Timing. Figure E-7 shows the
relationship between trigger input, SYNC output, and waveform timing.

Trigger Input
(Slope:Positive)

100 ns max

SYNC Output
(Start)

Waveform Output
About 10 ns
(This delay changes if a filter is inserted.)

Figure EĆ7: Trigger Input, SYNC Output, and Waveform Timing

Clock Divider The CH1 clock divider divides the clock signal from the clock oscillator the
amount necessary to obtain the frequency value indicated in the Clock box in the
SETUP menu. Division by up to 224 is possible, and the CH1 and CH2 dividers
can have different division ratios. The CH2 clock divider (that is, CH2 clock
frequency) is set in the Divider box in the SETUP menu.
When an external clock source is selected, the CH1 clock divider does not
operate and the clock signals are just passed through, as is. However, the CH2
clock divider will still divide the external clock source based on the selected
ratio. Figure E-8 shows the configuration of a clock divider.

n/256 n/256 n/256

n = 2  256

Figure EĆ8: Clock Divider Configuration

EĆ8 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

Sequence Control This block comprises the sequence memory that stores the contents of sequence
control, the counters that read out the contents of that memory, and output the
actual waveform memory addresses.

Table EĆ1: Sequence File (XXX.SEQ)

File Name Repetition Count


 

 

For a sequence file, such as that shown in Table E-1, here is what is actually
stored in sequence memory.
AAA.WFM actual addresses
AAA.WFM data length
looping counter value: 3
BBB.WFM actual addresses
BBB.WFM data length
looping counter value: 16
The sequence memory capacity is in 8 Kbyte steps for handling even complex
waveforms.
The AAA.WFM actual addresses are loaded into the address counter, the
AAA.WFM data length is loaded into the length counter, and the looping counter
value is loaded into the looping counter.
The address and length counters operate with the clock signal from the clock
divider frequency divided by 8 (because the waveform memory is partitioned
into 8 banks, this circuit uses a 18@ clock).
When the value set in the looping counter is reached, the sequence memory
address counter is incremented and the contents of the next step are read.
When the burst count is set, that value is set in the burst counter and output the
required number of times.
Figure E-9 shows the relationship between sequence memory and waveform
memory.

AWG2021 User Manual EĆ9

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

Sequence Memory

AAA WFM
Address
Address
Counter

AAA WFM Data Waveform

Length Length Memory
Counter

Looping Control
Value Looping
Counter

Sequence Memory
Address Counter Clock (1/8)

Figure EĆ9: Relationship Between Sequence Memory and Waveform Memory

Waveform Memory The waveform memory comprises sixteen 32K
8 SRAM chips for 256K words
of 16-bit word memory. Of these 16 bits, 12 bits are waveform data, 1 bit is
Marker 1, and 1 bit is Marker 2
The waveform and marker data is loaded into waveform memory when a file is
selected with the SETUP menu Waveform Sequence item.
Since the waveform memory must be read out at high speed (250 MS/s), it is
partitioned into 8 banks and read out with 8:1 multiplexing (parallel-serial
conversion). Therefore, the memory itself operates with a 1/8 clock.
Figure E-10 shows the waveform memory configuration.

EĆ10 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

 ! 

    

 
 ! 

 
!

 
 
 ! 

 
 
 
 ! 

 

Figure EĆ10: Waveform Memory Configuration

The waveform data length can be any multiple of 8 points, from a minimum of
64 points to a maximum of 256K points. The total number of waveform data
points that can be used in a single sequence file is 256K.

Data Length. Generally, outputting high precision (high S/N ratio) waveforms
requires an adequate number of data points.
For example, when outputting triangular waveforms, about 8000 points are
needed to minimize the jaggedness of the waveform. That is why the AWG2021
uses a DAC with a resolution of about 4000 (12 bits) for the vertical amplitude.
Figure E-11 shows the relationship between the triangular wave resolution and
the number of data points.

AWG2021 User Manual EĆ11

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary


 









 
 

Figure EĆ11: Relationship Between Triangular Wave Resolution and Number of Data
Points

For a triangular wave, extra waveform points beyond 8000 are meaningless. This
applies not only to triangular waves but to smooth waveforms, in general.
In normal use, this level of precision is rarely required. When it is not, the
number of waveform points may be reduced. In the equation editor and the
waveform editor, the default value for the number of waveform points is 1000.
When a sine wave is created with 1000 points, the size of this fold back
component is –60 dB, which should be no problem in ordinary use.
When making a waveform with less than 1000 points, because you are using the
maximum clock frequency, use a filter. In this case, observe the following points.

According to sampling theory, if the ideal filter is used, with a mere two
points of data for the highest frequency component the waveform has, the
waveform can be reproduced. In order to eliminate overshoot and ringing,
the filters in the AWG2021 have Bessel characteristics with relatively gentle
shoulder characteristics. That is why more points are required.

The amount of data required depends on the waveform shape, the S/N ratio
required, the filter cutoff frequency, and other such factors. Therefore, output
the waveform on the oscilloscope, spectrum analyzer, or the like, and check
that the waveform is what you need.

Care is particularly necessary in creating waveforms with the equation editor.

When the Waveform Data Length is Not a Multiple of 8. Earlier, we explained that
only multiples of 8 can be set as the data length, but when the data length is
small, this becomes a problem.
When this instrument is used in Triggered mode, this problem is solved by
simply adding data at the end until the total length is a multiple of 8.

EĆ12 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

In Cont mode, the original data length is multiplied to make it a multiple of 8.

For example, if the original waveform has 60 points, two of them are strung
together to make a waveform with 120 points. However, in this case the SYNC
output is only generated for every other waveform. Figure E-12 shows the
relationship between the waveform points and SYNC output in Cont mode.

 


 


 





Figure EĆ12: Relationship Between Waveform Points and SYNC Output in Cont
Mode

The marker signals are written into waveform memory in the same manner as
waveform data. This data passes through the marker output amplifier as is and is
output.

DAC. The DAC converts the digital data from the waveform memory into analog
signals. This converter has a resolution of 12 bits.
When the output voltage is set, an attenuator is used, but since this attenuator’s
voltage division ratio is fixed, the DAC reference voltage is varied to provide
continuously variable voltage.

Multiplier (AM) When this mode is not selected, the multiplier is not included in the signal path.
This multiplier has a 30 MHz band for the carrier signal and a 4 MHz band for
the modulation signal. When this block is selected, the following two AM modes
can be used.

External AM Mode. AM modulation is applied to the CH1 signal from the rear
panel BNC connector. Table E-2 shows the output signal amplitude for external
modulation signals.

AWG2021 User Manual EĆ13

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

Table EĆ2: Output Signal Amplitude - External

Modulation

External Modulation Signal Output Signal Amplitude

    
    
  

With ±1 V input, 100% amplitude modulation is possible. Figure E-13 shows

100% modulation.

Figure EĆ13: 100% Amplitude Modulation

Internal AM Mode. This mode can be used when the CH2 output Option 02 is
installed. This mode amplitude modulates the CH1 signal with the CH2 signal.
Unlike the external AM mode discussed above, in order for this circuit to also be
used as a multiplier, such operations as automatically applying an offset to the
CH2 signal are not done.
100% modulation occurs when the CH2 signal is 5 V (full scale). When this
signal is negative, the CH1 signal is inverted. The value calculated with 5 V set
as 100% is displayed at the bottom right of the SETUP menu CRT screen.


   
 W  

EĆ14 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

An example is when the CH1 signal is amplitude modulated with the CH2
signal. If CH2 is set to an amplitude of 5 V and an offset of 2.5 V, a 100%
modulated waveform is obtained.
Internal AM mode is useful for such tasks as varying the amplitude of a certain
part of a waveform in real time. Due to the restrictions created by the multiplier
bandwidth and the signal delay due to the amplifiers, filter, etc. — as can be seen
in the block diagram — this circuit is not meant for applications at high
frequencies.
When high frequencies are necessary or when high precision is required, use the
editor. It can handle simple multiplication of waveforms.

Preamplifier (Adder) This block is an adder circuit using an ordinary operational amplifier. This adder
has a bandwidth of 30 MHz in Add mode. The output is the voltage set for CH1
added to the CH2 signal.
In order to effectively use the CH1 and CH2 filter, offset,and other functions, the
CH2 signal is added before the CH1 filter. Therefore, the CH2 signal output is
not the value set for CH2.
The actual value is (CH2 set voltage
1@5) + CH1 set up value. Adding CH2
value is calculated and displayed at the bottom right of the SETUP menu CRT
screen.

  

  
 W   

An example is the display when an amplitude of 2 V and an offset of 0 V are set

for CH2.
For addition, the output size (CH1 + the actual value of CH2) can exceed 5 V. If
so, the signal is distorted.
In Add mode, if for example noise is created on CH2 and this is added to the
CH1 waveform, the amount of noise can be varied in real time. Due to the
restrictions created by the adder bandwidth and the signal delay due to the amps,
filter, etc. — as can be seen in the block diagram — this circuit is not meant for
applications at high frequencies.
When high frequencies are necessary or when high precisionis required, use the
editor. It can handle simple addition of waveforms.

Filter The AWG2021 has four low-pass filters, 1 MHz, 5 MHz, 20 MHz, and 50 MHz.
They are all Bessel characteristic filters and have soft shoulder characteristics to

AWG2021 User Manual EĆ15

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

avoid overshooting and ringing. Figure E-14 shows representative characteris-

tics.

   

10

20

30

40

50

60

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
  

Figure EĆ14: Representative Filter Characteristics

These filters can be used to eliminate extraneous components of the waveform

and to reduce the foldback component when there are a small number of
waveform points. Specifically, these filters reduce the jaggedness of the
waveform and raise the S/N ratio. The rising and falling time for the waveform
when it is not passed through the filters is about 4 ns.

Time Difference from SYNC Signals with Each Filter. Filters have their own unique
delay time. This time difference with the SYNC signals, marker signals, and
other output signals can be varied by changing the filter value.
Table E-3 shows the delay relative to the sync signals caused by the filters.

Table EĆ3: Filter Timer Delay Relative to SYNC

Signals

Filter Delay
   
   

EĆ16 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

Table EĆ3: Filter Timer Delay Relative to SYNC

Signals (Cont.)

Filter Delay
   
   
  

Figure E-15 shows the time difference (t) between signals and SYNC signals.


 



Figure EĆ15: Time Difference Between Signals and SYNC Signals

Time Difference from Markers. Markers are written as data into waveform memory
in the same manner as waveform data, but since the waveform goes through
amplifiers and other elements, it is output somewhat after the marker. Applying a
filter to the waveform increases this time delay. This delay is about the same as
the delays relative to the sync signals given in Table E-3.

X5 Amplifier When the output amplitude is 0.501 V or greater, a x5 amplifier is inserted in the
signal path. The waveform is affected by passing through this x5 amp, and some
error is generated. If high precision waveform output is required, hold the output
amplitude below 0.501 V.

Attenuator This block comprises two –3 dB attenuators, one –10 dB attenuator, and one
–20 dB attenuator.
Including the amount that the DAC reference voltage can be changed, a total of
40 dB of attenuation is possible. Figure E-16 shows the attenuator configuration.

AWG2021 User Manual EĆ17

Appendix E: Functional Operation Summary

       

Figure EĆ16: Attenuator Configuration

These attenuators and the above x5 amp are selected automatically by setting the
output voltage.

Offset This block gives an offset voltage to the output. This circuit is a power source
that can both push out and pull in. The offset voltage is calculated for output
terminated with exactly 50 W. Since this circuit has a capacity of ±100 mA, an
offset of up to ±100 mA
25 W (50 W || 50 W) = ±2.5 V can be applied
independent of the output voltage setting.
This makes it possible to simulate a waveform that has a large offset voltage
with an extremely small signal. Figure E-17 shows the offset circuit.

± 


 


W

W

Figure EĆ17: Offset Circuit

EĆ18 AWG2021 User Manual

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

General Description
This appendix covers the following items.

Horizontal axis scaling

Sampling theorem

Differentiation

Integration

Random (rnd) function

Pattern code

Logical operation

Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT)

Repackaging for shipment

Factory settings

Horizontal Axis Scaling

The horizontal axis scaling uses linear interpolation.

  

 

  
  



    

   

Figure FĆ1: Linear Interpolation

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ1

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Here is the equation for linear interpolation.

x–x i
f (x) + x –x i {f (x i)1)–f (x i)} ) f (x i)
i)1

Here, i is the waveform point number; i takes integer values i = 1, 2, ..., n.


. The number of points can be increased or decreased, but the waveform
may lose its characteristics when the number of points are decreased.

Example 1: 5 points padded to 9 points.


  
 



    


Figure FĆ2: Point Padding

Example 2: Reducing from 9 points to 6


  
 



    


Figure FĆ3: Point Compression

FĆ2 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Sampling Theorem
When the signal is continuous and the highest frequency component of the signal
is f0, sampling with Te1/2f0 loses none of the data contained in the signal. T is
the sampling interval. This theorem is well known as the sampling theorem. If
data is created to meet this theorem, the necessary signal can be obtained.

NJ(2pńT)(t–nTń2)Nj
ȍ X(nt) sin(2pńT)(t–nTń2)
R
X(t) +
n+–R

A continuous analog signal x(t) can be reproduced from the digital data with the
above equation.

Differentiation
The diff() function calculates the central deviation as the differential value. The
equation below expresses the central deviation when the function f(x) is given at
even intervals of nx.

f (x ) Dx)–f (x–Dx)
fȀ(x) [
(2 Dx)

In actual practice, when function f(x)is expressed by n values, the differential

value f’(xi) at point xi is given by the following equation.

{f (x i)1)–f (x i–1)}
fȀ(x i) [ n
2

Here, n is the number of waveform points and i is an integer in the range, i = 1,

2, ..., n.

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ3

Appendix F: Miscellaneous





 


n
n

Figure FĆ4: Equation Differentiation

The values at the first and last points are obtained not from the center deviation,
but from the following equations:
First point

n{–3f (x 1) ) 4f (x 2)–f (x 3)}

fȀ(x 1) [
2

Last point

n{f (x n–2)–4f (x n–1) ) 3f (x n)}

fȀ(x n) [
2

FĆ4 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Integration
The integ() function integrates numerically based on a trapezoidal formula. The
trapezoidal formula is expressed with the following equation.

ŕ f (x)dx [ ȍ f (x
n

i+1
i–1 ) ) f (x i)
2
@
x

+
x {f (x 1) ) 2f (x 2) ) 2f (x 3) ) AAA ) 2f (x n–1) ) f (x n)}

2

Here, n is the number of waveform points and i is an integer in the range, i = 1,

2, ..., n.





 







Figure FĆ5: Equation Integration

The integration is actually calculated with the following formula.

ŕ f (x)dx [ 1ń2{f (x ) ) 2f (x ) ) 2f (x ) ) AAA ) 2f (x

1 2 3 n–1 ) ) f (x n)}

However, the imaginary initial value f(x0) always takes a value of 0.

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ5

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Random (rnd) Function

A random number generation algorithm uses an uniform distribution random
generation routine and the central-limit theorem to derive Gaussian distribution
random numbers.
Central-limit theorem: when the independent random variables X1, X2..., and Xn
conform to an identical random distribution, the mean and variance of x = (X1 +
X2 +... + Xn)/n are given as follows:

E(n) + m V(n) + s2ńn

Even if the initial random distribution is not normal, if a reasonably large value
for n is used, the arithmetical mean x of a considerably large number of variables
will be close to the normal distribution.
In actuality, 12 is used for n, uniform random numbers are accumulated n times
and their arithmetical mean is derived as the ultimate Gaussian distribution
random number.
The following algorithm is used to generate uniform distribution random
numbers:

seed [n] + (253.0 seed [n–1] ) 1.0) mod 16777216

ran + seed [n] ń16777216

FĆ6 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Pattern Codes
On the AWG2021, it is possible to select the coding system used when pattern
strings are output. If the code will be affected by the immediately preceding data,
the data item just before the first item of data will be calculated as 0. The
following tables show the coding systems.

NRZ: Normal data format

Pattern Output Data

 

Example



 


  



 


  

NRZI: The data changes when a 1 is received.

Each pattern is made up of 2 data items.

Example



 


  



   

    

 

RZ: The data always returns to 0.

Each pattern is made up of 2 data items.

Pattern Output Data

 

Example



 


  



















AWG2021 User Manual FĆ7

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

MFM (Modified FM): Each pattern is made up of 2 data items. In the table
below, data in parentheses () indicates the immediately preceding data of the
data for which coding is being attempted. Here the output data is inverted
every time when 1 appears in the codes.

Code
Pattern Conversion
 
 
 

Example
            

           
 
 
            

BI-PHASE: Each pattern is made up of 2 data items.

Pattern Output Data

 
 

Example
            
            

FĆ8 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

f/2f: Each pattern is made up of 2 data items. In the table below, data in
parentheses () indicates the immediately preceding data of the data for which
coding is being attempted.

Pattern Output Data

 
 
 
 

Example
            
            

1-7 RLL (Run-length Limited Codes): 2-item patterns are made up of 3

data items, and 4-item patterns are made up of 6 data items. In the table
below, x indicates that this value will become 1 when the preceding bit is 0,
and 0 when the preceding bit is 1. Here the output data is inverted every time
when 1 appears in the codes.

Code
Pattern Conversion
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Example
           

          
 
 
           

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ9

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

2-7 RLL: 2-item patterns are made up of 4 data items, 3-items pattern are
made up of 6 data items and 4-item patterns are made up of 8 data items.
Here the output data is inverted every time when 1 appears in the codes.

Code
Pattern Conversion
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Example

         
         

  

         

user defined: When user defined has been selected as the code for pattern
setting from the Code selection menu, the following pattern systems can be
created by setting the values for Source Data Pattern, Converted Code,
Initial Src, Initial Code and Out[1/0].

NRZ
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] High/Low

Source Data
Pattern Converted Code
 
 

FĆ10 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

NRZ1
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] Invert/Keep

Source Data
Pattern Converted Code







RZ
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] High/Low

Source Data
Pattern Converted Code




 

BIPHASE
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] High/Low

Source Data
Pattern Converted Code



 

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ11

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

MFM
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] Invert/Keep

Source Data
Pattern Converted Code






f/2f
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] Invert/Keep

Source Data
Pattern Converted Code



 

1-7 RLL
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] Invert/Keep

Source Data
Pattern Converted Code








 












 



















FĆ12 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

2-7 RLL
Initial Src 0
Initial Code 0
Out[1/0] Invert/Keep

Source Data
Pattern Converted Code
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Logical Operation
In the waveform editor timing display, it is possible to perform logical operations
for data on different data lines. The following logical tables and timing charts
show examples of each type of operations.

AND

A B A*B
  
  
  
  

 

 



AWG2021 User Manual FĆ13

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

NAND

A B A*B
  
  
  
  

  

  



OR

A B A+B
  
  
  
  

  

  



FĆ14 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

NOR

A B A+B
  
  
  
  

 

 



EX-OR

A B A
B
  
  
  
  

 

 

⊕

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ15

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

EX-NOR

A B A
B
  
  
  
  

 

 

⊕

FFT (Fast Fourier Transforms)

FFT is an algorithm for fast calculation of discrete Fourier transform. FFT
transforms the time axis signal onto the frequency axis. FFT can also provide the
frequency component magnitudes and phases. With the FFT editor, you can use
inverse FFT (IFFT) to generate the real time data from the frequency component
magnitudes and phases.

Basic FFT Rules FFT discrete Fourier transforms any number of sample points, but certain rules
must be followed.
1. The Record Length must be a Power of 2.
The FFT calculations can only be used when the record length is an power of
2 (2, 4, 8, ...2n). The minimum record length for the this instrument is 512
points, and the maximum record length is 16384 points.
If the record length is not a power of 2, the waveform is edited expanded to
a power of 2. Then when the editing is complete and the waveform is saved,
the waveform is reduced to its original record length by interpolating the
data. Therefore, it is recommended to use the record length of a power of 2
when accurate data is needed.
2. Nyquist Frequency and Aliasing
FFT transforms the sampled data on the time axis into data on the discrete
frequency axis from 0 Hz to the maximum permitted frequency. The

FĆ16 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

maximum permitted frequency is called the Nyquist frequency and is 1/2 the
sampling rate.
If the signal has frequency components above the Nyquist frequency, they
appear on this limited discrete frequency axis too. They appear as no
different than noise aliased from the Nyquist frequency. For example, if there
is a signal 5 MHz above the Nyquist frequency, it appears as if it is 5 MHz
below the Nyquist frequency. On the other hand, in the D/A conversion, a
frequency component is output aliased above the Nyquist frequency.
To deal with aliasing, first it is necessary to sample with a clock greater than
double the highest frequency component in the signal. Second, a low-pass
filter is required to block any signal above the Nyquist frequency.

Record Length and The frequency spectrum frequency range and resolution depend on the time axis
Frequency Resolution sampling rate and the record length (N).
For the given data length on the time axis, FFT has frequency components from
–N/2 to N/2–1. However, when the real number data on the time axis is
transformed, FFT gives results symmetrical about 0 Hz (DC). Because of this
symmetry, all the necessary frequency data is contained between 0 and N/2 – 1.
Thus, with FFT if values are given from zero to the positive N/2 point, this is
enough. Since the non-DC components have energy dispersed on both the
positive and negative sides, the DC component is 2x the other components.
Since the DC component is scaled by 1/2 with the FFT editor, DC and the other
components can be handled equally.
Since FFT has N/2 sampling points on the discrete frequency axis between DC
and the Nyquist frequency (FN), the frequency resolution is FN/(N/2). Since the
Nyquist frequency is one half the sampling rate (fs), the frequency resolution can
also be expressed as fs/N.
Therefore, if the sampling rate is fixed, when the record length is increased, the
frequency resolution rises. On the other hand, if the record length is fixed,
raising the sampling rate raises the Nyquist frequency and lowers the frequency
resolution.

Relationship Between The phase is the quantitative displacement from the standard time. The cos(2 π
Phase and Delay ft) has a 0 phase, but sin(2 π ft) has a 90 degree delay. The standard time is the
sampling start time.

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ17

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

 π 


 π 

_

Figure FĆ6: Phase and Delay

FFT Window Functions FFT calculates with limited data blocks. Also, since FFT calculations assume
that the sampled data blocks are repeated infinitely, frequency error arises from
non-continuities generated at the edges of data blocks. This frequency error is
called leakage error.
The leakage error depends on the FFT window function selected. The processing
to bring the window function at both ends towards 0 in order to give the FFT
continuity is called taper processing. This instrument has the square wave
window, which does not apply taper processing to the time region data, and five
FFT window functions that do carry out taper processing.
The FFT window functions in the time region correspond to filters in the
frequency region. This is convolution and it is well known that it has a character-
istic of sin(x)/x for square window. These filters have a high lobe at the center, in
other words a transmitting band width,. This lobe determines how great the
neighboring frequency components can be separated.
The transmission amount for the side lobes neighboring this center lobe
determines the amount of leakage. Leakage is the spread of energy from a certain
frequency component for the displayed frequency spectrum. Frequency
components with small magnitudes are covered overall by leakage.

FĆ18 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

 

    
   

     

    
      
     
  

    

Figure FĆ7: Concept of Convolution

Figures F-8 through F-13 show the FFT window functions prepared for this
instrument and their characteristics. Also, note that if you use a window function
with taper processing, then carry out inverse Fourier transformation to make
real-time data, that real-time data is tapered.
The window functions are effective for investigating the frequency components
of the acquired waveform, but the waveform after the window function is applied
differs from the original waveform.

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ19

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Square Wave Window. The square wave window does not taper the time region
data. The filter shape in the frequency region is sin(x)/x. The square wave
window is appropriate for observing the frequency spectrum of non-repetitive
signals. The square wave window is also used for observing frequency compo-
nents near DC.

    #!

 

 !
  
 
 
# "!  !"

Figure FĆ8: Square Window and Frequency Characteristic

Hanning Window. The Hanning window is a function derived from the cos
function. This window function has superior magnitude precision and leakage
elimination characteristics.

    #!

 

  !
 



  

# "!  !"

Figure FĆ9: Hanning Window and Frequency Characteristic

FĆ20 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Hamming Window. The hamming window is similar to a hanning window, but it

suppresses more the transmissivity for the side lobes next to the transmitting
bandwidth. Compared to FFT processing using a hanning window, the degree of
separation between two frequencies is greater, as can be seen in Figure F-10.
This window is particularly effective for separating close frequencies.

    " 

 

 
 
   

" !    !

Figure FĆ10: Hamming Window and Frequency Characteristic

BlackmanĆHarris Window. Of the six window functions in this instrument, the

Blackman-Harris window has the broadest transmission bandwidth (and
therefore, lowest frequency resolution) and the lowest side lobe transmission
(and therefore, lowest leakage). This window is particularly suited for observing
wide range frequency spectra.

    " 

 
 

 
 

  

" !    !

Figure FĆ11: BlackmanĆHarris Window and Frequency Characteristic

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ21

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Blackman Window. The Blackman window suppresses the side lobe magnitudes
in the frequency region lower than the hamming window does and suppresses
leakage even farther. However, it has inferior frequency resolution.

    #!
 



 !

  

   

# "!  !"

Figure FĆ12: Blackman Window and Frequency Characteristic

Triangle Wave Window. The triangle wave window is a convolution of two square
windows half the width of the window. Therefore, the triangle wave window
frequency spectrum is the product of the square wave windows.

    #!
 


 !

  

  

# "!  !"

Figure FĆ13: Triangle Window and Frequency Characteristic

FĆ22 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Repackaging for Shipment

If this instrument is shipped by commercial transportation, use the original
packaging material. Unpack the instrument carefully from the shipping container
to save the carton and packaging material for this purpose.
If the original packaging is unfit for use or is not available, repackage the
instrument as follows:
1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton having inside dimensions at
least six inches greater than the instrument dimensions and having a carton
test strength of at least 275 pounds.
2. If the instrument is being shipped to a Tektronix Service Center for repair or
calibration, attach a tag to the instrument showing the following: owner of
the instrument (with address), the name of a person at your firm who may be
contacted if additional information is needed, complete instrument type and
serial number, and a description of the service required.
3. Wrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent to protect the
outside finish and prevent entry of packing materials into the instrument.
4. Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage or urethane
foam between the carton and the instrument, allowing for three inches of
padding on each side (including top and bottom).
5. Seal the carton with shipping tape or with an industrial stapler.
6. Mark the address of the Tektronix Service Center and your return address on
the carton in one or more prominent locations.

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ23

Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Factory Settings
When Reset to Factory is selected from the UTILITY Misc menu, this
instrument’s parameters are reset to the values they had at the factory. Table F-1
lists these factory settings.

Table FĆ1: Factory Settings

Setup Menu
Clock Frequency 100.00 MHz
Clock Source Internal
CH1 Operation Normal
Filter Through
Amplitude 1.000 V
Offset 0.000 V
Display Graphics
MODE Menu
Operating mode Cont
Triggered Slope Positive
Gated Polarity Positive
Level 1.4 V
Impedance 1 MW
Sync Start (Sync is End when the operation mode is Cont.)
LOAD/SAVE Menu
Device Disk
Auto Load Off
UTILITY Menu
Misc Display... Brightness 70%
Misc Display... Catalog Order Name1
Misc Display... Data Time Off
Misc Hardcopy... Format BMP
Misc Hardcopy... Port Disk
Diag/Cal Diagnostics All
Diag/Cal Calibrations All
FG Menu
Function waveform Selection Sine
Frequency 2.500 MHz

FĆ24 AWG2021 User Manual

 Appendix F: Miscellaneous

Table FĆ1: Factory Settings (Cont.)

FG Menu
  

  
   
  

The following UTILITY menu settings are not affected by Reset to Factory.
Remote Port
GPIB Address
GPIB operating mode
Setting the RS-232-C parameters
Date/Time

AWG2021 User Manual FĆ25

Appendix F: Miscellaneous


 AWG2021 User Manual

Appendix G: Inspection and Cleaning

Inspect and clean the instrument as often as operating conditions require. The
collection of dirt can cause instrument overheating and breakdown. Dirt acts as
an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat dissipation. Dirt also provides an
electrical conduction path that can cause an instrument failure, especially under
high-humidity conditions.


To prevent damage avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that
might damage the plastics used in this instrument. Use only deionized water
when cleaning the menu buttons or front-panel buttons. Use a ethyl alcohol
solution as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water.
Avoid the use of high pressure compressed air when cleaning dust from the
interior of this instrument. (High pressure air can cause ESD.) Instead, use low
pressure compressed air (about 9 psi).

Inspection Ċ Exterior Using Table G-1 as a guide, inspect the outside of the instrument for damage,
wear, and missing parts. You should thoroughly check instruments that appear to
have been dropped or otherwise abused to verify correct operation and perfor-
mance. Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to
further damage to the instrument.

Table GĆ1: External inspection check list

Item Inspect for Repair action

Cabinet, front panel, and cover Cracks, scratches, deformations, damaged Replace defective module
hardware or gaskets
FrontĆpanel knobs Missing, damaged, or loose knobs Repair or replace missing or defective knobs
Connectors Broken shells, cracked insulation, and Replace defective modules; clear or wash out
deformed contacts. Dirt in connectors dirt
Carrying handle and cabinet feet Correct operation Replace defective module
Accessories Missing items or parts of items, bent pins, Replace damaged or missing items, frayed
broken or frayed cables, and damaged cables, and defective modules
connectors

AWG2021 User Manual GĆ1

Appendix G: Inspection and Cleaning

Cleaning Procedure Ċ To clean the instrument exterior, do the following:

Exterior

To avoid injury or death, unplug the power cord from line voltage
before cleaning the instrument. To avoid getting moisture inside the instrument
during external cleaning, use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applica-
tor.

1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the instrument with a lint-free cloth.
2. Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general purpose
detergent-and-water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
3. Clean the monitor screen with a lint-free cloth dampened with either ethyl
alcohol or, preferably, a gentle, general purpose detergent-and-water solution.

Lubrication. There is no periodic lubrication required for this instrument.

GĆ2 AWG2021 User Manual